BA01338R/09/EN/07.21
715431302021-09-21

Products

Solutions

Valid as of version
ENU000A, V2.04.xx

Operating Instructions
Memograph M, RSG45
Advanced Data Manager

Services

Memograph M, RSG45

Table of contents

Table of contents
6.3.2

6.4

Electrical connection, terminal
assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6.3.3 Connection example: Auxiliary
voltage output as transmitter power
supply for 2-wire sensors . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.3.4 Connection example: Auxiliary
voltage output as transmitter power
supply for 4-wire sensors . . . . . . . . . . 24
6.3.5 Connection example: HART® input ina point-to-point connection . . . . . . . . 25
6.3.6 Connection example: HART® input ina Multidrop connection . . . . . . . . . . . 25
6.3.7 RS232/RS485 interface (CPU card,
slot 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.3.8 Ethernet connection (CPU card, slot0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.3.9 Option: Anybus® interface (CPUcard, slot 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.3.10 USB connection, type A (host) (CPUcard, slot 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.3.11 Front of device (version withnavigator and front interfaces) . . . . . 29
6.3.12 General information on USB devices . . 29
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

7

Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

7.1
7.2

Overview of operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Structure and function of the operating
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
7.2.1 Operating menu for operators andmaintenance personnel . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7.2.2 Operating menu for experts . . . . . . . . 34
7.2.3 Submenus and users . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Measured value display and operating
elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.3.1 Measured value display andoperating elements on panelmounted device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.3.2 Operating elements of the DIN rail
version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Display representation of symbols used inoperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
7.4.1 Symbols in operating menus . . . . . . . 39
7.4.2 Symbols in the event logbook . . . . . . . 40
Entering text and numbers (virtual
keyboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Channel color assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Access to the operating menu via the local
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Device access via operating tools . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.8.1 Field Data Manager (FDM) analysis
software (SQL database support) . . . . 41
7.8.2 Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.8.3 OPC server (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

1

About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1.1
1.2

1.3
1.4

Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.1 Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.2 Electrical symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.3 Symbols forcertain types of information . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.4 Symbols in graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

2

Basic safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7

Requirements concerning the staff . . . . . . . . . . 8
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Safety information for desktop version(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

3

Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

3.1

Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

4Incoming acceptance and productidentification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4

Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.3.1 Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.3.2 Name and address of manufacturer . . 11
Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

7.3

5

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

5.1

5.3

Mounting requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 Installation dimensions for thepanel-mounted device . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2 Mounting location and installation
dimensions for the DIN rail version . .
Mounting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Mounting the panel-mounted device .
5.2.2 Mounting and disassembling the DIN
rail version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Post-mounting check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

6.1
6.2

Connecting requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6.2.1 Cable specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 17
6.3.1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

5.2

6.3

Endress+Hauser

12
12
12
14
14
15
16

7.4

7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8

3

Table of contents

7.8.4

Memograph M, RSG45

FieldCare/DeviceCare configuration
software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

8

System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

8.1

Integrating the measuring device in thesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3 Web server with "Ethernet over USB"
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.4 Modbus RTU/TCP slave . . . . . . . . . . .

43
43
43
43
45

9

Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4

Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . 46
Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Configuring the measuring device (Setupmenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
9.4.1 Step-by-step: to the first measured
value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
9.4.2 Step-by-step: set or delete the limit
values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
9.4.3 Step-by-step: read HART® values(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
9.4.4 Step-by-step: HART® communication
between an FDT Frame application(FieldCare) and a HART® device/sensor (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
9.4.5 Device setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
9.4.6 Setup via SD card or USB stick . . . . . . 49
9.4.7 Setup via Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
9.4.8 Setup via FieldCare/DeviceCareconfiguration software . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Advanced settings (Expert menu) . . . . . . . . . . 52
Configuration management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Access protection and security concept . . . . . . 54
HTTPS Web server setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
TrustSens Calibration Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . 57

9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
9.10

10

Fulfilling requirements inaccordance with "FDA 21 CFR Part
11" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

10.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
10.2 Important device settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
10.3 Important settings in the Field Data Manager(FDM) PC software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

11
11.1

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Reading-out and changing the Ethernet
setting address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
11.2 Reading off the device locking status . . . . . . . 62
11.3 Reading off measured values (display
devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

4

11.4

Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
11.4.1 Access to the Web server via HTTP(HTML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
11.4.2 Access to the Web server via XML . . . 65
11.4.3 Setup, operation and service via the
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
11.4.4 Remote control via the Web server . . . 69
11.5 Changing the group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
11.6 Locking operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
11.7 Login / logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
11.8 Changing the password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
11.9 SD card/USB stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
11.9.1 Function of SD card or USB stick . . . . 70
11.9.2 DIN rail version: function of SD card
or USB stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
11.9.3 Functions relating to the SD card or
USB stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
11.9.4 Notes on e-mail encryption . . . . . . . . 74
11.9.5 Notes on WebDAV encryption . . . . . . 75
11.9.6 SSL certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
11.10 Show data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
11.10.1 Historical data: changing a group . . . . 76
11.10.2 Historical data: Scroll speed . . . . . . . . 77
11.10.3 Historical data: Time scaling . . . . . . . 77
11.10.4 Historical data: Time range
displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
11.10.5 Historical data: Screenshot . . . . . . . . . 77
11.10.6 Historical data: Change the display
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
11.10.7 Historical data: Store text . . . . . . . . . . 77
11.11 Signal analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
11.12 Search in trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
11.13 Changing the display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
11.14 Store text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
11.15 Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
11.16 Adjusting the brightness of the display . . . . . . 79
11.17 Limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
11.18 WebDAV client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
11.18.1 Access to the WebDAV server via
HTTP (HTML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
11.19 Data analysis and visualization with the Field
Data Manager software (FDM) provided . . . . . 80
11.19.1 Structure/layout of a CSV file . . . . . . . 80
11.19.2 Importing UTF-8-encoded CSV files
into spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

12

Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . . 82

12.1 General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
12.2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
12.2.1 Device error/alarm relay . . . . . . . . . . 82
12.3 Diagnostic information on the local display . . . 83
12.4 Pending, current diagnostic messages . . . . . . . 88
12.5 Diagnosis list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
12.6 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
12.7 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
12.8 Diagnostics of measured values . . . . . . . . . . . 89
12.9 Diagnostics of outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

12.10 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
12.10.1 Test barcode reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
12.10.2 E-mail test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
12.10.3 Test WebDAV client . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
12.10.4 Test telealarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
12.10.5 Test time synchronization/SNTP . . . . 90
12.10.6 Test universal output . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
12.10.7 Relay test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
12.11 HART® diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
12.12 PROFINET diagnostics (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
12.13 Diagnostics EtherNet/IP (option) . . . . . . . . . . 90
12.14 Initializing the modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
12.15 GSM terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
12.16 Status telealarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
12.17 Resetting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . 91
12.18 Clear memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
12.19 Reset analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
12.20 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

13

Table of contents

17.1.5 "Application" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . 213
17.1.6 "Diagnostics" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

13.1 Updating the device software ("firmware") . . . . 92
13.2 Instructions for enabling a software option . . . 92
13.3 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

14

Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

14.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
14.2 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
14.3 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
14.4 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
14.4.1 IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
14.4.2 Removing the measuring device . . . . . 96
14.4.3 Disposing of the measuring device . . . 96

15

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

15.1

Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

16

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

16.1 Function and system design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
16.2 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
16.3 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
16.4 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
16.5 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
16.6 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
16.7 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
16.8 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
16.9 Display and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . 124
16.10 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
16.11 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
16.12 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 129

17

Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

17.1

Operating items in the "Expert" menu . . . . . . 130
17.1.1 "System" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
17.1.2 "Inputs" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
17.1.3 "Outputs" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
17.1.4 "Communication" submenu . . . . . . . . 189

Endress+Hauser

5About this document

Memograph M, RSG45

1

About this document

1.1

Document function

These Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in the various
phases of the device's life cycle: from product identification, incoming acceptance andstorage, to mounting, connection, operation fundamentals and commissioning through totroubleshooting, maintenance and disposal.
Integrated Operating Instructions
At the push of a button, the device displays operating instructions directly on the screen.
This manual complements the operating instructions in the device and explains what is
not directly described in the operating instructions.

1.2

Symbols

1.2.1

Safety symbols

DANGER

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will result inserious or fatal injury.
WARNING

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result inserious or fatal injury.
CAUTION

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result inminor or medium injury.
NOTICE

This symbol contains information on procedures and other facts which do not result inpersonal injury.

1.2.2

Electrical symbols
SymbolMeaning
Direct current
Alternating current
Direct current and alternating current
Ground connection
A grounded terminal which, as far as the operator is concerned, is grounded via agrounding system.
Protective Earth (PE)A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any otherconnections.
The ground terminals are situated inside and outside the device:• Inner ground terminal: Connects the protectiv earth to the mains supply.
• Outer ground terminal: Connects the device to the plant grounding system.

6

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

About this document

1.2.3

Symbols for certain types of information
SymbolMeaning
Permitted
Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted.
Preferred
Procedures, processes or actions that are preferred.
Forbidden
Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden.
Tip
Indicates additional information.
Reference to documentation
Reference to pageA

Reference to graphic
Notice or individual step to be observed
1. , 2. , 3. …

Series of steps
Result of a step
Help in the event of a problem
Visual inspection

1.2.4

Symbols in graphics

SymbolMeaning

1, 2, 3,...

Item numbers

,

,

…

Series of steps

A, B, C, ...

Views

A-A, B-B, C-C, ...

Sections
Flow direction

A0013441-

A0011187

Hazardous area
Indicates a hazardous area.
Safe area (non-hazardous area)
Indicates a non-hazardous area.

.
A0011188

1.3

Terminology

To improve clarity, abbreviations or synonyms are used in these instructions for thefollowing terms:• Endress+Hauser:
Term used in these instructions: "Manufacturer" or "Supplier"• Memograph M RSG45:
Term used in these instructions: "Device" or "Measuring device"

Endress+Hauser

7Basic safety instructions

Memograph M, RSG45

1.4

Registered trademarks

HART®
Registered trademark of the HART FieldComm Group, Austin, USA
PROFIBUS®
Registered trademark of the PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V. (PROFIBUS User
Organization), Karlsruhe, Germany
PROFINET®
Registered trademark of PROFIBUS & PROFINET International, Karlsruhe, Germany
Modbus®
Registered trademark of SCHNEIDER AUTOMATION, INC.
EtherNet/IPTM
Registered trademark of ODVA, INC.
Internet Explorer®, ExcelTM
Registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation
Mozilla Firefox®
Registered trademark of Mozilla Foundation
Opera®
Registered trademark of Opera Software ASA.
Google ChromeTM
Registered trademark of Google INC.

2

Basic safety instructions

Reliable and safe operation of the device is guaranteed only if the user reads these
Operating Instructions and complies with the safety instructions they contain.
Requirements concerning operating staff to ensure compliance with FDA 21 CFRPart 11:
In order to fully comply with the requirements of 21 CFR Part 11, the operators/users
must be properly trained.

2.1

Requirements concerning the staff

The personnel for installation, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance must fulfill
the following requirements:‣ Trained, qualified specialists: must have a relevant qualification for this specificfunction and task
‣ Are authorized by the plant owner/operator‣ Are familiar with federal/national regulations‣ Before beginning work, the specialist staff must have read and understood the
instructions in the Operating Instructions and supplementary documentation as well as
in the certificates (depending on the application)‣ Following instructions and basic conditions
The operating personnel must fulfill the following requirements:‣ Being instructed and authorized according to the requirements of the task by thefacility's owner-operator‣ Following the instructions in these Operating Instructions

8

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Basic safety instructions

2.2

Intended use

This device is intended for the electronic capture, display, recording, analysis, remotetransmission and archiving of analog and digital input signals.
• The manufacturer accepts no liability for damages resulting from incorrect use or use
other than that designated. It is not permitted to convert or modify the device in any
way.
• The device is designed for installation in a panel and must only be operated in an
installed state.

2.3

Workplace safety

For work on and with the device:‣ Wear the required personal protective equipment according to national regulations.
If working on and with the device with wet hands:‣ Due to the increased risk of electric shock, wear suitable gloves.

2.4

Operational safety

Risk of injury!
‣ Operate the device only if it is in proper technical condition, free from errors and faults.
‣ The operator is responsible for interference-free operation of the device.
Modifications to the device
Unauthorized modifications to the device are not permitted and can lead to unforeseeable
dangers:‣ If modifications are nevertheless required, consult with the manufacturer.
RepairTo ensure continued operational safety and reliability:‣ Carry out repairs on the device only if they are expressly permitted.
‣ Observe federal/national regulations pertaining to the repair of an electrical device.
‣ Use only original spare parts and accessories from the manufacturer.
Hazardous area
To eliminate danger to persons or the facility when the device is used in the hazardous
area (e.g. explosion protection):‣ Check the nameplate to verify if the device ordered can be put to its intended use in thehazardous area.
‣ Observe the specifications in the separate supplementary documentation that is an
integral part of these instructions.

2.5

Product safety

This measuring device is designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meetstate-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition inwhich it is safe to operate.
It meets general safety standards and legal requirements. It also complies with the EC
directives listed in the device-specific EC Declaration of Conformity. The manufacturer
confirms this by affixing the CE mark to the device.

Endress+Hauser

9Product description

Memograph M, RSG45

2.6

Safety information for desktop version (option)• The mains plug should only be inserted into a socket with a ground contact.
• The protective effect may not be suspended by an extension cable without a protective
ground.
• Relay outputs: U (max) = 30 Veff (AC) / 60 V (DC)2.7

IT security

The manufacturer only provides a warranty if the device is installed and used as describedin the Operating Instructions. The device is equipped with security mechanisms to protect
it against any inadvertent changes to the device settings.
IT security measures in line with operators' security standards and designed to provide
additional protection for the device and device data transfer must be implemented by theoperators themselves.

3

Product description

3.1

Product design

This device is best suited for the electronic acquisition, display, recording, analysis, remotetransmission and archiving of analog and digital input signals.
The device is intended for installation in a panel or cabinet. Operation in a desktop or fieldhousing is possible as an option.
In addition, the "DIN rail" housing option is available for DIN rail mounting.

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification

4.1

Incoming acceptanceOn receipt of the goods, check the following points:• Is the packaging or the content damaged?
• Is the delivery complete? Compare the scope of delivery against the information on yourorder form.

4.2

Scope of delivery

The scope of delivery of the device comprises:• Device (with terminals, as per order)• Panel-mounted device: 2 screw fastening clips• Version with navigator and front interfaces or DIN rail version: USB cable• Panel-mounted device: sealing rubber towards the panel wall
• "Industrial Grade" SD card, industry standard:
Panel-mounted device with navigator and front interfaces: card is located in the SD slot
behind the flap on the front of the device (optional).
Panel-mounted device with stainless steel front and touchscreen: card is located in thedevice and cannot be replaced or retrofitted.
DIN rail version: card is located in the SD slot (optional).
10

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Incoming acceptance and product identification• "Field Data Manager (FDM)" analysis software on DVD (Essential, Demo or Professionalversion, depending on order)• Delivery note
• Multilanguage Brief Operating Instructions, hard copy
• Ex Safety Instructions, hard copy (optional)

4.3

Product identification

4.3.1

NameplateCompare the nameplate with the following diagram:Made in Germany, 2015 D-87484 Nesselwang

2
3
4
5

6

Memograph M
Ord. cd.:
RSG45-XX/XXX
Ser. no.:XXXXXXXXXXX
Ext. ord. cd.: RSG45-XXXXXXXXX
100-230 V AC (±10%) ~50/60 Hz 40 VA-10°C (14°F) < Ta < +50°C (122°F)
FW: XX.XX.XX
MAC: XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX

Front: IP65 Rear: IP20
XXX 12ATEXxx xx X
II2G Ex px IIC Gb
II2D Ex pD IIIC Db
Inst. per XA01362R/09/A3/xx.xx

89

MAC 1: XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX

TAG1-XXXXXXXXXXXTAG2-XXXXXXXXXXX

0044

1

7

10
A0025806

1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Device nameplate (example)
Device designation, manufacturer details
Order code, serial number, extended order code
Power supply, mains frequency and maximum power consumption
Ambient temperature range
Firmware version; MAC address (Ethernet)
Fieldbus interface with MAC address (optional)
Device approvals
Degree of protection of the device
Approval in hazardous area (optional) with number of the relevant Ex documentation (XA...)TAG name (optional); 2D-matrix code

4.3.2

Name and address of manufacturer

Name of manufacturer:

Endress+Hauser Wetzer GmbH + Co. KG

Address of manufacturer:

Obere Wank 1, D-87484 Nesselwang

Model/type reference:

RSG45

4.4

Storage and transport

Compliance with the permitted environmental and storage conditions is mandatory.
Precise specifications are provided in the "Technical data" section.
Please note the following:• Pack the device so that is protected against impact for storage and transport. The
original packaging provides optimum protection.
• The permitted storage temperature is –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)

Endress+Hauser

11

Mounting

Memograph M, RSG45

5

Mounting

5.1

Mounting requirements

NOTICE
Overheating due to buildup of heat in the device‣ To avoid heat buildup, always ensure that the device is sufficiently cooled.
The device is designed for use in a panel or in the control cabinet.
The device must be installed in a pressurized enclosure system for operation in thehazardous area. To ensure safe installation, it is essential to follow the installation
instructions for the cabinet and the installation instructions in the Ex-related Safety
Instructions (XA).
• Ambient temperature range: –10 to +50 °C (14 to 122 °F)• Climate class as per IEC 60654-1: Class B2• Degree of protection: IP65, NEMA 4 at front / IP20 rear of housing

5.1.1

Installation dimensions for the panel-mounted device• Installation depth (excluding terminal cover): approx. 159 mm (6.26 in) for device incl.
terminals and fastening clips.
• Installation depth including terminal cover (option): approx.198 mm (7.8 in)• Panel cutout: 138 to 139 mm (5.43 to 5.47 in) x 138 to 139 mm (5.43 to 5.47 in)• Panel thickness: 2 to 40 mm (0.08 to 1.58 in)• viewing angle range: 50˚ in all directions from the display central axis
• A minimum distance of 12 mm (0.47 in) between the devices must be observed ifaligning the devices vertically above one another or horizontally beside one another.
• The grid dimension of the panel cutouts for multiple devices must be at least
208 mm (8.19 in) horizontally and at least 162 mm (6.38 in) vertically (tolerance notconsidered).
• Securing to DIN 43 834

5.1.2

Mounting location and installation dimensions for the DIN rail
versionThe device without a display is designed for DIN rail mounting.
The DIN rail device is not approved for operation in the hazardous area.

12

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Mounting

89.9 (3.54)
72.7 (2.86) 17.2 (0.68)

136 (5.35)

181 (7.13)

A0036528

DIN rail version, dimensions in mm (in)134 (5.28)

2

51 (

2)

134

8)
(5.2

A0046633

3

Terminal cover, DIN rail version, dimensions in mm (in)Dimensions• Installation depth: approx. 90 mm (3.54 in) for device incl. terminals (w/o terminal
cover).
• Mounted on DIN rail as per IEC 60715• The devices can be arranged horizontally beside one another without clearance between
the devices.

Endress+Hauser

13

Mounting

Memograph M, RSG45

5.2

Mounting the measuring device

5.2.1

Mounting the panel-mounted device

Mounting tool: For installation in the panel, all you need is a screwdriver.

158.5 (6.24)
141.2 (5.56)

195.2 (7.69)

149.2 (5.87)

A1(5 38 +1
.43 +0.04)27(1.06)

37.1(1.46)

158.5 (6.24)
141.2 (5.56)

B1(5. 38 +1
43 +0.04)

31.4 (1.24)

150 (5.91)

196 (7.72)

208 (8.19)
138(5.43)

138 (5.43)
162 (6.38)

70(2.76)

24 (0.94)

C

A0024610

4
A
B
C

14

Panel cutout and dimensions in mm (in).
Version with navigator and front interfaces
Version with stainless steel front and touchscreen
Grid dimensions of panel cutouts for multiple devices

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Mounting

B

B

D

D

A

A

C

C

A0026672

5

Panel mounting

1.

From the rear of the device, push the sealing rubber (B) (supplied) as far as the front
frame of the device (A).

2.

Slide the device (A) through the panel cutout from the front (C). To avoid the buildup
of heat, maintain a distance of >12 mm (>0.47 in) from walls and other devices.

3.

Hold the device (A) level and hook the fastening clips (D) into the openings (1 x left,
1 x right).

4.

Evenly tighten the screws on the fasting clips (D) using a screwdriver to guarantee asecure seal to the panel (torque: 100 Ncm).

5.2.2

Mounting and disassembling the DIN rail version

2.

1.

A0036761

6

DIN rail version

1.

Set the device on the top-hat rail from below.

2.

Swivel the device into the end position by pushing the device gently upwards andturning it towards the carrier rail.

3.

Lower the device gently to release it. The device is now engaged on the DIN rail.

Disassembly is the reverse of the assembly sequence.

Endress+Hauser

15Electrical connection

Memograph M, RSG45

5.3

Post-mounting check

Panel-mounted device:• Is the sealing ring undamaged?
• Does the seal run all around the housing collar?
• Are the fastening clips tightened?
• Is the device firmly seated in the center of the panel cutout?
DIN rail version:
Check that the device is firmly seated on the DIN rail

6

Electrical connection

6.1

Connecting requirements

LWARNING
Danger! Electric voltage!
‣ The entire connection of the device must take place while the device is de-energized.
‣ The mixed connection of safety extra-low voltage and dangerous contact voltage to therelay is not permitted.
‣ Apart from the relays and the supply voltage, only energy-limited circuits according to
IEC/EN 61010-1 may be connected.
Danger if protective ground is disconnected‣ The ground connection must be made before all other connections.
NOTICE
Cable heat load
‣ Use suitable cables for temperatures of 5 °C (9 °F) above ambient temperature.
Incorrect supply voltage can damage the device or cause malfunctions‣ Before commissioning the device, make sure that the supply voltage matches thevoltage specifications on the nameplate.
Check emergency shutdown for device‣ Provide suitable switch or circuit breaker in building installation. This switch must be
provided close to the device (within easy reach) and marked as a circuit breaker.
Protect the device from overload‣ Provide overload protection (nominal current = 10 A) for power cable.
Incorrect wiring may result in the device being destroyed‣ Note terminal designation on the rear of the device.
Energy-rich transients in the case of long signal lines‣ Install suitable overvoltage protection (e.g. E+H HAW562) upstream.
Special requirements according to FDA 21 CFR Part 11:• The user must have the appropriate skills and qualifications to connect the device.
Connection errors can only be prevented in this way.
• The user is responsible for selecting the right input ranges and for connecting
suitable sensors.
• Users must ensure that the connected sensors cannot be tampered with by making
sure they are suitably mounted and wired.
• An optional terminal cover is available to prevent tampering at the device terminals
and terminal temperature measurement. It is the responsibility of the user to verify
that the device is correctly installed and sealed following validation.
• The user is responsible for compliance with the EMC limit values at the installation
location (see technical data).
16

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Electrical connection

6.2

Connecting instructions

6.2.1

Cable specification

Cable specification, spring terminals
All connections on the rear of the device are designed as pluggable screw or spring
terminal blocks with reverse polarity protection. This makes the connection very quick andeasy. The spring terminals are unlocked with a slotted screwdriver (size 0).
Please note the following when connecting:• Wire cross-section, auxiliary voltage output, digital I/O and analog I/O: max. 1.5 mm2(14 AWG) (spring terminals)• Wire cross-section, mains: max. 2.5 mm2 (13 AWG) (screw terminals)• Wire cross-section, relays: max. 2.5 mm2 (13 AWG) (spring terminals)• Stripping length: 10 mm (0.39 in)
No ferrules must be used when connecting flexible wires to spring terminals.
Shielding and grounding
Optimum electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) can only be guaranteed if the systemcomponents and, in particular, the lines - both sensor lines and communication lines - areshielded and the shield forms as complete a cover as possible. A shielded line must be used
for sensor lines that are longer than 30 m. A shield coverage of 90% is ideal. In addition,
make sure not to cross sensor lines and communication lines when routing them. Connect
the shield as often as possible to the reference ground to ensure optimum EMC protection
for the different communication protocols and the connected sensors.
To comply with requirements, three different types of shielding are possible:• Shielding at both ends
• Shielding at one end on the supply side with capacitance termination at the device• Shielding at one end on the supply side
Experience shows that the best results with regard to EMC are achieved in most cases ininstallations with one-sided shielding on the supply side (without capacitance termination
at the device). Appropriate internal device wiring measures must be taken to allow
unrestricted operation when EMC interference is present. These measures have beentaken into account for this device. Operation in the event of disturbance variables as per
NAMUR NE21 is thus guaranteed.
Where applicable, national installation regulations and guidelines must be observed
during the installation! Where there are large differences in potential between theindividual grounding points, only one point of the shielding is connected directly with thereference ground.
If the shielding of the cable is grounded at more than one point in systems without
potential matching, mains frequency equalizing currents can occur. These can damage
the signal cable or significantly impact signal transmission. In such cases the shieldingof the signal cable is to be grounded on one side only, i.e. it may not be connected to
the ground terminal of the housing. The shield that is not connected should be
insulated!

Endress+Hauser

6.3

Connecting the measuring device

6.3.1

Connections

17

24V
Out

+

D11
D21
D31
D41
D51
D61
GND1

R52

R61

R62

R41

R42

R51

R22

R31

R32

R12

R21

R11

R13

Memograph M, RSG45

L/+
N/PE

Electrical connection

G6

.
…

…

G1

.

Ch16

.
…

86
46

…

.
…

81

.

…

Ch4

41

.

Ch8

C6

B6
76
36

.
…

.
…
.
…
.
…

…

.
.
.

C1

…

RK

Ch3

Ch2

.

Ch12

F6

.
…

.

F1

…

B1

…

Ch7

71

…

A6
66
26

31

Ch11

E6

.
.

.
…

.

.
…

.

…

.
…

…
…

21

56
16

5
4

RL
Ch15

RI
.
…

RJ

RH

RE

…

E1

D6

.
…

…

.
…

51

.

Ch1

11

…

.

Ch5

Ch6

96

A1
61

.
…

…

91

.

Ch9

Ch10

D1

…

Ch14

RF

RG

RD
.
…

RA

RB

RC

Ch13

.

O15
O16
O25
O26

D71
D81
D91
DA1
DB1
DC1
DD1
DE1
GND2
GND2

6

3
2
1
0

Ethernet

USB

RS 232 / RS 485

Bus Interface

6

5

4

3 2 1

0
A0024605

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Connections: back of device, panel version (left), DIN rail version (right)
Slot 6: Power supply with relays
Slot 5: Multifunction card or HART® card (channels 17-20) or digital card
Slot 4: Multifunction card or HART® card (channels 13-16)
Slot 3: Multifunction card or HART® card (channels 9-12)
Slot 2: Multifunction card or HART® card (channels 5-8)
Slot 1: Multifunction card or HART® card (channels 1-4)
Slot 0: CPU card with interfaces

6.3.2

Electrical connection, terminal assignment

All connection examples are illustrated using the panel version. The connections on
the DIN rail version are identical.

18

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Electrical connection

Circuit diagram

8

Termination

RL

R= resistor

RS 485(typical 120 Ω)

9

RxD/TxD(+)
RxD/TxD(-)

Further units

12-24 VDC
>5 mA
_
+

Analogoutputs (O)Power supply
100-230 VAC 24 V AC/DC(-10%; +15%)(±10%)
50 / 60 Hz
50 / 60 Hz

Digital in (D)24 V GNDx

GNDx

Dx1

Dx1

Pulse

2

+ - + -

L+ N- PE

_

GNDx

1

Dx1

(Selectable in unit setup)12-24 VDC

10k

GNDx

24 V +

24V Out: max. 250 mA

R62

24V
-

+

Out
D11
D21
D31
D41
D51
D61
GND1

R61

-+

>20 ms

O15
O16
O25
O26
R52

R41

R42

R51

R32

R21

R22

R31

R11

R12

R13

Rel. max. 250 V / 3 A
L/+
N/PE

Dx1

1
2
0...20 mA; + - + 4...20 mA

+

O26

D71
D81
D91
DA1
DB1
DC1
DD1
DE1
GND2
GND2

O16

G6

…

…

Ch16
…

…

G1

C6

…

…

C1

Slot 3: analog input / HART 9-12 (option)

86

…

…

81

…

Slot 2: analog input / HART 5-8 (option)
Slot 1: analog input / HART 1-4 (option)

46

…

…

41

…

…

36

…

…

…

31

…

Ch4

…

76

…

…

…

Ch8

…

B6

…

…

…

…

Ch12

F6

…

…

…

…

F1
B1
71

…

66
26

Ch3

…
…

Ch2
21

Slot 4: analog input / HART 13-16 (option)

1

6

Slot 0: CPU (standard)

9USB

Ethernet

1

…

Ch11
Ch7

A6

…

…
…
…

Ch6
61

…

…

…

…

16

9

6

O25

Ch15
E6

…

…

Ch14
E1

…

…

Ch10
A1

…

…

…

…

96
56

…

…

…

…

11

5

To PC: Cable with
9 pol. Sub-D plug
RxD - 3
GND - 5TxD - 2

Slot 5: analog input / HART 17-20 or digital-I/O (option)

RL

RK

RJ

RI

RH

RG

RF

RD

RE
D6

…

…

…

…

D1
91

…

…

Ch5
51

Ch1

…

2 3 5 8 9

…

5

…

9

…

6
1

Ch9

8 9

To modem: Cable with
9 pol. Sub-D socket

RC

Ch13

RS 232

RB

RA

O15

Slot 6: Power supply slot (standard)

RS 232 / RS 485

Bus Interface

x5 x6

x1 x2

5
23 5 8 9

LED

LED

green

yellow

Analog inputs
x1 x2

x3

x4

x3

x4

x5 x6

x1 x2

x3

x4

x5 x6

Pt46, Pt50, Pt100,
Pt500, Pt1000,
Cu50, Cu53, Cu100

RTD

+

I
x1 x2

x3

x4

0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, 0...5 mA, ±20 mA(Volt drop ≤1 V, Ri ≤50 Ohm)x5 x6b) ≤1 Va) >1 V

+

+

-

-

U

a) 0...5 V, 1...5 V, 0...10 V, ±10 V, ±30 Vb) 0...1 V, ±150 mV, ±1 V+
A, B, C, D, J, K, L, N, T, R, S

TC
x1 x2
24 V

x3

x4

x5 x6

>40 µs++R=1.2 kPulse/
frequency

U

-

I

-

LOW = 0...7 mA
HIGH = 13...20 mA

A0026669-EN

8Endress+Hauser

For connection examples of the HART® inputs (optional), see the Operating Instructions →  25

19

Electrical connection

Memograph M, RSG45

Supply voltage (power unit, slot 6)Power unit type

Terminal

100-230 VAC

L+

N-

PE

Phase L

Zero conductor N

GroundL+

N-

PE

Phase L or +Zero conductor N or -GroundA0019103

24 V AC/DC

Relay (power unit, slot 6)
TypeTerminal (max. 250 V, 3 A)

A0019103

Alarm relay 1

R11

R12

R13

Changeover
contact

Normally
closed contact(NC) 1)

Normally open
contact (NO) 2)

Relay 2 to 6

1)
2)

Rx1

Rx2

Switching contact

Normally open
contact (NO 2))

NC = normally closed (breaker)
NO = normally open (maker)

The open or close function (= activation or deactivation of the relay coil) in a limit
event can be configured in the setup: "Setup -> Advanced setup -> Outputs -> Relay ->Relay x". However, in the event of a power failure, the relay adopts its quiescent switch
state regardless of the setting programmed.
Digital inputs; auxiliary voltage output (power unit, slot 6)
TypeTerminal

A0019103

Digital input
1 to 620

D11 to D61

GND1

Digital input 1 to 6 (+)

Ground (-) for digital
inputs 1 to 6

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Electrical connection

Type

Terminal

A0019103

Auxiliary
voltage
output, notstabilized,
max. 250 mA

24V Out -24V Out +- Ground+ 24V (±15%)

If the auxiliary voltage is to be used for the digital inputs, the 24 V out - terminal of
the auxiliary voltage output must be connected with the GND1 terminal.
Analog inputs (slot 1-5)
The first digit (x) of the two-digit terminal number corresponds to the associated channel:
Terminal

x1
x2
x3
x4
x5
x6

Chx

Type

A0019303

x1

x2

x3

x4

Current/pulse/frequency
input 1)
Voltage > 1V(+)

Resistance thermometer
RTD (3-wire)(A)

Resistance thermometer
RTD (4-wire)(A)

Thermocouples TC
1)

Endress+Hauser

(+)
(A)

x6

(+)

(-)
(-)

Voltage ≤ 1V
Resistance thermometer
RTD (2-wire)

x5

(-)
(B)

a (sense)b (sense)(B)b (sense)

(B)

(+)

(-)

If a universal input is used as a frequency or pulse input, a series resistor must be used in series connection
with the voltage source. Example: 1.2 kΩ series resistor at 24 V

21

Electrical connection

Memograph M, RSG45

HART® inputs (slot 1-5)
The first digit (x) of the two-digit terminal number corresponds to the associated channel:
Type

Terminal

Chx

Modem

x1
x2
x3
x4
x5
x6

x1
x2
x3
x4
x5
x6

250Ω 10Ω

A0024862

HART® (4 to 20 mA)

x1

x2

x3

x4

x5

x6

SHD

H_1

H_2

Rcom

I+

I-

• A 250 Ω communication resistor (load) is installed on the device side between
terminals x4 and x5.
• A 10 Ω resistor (shunt) is installed on the device side at the current input between
terminals x5 and x6.
• Terminals x2 and x3 (H_1 and H_2) are jumpered internally.
• The internal HART® modem is located between terminals x2/x3 and x6.
Relay extension (digital card, slot 5)

RK

RL

RI

RJ

RG

RH

RE

RF

RC

RD

RA

RB

D71
D81
D91
DA1
DB1
DC1
DD1
DE1
GND2
GND2

Terminal (max. 250 V, 3 A)
O15
O16
O25
O26

Type

A0024736

Relay 7, 8

RA

RB

RC

RD

Relay 9, 10

RE

RF

RG

RH

Relay 11, 12

RI

RJ

RK

RL

Switching contact

Normally open
contact ( 1))

Switching contact

Normally open contact
( 2))

1)
2)

NO)
NO)

The open or close function (= activation or deactivation of the relay coil) in a limit
event can be configured in the setup: "Setup -> Advanced setup -> Outputs -> Relay ->Relay x". However, in the event of a power failure, the relay adopts its quiescent switch
state regardless of the setting programmed.
Analog outputs (digital card, slot 5)

RK

RL

RI

RJ

RG

RH

RE

RF

RC

RD

RA

RB

D71
D81
D91
DA1
DB1
DC1
DD1
DE1
GND2
GND2

Terminal
O15
O16
O25
O26

Type

A0024736

Analogoutput 1-2

22

O15

O16

O25

Analog output 1 (+)

Ground, analog output Analog output 2 (+)
1 (-)

O26
Ground, analog output
2 (-)

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Electrical connection

Extension of digital inputs (digital card, slot 5)

D71
D81
D91
DA1
DB1
DC1
DD1
DE1
GND2
GND2

Terminal

RK

RL

RI

RJ

RG

RH

RE

RF

RC

RD

RA

RB

O15
O16
O25
O26

Type

A0024736

Digital input 7 to
14

D71 to DE1

GND2

GND2

Digital input 7 to 14 (+)

Ground (-) for digital inputs 7 Ground (-) for digital inputs 7
to 14
to 14

If the auxiliary voltage is to be used for the digital inputs, the 24 V out - terminal of
the auxiliary voltage output (power unit, slot 6) must be connected with the GND2
terminal.

6.3.3

Connection example: Auxiliary voltage output as transmitter
power supply for 2-wire sensors
+
+

-

3
2
+
-

+
Y

1

_

24 V Out: max. 250 mA

Y_

A002472991
2
3Endress+Hauser

Connecting the auxiliary voltage output when using as a transmitter power supply for 2-wire sensors in
the current measuring range
Sensor 1 (e.g. Cerabar from Endress+Hauser)
Sensor 2
External indicator (optional) (e.g. RIA16 from Endress+Hauser)

23

Electrical connection

Memograph M, RSG45

Connection example: Auxiliary voltage output as transmitter
power supply for 4-wire sensors
+

3

Y
2

+

+
-

Y
1

_

24 V Out: max. 250 mA

_

+

6.3.4

A0024730

 10
1
2
3

24

Connecting the auxiliary voltage output when using as a transmitter power supply for 4-wire sensors in
the current measuring range

Sensor 1 (e.g. temperature switch TTR31 from Endress+Hauser)
Sensor 2
External indicator (optional) (e.g. RIA16 from Endress+Hauser)

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Electrical connection

6.3.5

Connection example: HART® input in a point-to-pointconnection
1

5

3

Y

Y

6

5
Y

2
I

-

+

-

+

+

- +

Chx
x1
x2
x3
x4
x5
x6

x1
x2
x3
x4
x5
x6

Chx

-

Chx

6

x1
x2
x3
x4
x5
x6

-

+

Chx

-

x1
x2
x3
x4
x5
x6

+

4

+

I

-

I

A0024864

 11
1
2
3
4
5
6

Connection example: HART® inputs in a point-to-point connection

Active 4-wire sensor (slave)
Power supply for 4-wire sensor
Power supply (electricity source) for actuator
Actuator (e.g. adjuster or valve)
Passive 2-wire sensor (slave)
Power supply (supply point) for sensor.

The internal auxiliary voltage (24 V OUT) can also be used as the transmitter power
supply.

6.3.6

Connection example: HART® input in a Multidrop connection

Information on HART® Multidrop topology:• The analog signal is not available for the process variable. Only the digital signal isused.
• Multidrop topology is not recommended for time-critical applications due to theslower update rate.
• The device supports a maximum of 5 sensors per current loop. The address should
be in the 1 to 15 range (compatibility with HART®5).
3
Y

2
I
Y

1
I

Y
I
+

-

A0024860

 12
1
2
3

Connection example: HART® input in a Multidrop connection

Sensor (slave 1)
Sensor (slave 2)
Sensor (slave 3-5)

The internal auxiliary voltage (24 V OUT) can also be used as the transmitter power
supply.

Endress+Hauser

25

Electrical connection

Memograph M, RSG45

6.3.7

RS232/RS485 interface (CPU card, slot 0)

Use shielded signal lines for serial interfaces!
A combined RS232/RS485 connection is available on a shielded SUB D9 socket. This canbe used for data transfer and to connect a modem. For communication via modem, werecommend an industrial modem with a watchdog function.

Cable
resistanceFurther units

To modem: Cable with
9 pol. Sub-D socket

To PC: Cable with
9 pol. Sub-D plug

RxD - 3TxD - 2

GND - 5

A0024732-EN

Type

Pin of the SUB-D9 socket
1 2

RS232
assignment

TxD (data
output)3
RxD (data
input)

RS485
assignment

4 5

6 7 8

9

GND
GND

RxD/TxD –RxD/TxD +Unoccupied connections should be left empty.
Maximum cable length:
RS232: 2 m (6.6 ft)
RS485: 1000 m (3280 ft)

Only one interface can be used at any one time (RS232 or RS485).
Option: Modbus RTU masterAs a Modbus master, the device can interrogate other Modbus slaves via RS485. The
Modbus RTU master can be operated in parallel with the Profibus DP slave, EtherNet/IP
adapter, PROFINET I/O device or Modbus TCP slave.
26

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Electrical connection

Up to 40 analog inputs can be transmitted via Modbus and stored in the device.
Option: Modbus RTU slave
The device can be interrogated as a Modbus slave by another Modbus master via RS485.
Up to 40 analog inputs and 20 (14 real + 6 virtual) digital inputs can be transmitted via
Modbus and stored in the device.
A Modbus RTU master and RTU slave cannot be operated in parallel.
Remote interrogation with analog or GSM/GPRS wireless modem:
Analog modem:
An analog modem for industrial use (e.g. Devolo or WESTERMO), which is connected to
the RS232 interface with a special modem cable (see accessories →  97), is
recommended.
GSM/GPRS wireless modem:
A GSM/GPRS wireless modem for industrial use (e.g. Cinterion, INSYS or WESTERMO, incl.
antenna and power unit), which is connected to the RS232 interface with a special modem
cable (see accessories →  97), is recommended.
Important: the wireless modem needs a SIM card and data transfer subscription. In
addition, it must be possible to deactivate the PIN prompt.
If the Web server is operated via a wireless modem, this may result in high provider
costs as data are transmitted continuously.

6.3.8

Ethernet connection (CPU card, slot 0)

The Ethernet interface can be used to integrate the device via a hub or switch into a PC
network (TCP/ IP Ethernet). A standard patch cable (e.g. CAT5E) can be used for theconnection. Using DHCP, the device can be fully integrated into an existing network
without the need for additional configuration. The device can be accessed from every PC in
the network.
• Standard: 10/100 Base T/TX (IEEE 802.3)• Socket: RJ-45• Max. cable length: 100 m• Galvanic isolation; test voltage: 500 V
The following functions are implemented:• Data communication with PC software (analysis software, configuration software, OPC
server)• Web server
Meaning of the LEDs
Beneath the Ethernet connection there are two light emitting diodes which indicate thestatus of the Ethernet interface.
• Yellow LED: link signal; is lit when the device is connected to a network. If this LED is not
lit, communication is not possible.
• Green LED: Tx/Rx; flashes irregularly if the device is transmitting or receiving data.
Requirements with regard to a network printerThe printer must support PCL5c (or higher). Laser jet and ink jet printers are supported.
The printouts are always color printouts (if supported by the printer). The printout has
different shades of gray if you use a black/white printer.
Reference list: HP Color LaserJet CP1515n, HP Color LaserJet Pro CP1525n, Kyocera FSC5015N.
GDI printers are not supported!

Endress+Hauser

27

Electrical connection

Memograph M, RSG45

Option: Ethernet Modbus TCP masterAs a Modbus master, the device can interrogate other Modbus slaves via Ethernet. The
Modbus TCP master can be operated in parallel with the Profibus DP slave, Modbus RTU,
Modbus TCP slave, EtherNet/IP adapter or PROFINET I/O device.
Up to 40 analog inputs can be transmitted via Modbus and stored in the device.
Option: Ethernet Modbus TCP slave
The Modbus TCP interface is used to connect to higher-ranking SCADA systems (Modbus
master) to transmit all measured values and process values.
Up to 40 analog inputs and 20 (14 real + 6 virtual) digital inputs can be transmitted via
Modbus and stored in the device.

6.3.9

Option: Anybus® interface (CPU card, slot 0)

PROFIBUS–DP slave:
The device can be integrated into a fieldbus system as per the PROFIBUS–DP standard bymeans of the PROFIBUS-DP interface. Up to 40 analog inputs and 20 (14 real + 6 virtual)
digital inputs can be transmitted via PROFIBUS-DP and stored in the device. For
bidirectional communication in cyclic data transfer. Connection via Sub-D socket.
Baud rate: maximum 12 Mbit/s
EtherNet/IP adapter (slave):
Up to 40 analog inputs and 20 (14 real + 6 virtual) digital inputs can be transmitted via
EtherNet/IP and stored in the device. The built-in module corresponds to I/O server
category (Level 2). It has an integrated 2-port switch, thereby supporting EtherNet/IP
communication with line or ring topology. Connection via 2 RJ45 standard sockets.
PROFINET I/O device:
Up to 40 analog inputs and 20 (14 real + 6 virtual) digital inputs can be transmitted via
PROFINET IO and stored in the device. The 2-port module for Profinet IO meetscompliance class B. The integrated switch enables communication in line or ring topologies
without an additional external switch. Connection via 2 RJ45 standard sockets.

6.3.10USB connection, type A (host) (CPU card, slot 0)

Two USB-2.0 ports are available (panel version) or one USB-2.0 port is available (DIN rail
version) on shielded USB-A sockets. A USB stick as a memory medium, for example, can beconnected to these ports. An external keyboard/mouse for device operation, a USB hub, abarcode reader or a printer (PCL5c or higher) may also be connected.

28

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Electrical connection

6.3.11

Front of device (version with navigator and front interfaces)

5

1

4

3

2
A0024737

 13
1
2
3
4
5

Version with navigator and front interfaces with open flap

Navigator
Slot for SD card
USB B socket "Function" e.g. to connect to PC or laptop
USB A socket "Host" e.g. for USB memory stick, external keyboard/mouse, USB hub, barcode reader or printer
LED at SD slot. Yellow LED lit or flashing when the device writes to the SD card or reads it.

USB connection type A (host)A USB 2.0 port is available on a shielded USB A socket at the front of the device. A USB
stick as a memory medium, for example, can be connected to this port. An external
keyboard/mouse for device operation, a USB hub, a barcode reader or a printer (PCL5c orhigher) may also be connected.
USB connection type B (function)
A USB 2.0 port is available on a shielded USB B socket at the front of the device. This canbe used to connect the device for communication with a laptop, for example. →  43
USB-2.0 is compatible with USB-1.1 or USB-3.0, i.e. communication is possible.
Requirements for the SD card
Industrial grade SD-HC cards with max. 32 GB are supported.
Use only the industrial grade SD cards described in the "Accessories" section of the
Operating Instructions. These have been tested by the manufacturer and are
guaranteed to function faultlessly in the device. →  97
The SD card must be formatted to FAT or FAT32. NTFS format is not readable.

6.3.12

General information on USB devices

The USB devices are detected by the "plug-and-play" function. If several devices of the same
type are connected, only the USB device that was connected first is available. Settings for
the USB devices are made in the setup. A maximum of 8 external USB devices (incl. USBhub) can be connected if they do not exceed the maximum load of 500 mA. If overloaded,
the corresponding USB devices are automatically disabled. An active USB hub can be used
for higher power ratings.

Endress+Hauser

29

Electrical connection

Memograph M, RSG45

Requirements with regard to the USB stick
There is no guarantee that all manufacturers' USB sticks will function faultlessly. That is
why an industrial grade SD card is recommended to ensure the reliable recording of data.
→  97
The USB stick must be formatted to FAT or FAT32. NTFS format is not readable. The
system supports only USB sticks with max. 32 GB.
The USB stick must not be connected to the device via a USB hub. Interference fromother USB devices may result in data loss.
Requirements with regard to an external USB keyboard
The system only supports keyboards which can be addressed using generic drivers (HID
keyboard - Human Interface Device). Special keys are not supported (e.g. Windows keys).
Users can only enter characters that are available in the input character set of the device.
All unsupported characters are rejected. It is not possible to connect a wireless keyboard.
The following keyboard layouts are supported: DE, CH, FR, USA, USA International, UK, IT.
See setting under "Setup -> Advanced setup -> System -> Keyboard layout".
Requirements with regard to an external USB barcode reader
The connected barcode reader has to act like a HID keyboard (human interface device)(universal keyboard driver). The barcode reader must complete every barcode with acarriage return (0x0D) + line feed (0x0A).
Checking the barcode reader at a PC
Before connecting the barcode reader to the device, it should be checked at a Windows®
PC.
1.

Connect the barcode reader to the PC and wait until Microsoft Windows® recognizes
the device as a HID keyboard and installs it (check with the Windows Device
Manager).

2.

Configure the barcode reader as specified in the Operating Instructions of the barcode
reader.

3.

Start the Notepad (editor).

4.

Using the barcode reader, read in a barcode (as it is used later) and check it.

5.

Do not connect the barcode reader to the device until the barcode reader has beencorrectly configured and tested on the PC.

6.

Select the character set at the device under "Setup -> Advanced setup -> System ->Barcode reader -> Character set". The following character sets are supported: DE, CH,
FR, USA, USA International, UK, IT. Note: This setting has to be identical to theconfiguration of the barcode reader! The system only reads characters that areavailable in the entry character set of the device. All other characters are rejected.

7.

The barcode reader should also be tested at the device via "Main menu -> Diagnostics-> Simulation -> Test barcode reader" (function not available with DIN rail version).

If problems arise, please contact the manufacturer of the barcode reader.
Reference list: Datalogic Gryphon D230, Metrologic MS5100 Eclipse Series, Symbol
LS2208, Datalogic Quickscan 1, Godex GS220, Honeywell Voyager 9590.
Requirements with regard to an external USB printerThe printer must support PCL5c (or higher). Laser jet and ink jet printers are supported.
The printouts are always color printouts (if supported by the printer). The printout has
different shades of gray if you use a black/white printer.

30

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Electrical connection

Reference list: HP Color LaserJet CP1515n, HP Color LaserJet Pro CP1525n, Kyocera FSC5015N.
GDI printers are not supported!

6.4

Endress+Hauser

Post-connection check

Device condition and specifications

Notes

Are cables or the device damaged?

Visual inspection

Electrical connection

Notes

Does the supply voltage match the specifications on the nameplate?

-

Are all terminals firmly engaged in their correct slot?

-

Are the mounted cables strain-relieved?

-

Are the power supply and signal cables correctly connected?

See connection diagram anddevice.

31

Operation options

Memograph M, RSG45

7

Operation options

7.1

Overview of operation options

The device can be operated directly onsite with the navigator and USB keyboard/mouse(only panel-mounted device) or via interfaces (serial, USB, Ethernet) and operating tools(Web server); FieldCare/DeviceCare configuration software).
The DIN rail device is operated exclusively via the operating tools.

7.2

Structure and function of the operating menu
The layout and structure of the operating menu can differ slightly in parts on the Web
server.

32

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Operation options

7.2.1

Operating menu for operators and maintenance personnel

Operator

Operation

Setup

Change group
Lock operation

Signal analysis

Login

Search in trace

Printout

SD card/USB stick

Change display mode

Adjust brightness

HistoryStore text

LimitsChange date/time

Advanced setup

SystemDate/time setup
Security
External memory
Messages
Device options,...

Inputs

Universal inputs
Digital inputs

MaintenanceOutput

Universal output 1-2

Relay 1-12
Communication

Ethernet
HART
Serial interface

ModbusProfibus,...
Application

Maths
Signal analysis

Diagnostics

Diagnostics list

LimitsEvent logbook
Signal groups
Device information
E-mail
Measured values
Printer
Outputs
Texts,...
Simulation
HART,...

A0024770-EN

Endress+Hauser

33

Operation options

Memograph M, RSG45

7.2.2

Operating menu for experts

ExpertEnter Access code
Direct Access
System(see before)+Clear memory+Expert functions

Inputs(see before)+Expert functions

ExpertOutputs(see before)+Expert functions

Communication(see before)+Expert functions

Application(see before)+Expert functions

Diagnostics

Diagnosis list
Event logbook
Device information

Simulation

A0019596-EN

7.2.3

Submenus and users

Certain parts of the menu are assigned to certain user roles. Each user role corresponds totypical tasks within the lifecycle of the device.
User role

Typical tasks

Menu

Content/meaning

Operator

Tasks during operation:• Configuration of the display.
• Reading measured values.

"Operation"

Contains all the parameters that are required inongoing operation: configuration of the measured value
display (displayed values, display format, etc.).

MaintenanceCommissioning:• Configuration of the measurement.
• Configuration of data processing.

"Setup"Contains all parameters for commissioning:• Change date/time• "Advanced setup" submenu
Contains additional submenus and parameters:• System: Basic settings required for operating thedevice.
• Inputs: Settings for analog and digital inputs.
• Outputs: Setup required only if outputs (e.g.
relays) are to be used.
• Communication: Settings required if the USB,
RS232, RS485 or Ethernet interface or the HART®
inputs of the device are used (PC operation, serial
data read-out, modem operation, etc).
• Application: Various application-specific settings(e.g. group settings, limit values, etc.).
Once values have been set for these parameters, themeasurement should generally be completely
configured.

34

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

User role

ExpertEndress+Hauser

Operation options

Typical tasks

Menu

Content/meaning

Troubleshooting:• Diagnosing and eliminating process errors.
• Interpretation of device error messages andcorrecting associated errors.

"Diagnostics"

Contains all parameters for detecting and analyzing
errors:• Diagnosis list
All diagnosis messages are listed in chronologicalorder.
• Event logbook
Events such as alarm set point infringement andpower failure are listed in the correct time sequence.
• Device information
Displays important device information (e.g. serial
number, firmware version, device options for
hardware and software, memory information, etc.).
• Measured values
Display of current measured values of the device.
• Outputs
Displays the current status of the outputs e.g. switch
status of relay outputs.
• Simulation
Various functions/signals can be simulated for test
purposes here.
Note: In Simulation mode, normal recording of themeasured values is interrupted and the intervention
is logged in the event log.
• HART®
Displays the exact device information of a selected
HART® device and the HART® communication signal
quality.
• Initialize modem
Initializes the modem connected to the serialinterface (for automatic call answering).

Tasks that require detailed knowledge of thefunction of the device:• Commissioning measurements under difficult
conditions.
• Optimal adaptation of the measurement todifficult conditions.
• Detailed configuration of the communicationinterface.
• Error diagnostics in difficult cases.

"Expert"Contains all the parameters of the device (including
those that are already contained in one of the othersubmenus). The expert menu is protected by a code.
Factory setting: 0000. This menu is structured
according to the function blocks of the device:• "System" submenu
Contains all higher-level device parameters that do
not pertain either to the measurement or measured
value communication.
• "Inputs" submenu
Contains all parameters for configuring the analog
and digital inputs.
• "Output" submenu
Contains all parameters for configuring the outputs(e.g. relays).
• "Communication" submenu
Contains all parameters for configuring thecommunication interfaces.
• "Application" submenu
Contains all parameters for configuring applicationspecific settings (e.g. group settings, limit valuesetc.).
• "Diagnostics" submenu
Contains all parameters to detect and analyze
operational errors.

35

Operation options

Memograph M, RSG45

7.3

Measured value display and operating elements

7.3.1

Measured value display and operating elements on panelmounted device

d

c

b

5

a
6

7

5

8

6

7

8

9

9

4

10

3

1

4

10

2
A0024709

 14

Device front (left: version with navigator and front interfaces; right: version with stainless steel front andtouchscreen)

Item
No.

Operating function (display mode = display of measured values)(Setup mode = operation in the Setup menu)aSlot for SD cardb

USB B socket "Function" e.g. to connect to PC or laptopc

USB A socket "Host" e.g. for USB memory stick, external keyboard, barcode reader or printerd

LED at SD slot. Yellow LED lit or flashing when the device writes to the SD card or reads it.

 Do not remove the SD card if the LED is lit or flashing! Risk of data loss!

36

1"Navigator": jog/shuttle dial for operating with additional press/hold function.
In display mode: turn the dial to switch between the various signal groups. Press the dial to display themain menu.
In setup mode or in a selection menu: turn the dial anticlockwise to move the bar or the cursor
upwards or to the left, changes the parameter. Turning clockwise moves the bar or cursor down or to
the right, changes the parameter. Press = select highlighted function, start parameter change (ENTER
key).

2

Functions of LED indicators (according to NAMUR NE44:)• Green LED (top) lit: power supply OK• Red LED (bottom) flashing: maintenance required, caused by external factor (e.g. cable open circuitetc.) or a message/notification requiring acknowledgment is pending, calibration is running.

3

Variable "soft keys" 1-4 (from left to right)

4

Function indicator of "soft keys"

5

In display mode: current group name, type of analysis;
In setup mode: name of the current operating item (dialog title)

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Operation options

Item
No.

Operating function (display mode = display of measured values)(Setup mode = operation in the Setup menu)

6

In display mode: displays current date/time
In setup mode: --7

In display mode: user ID (if function is active)
In setup mode: --8

In display mode: alternating display indicating the percentage space on the SD card or USB stick thathas already been used.
Status symbols are also displayed in alternation with the memory information (e.g. simulation mode,
data storage active, operation lock, batch active)
In setup mode: the current "direct access" operating code is displayed

9

In display mode: window for measured value display (e.g. curve display).
Display of current measured values and the status in the event of an error/alarm condition. In the caseof counters, the type of counter is displayed as a symbol.
point has limit value status, the corresponding channel identifier is highlighted
 inIf aredmeasuring(quick detection of limit value violations). During a limit value violation and device
operation, the acquisition of measured values continues uninterrupted.

9

In setup mode: display of operating menu

10

In display mode: alternating status display (e.g. set zoom range) of the analog or digital inputs in theappropriate color of the channel.
In setup mode: different information is displayed here depending on the display type.

7.3.2

Operating elements of the DIN rail version
1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

A0036811

 15

Endress+Hauser

Device front of the DIN rail version

37

Operation options

Memograph M, RSG45

Item
No.

Operating function

1

DIP switches
The behavior of the Ethernet interface is configured via DIP switches (left =OFF, right = ON).
For a detailed description of the DIP switch functions →  50

OFF

ON
1
2
3
4
5
6

Function of the DIP switches (1 = top, 12 = bottom):• DIP switches 1-8: configuration of IP address in last octet (e.g.
192.168.1.212)• DIP switch 9:
OFF = setup change not locked
ON = setup locked• DIP switch 10:
OFF = default / OFF
ON = service addressing• DIP switch 11 for the configuration of the USB-B interface:
OFF = USB standard
ON = Ethernet via USB (Web server)• DIP switch 12: not assigned

7
8
9
10
11
12
A0036815

DIN rail version is supplied with the following Ethernet settings:
 The
IP address: 192.168.1.212; subnet mask: 255.255.255.0; gateway:
0.0.0.02

Ethernet interface

3

USB B socket "Function" e.g. to connect to PC or laptop

4Functions of LED indicators (according to NAMUR NE44:)• Green LED (top) lit: power supply OK• Red LED (bottom) flashing: maintenance required, caused by external factor (e.g. cable open circuitetc.) or a message/notification requiring acknowledgment is pending, calibration is running.

5

Cyclic storage is completed via the "Remove SD card safely" button, the LED (d) goes out. The SD card
can now be removed.

 If the SD card is not removed within 5 minutes, the write cycles start again.
6

USB A socket "Host" e.g. for USB memory stick or printerIf a USB stick is inserted, data that have not yet been saved are copied to the stick automatically. The
red LED on the USB socket flashes while the data are being copied to the stick.

 Do not remove the USB stick when the red LED is flashing! Risk of data loss!
If an error occurs (e.g. USB stick full or defective), the red LED is lit constantly. Remove the USB stickand replace it.
7

LED at SD slot. Yellow LED lit or flashing when the device writes to the SD card or reads it.

 Do not remove the SD card if the LED is lit or flashing! Risk of data loss!
8

Slot for SD card

9

Anybus® interface (option)

10

Serial RS232/RS485 interface

7.4

38

Display representation of symbols used in operation

Item
No.

Function

9

Symbols for counters:

Description

Σ1, Σ2, Σ3, Σ4Intermediate analysis 1 to 4 / external analysis 1 to 4

ΣD

Daily analysis

ΣW

Weekly analysis

ΣM

Monthly analysis

ΣY

Annual analysis

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Operation options

Item
No.

9

Function

DescriptionΣ

Totalizer

Channel-related symbols:
Violation of lower limit value
Violation of upper limit value or limit value on counter
Violation of upper and lower limit values at the same time
"Out of specification"e.g. input signal too high/low
Error message "Failure detected"
An operating error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid (e.g.
a channel not displayed in the current group is defective).
"Maintenance required"
Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid.
Error, measured value not displayed.
Possible causes: Sensor / input error, line break, invalid value, input signal
too high/low

8

Symbol for status signals:"Device locked"
Setup is locked via a control input. Disable setup lock via a control input.
"Out of specification"
The device is being operated outside its technical specifications (e.g. during
startup or cleaning).
"Function check"
The device is in Service mode.
"Maintenance required"
Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid.
Error message "Failure detected"
An operating error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid (e.g.
a channel not displayed in the current group is defective).
"External communication"
The device is communicating externally (e.g. via Modbus).
SIM"Simulation"
Simulation is active.

4

7.4.1

"Historical data"
Historical data are currently shown on screen.

Symbols in operating menus
Symbol for setup
Symbol for diagnostics
Symbol for expert setup
Symbol for user administration according to "FDA 21 CFR Part 11"
Back
The function "Back" appears at the end of each menu/submenu.
Press "Back" briefly to go up one level in the menu structure.
Press and hold "Back" (>3 sec.) to quit the menu immediately. The devices switches to Displaymode.

Endress+Hauser

39

Operation options

Memograph M, RSG45

7.4.2

Symbols in the event logbook
Setup changes

Power onPower off
Limit value on
Limit value off

1Digital on (on/off message)0

Digital off (on/off message)
Service
User administration
Texts saved / comments added
Acknowledging message
Back
Continue searching

7.5

Entering text and numbers (virtual keyboard)

A virtual keyboard is available for entering text and numbers. This is opened automatically
if needed. The appropriate character is selected by turning and pressing the navigator, or
by using the touchscreen or mouse.
The following characters are available for entering customized text:
0-9 a-z A-Z = + - * / \ 2 3 ¼ ½ ¾ ( ) [ ] < > { } I ? ! ` " ' ^ % ° . , : _ µ & # $ € @ § £ ¥ ~←Jump one position to the left.
If this symbol is selected, the cursor jumps one position to the left.

→

Jump one position to the right.
If this symbol is selected, the cursor jumps one position to the right.

←xDelete backwards.
If this symbol is selected, the character to the left of the cursor position is deleted.

x→Delete forwards.
If this symbol is selected, the character to the right of the cursor position is deleted.
Delete all.
If this symbol is selected, the entire entry is deleted.
Reject entry.
If this symbol is selected, the entry is rejected and you quit editing mode. The previously set text
remains.
Accept entry.
If this symbol is selected, the entry is applied at the position specified by the user, and you quit
editing mode.

7.6

Channel color assignment

Channel color assignment is performed in the main menu under "Setup -> Advanced
setup -> Application -> Signal groups -> Group x". 8 predefined colors are available pergroup and can be assigned to the desired channels.

40

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Operation options

7.7

Access to the operating menu via the local display

Using the "Navigator" (jog/shuttle dial with additional press/hold function), the "soft keys"
or touch control (optional) all settings can be made directly onsite at the device.

7.8

Device access via operating tools

7.8.1

Field Data Manager (FDM) analysis software (SQL databasesupport)The PC analysis software offers external, centralized data management with visualization
for recorded data. The analysis software enables the complete archiving of all measuring
point data e.g. measured values, diagnostic events and protocols. The analysis software
stores data in an SQL database. The database can be operated locally or in a network(client/server). Access is via RS232/RS485, USB or Ethernet interface (network).
Function scope:• Export of saved data (measured values, analyses, event log)
• Visualization and processing of saved data (measured values, analyses, event log)
• Safe archiving of exported data in a SQL database
The following versions of the software are available:• Essential version (free, with limited functionalities)• Professional version (see Accessories →  97)• Demo version (time-limited Professional version)
An "Essential" version of the analysis software is supplied with the device.
For details, see the Operating Instructions on the analysis software DVD provided.

7.8.2

Web server

A Web server is integrated into the device. This makes the current measured values of thedevice available in real time. Access is via an Ethernet interface from a PC in the network
via the standard browser. The installation of additional software is not required.
Alternatively, the Web server can be operated in a point-to-point connection (Ethernet
over USB) with a standard USB cable via the USB B port. →  43
The Web server offers the following range of functions:• Display of current and historical data and measured value curves via a standard Webbrowser →  62
• Easy configuration without additional installed software →  46
• Remote access to device and diagnostic information

7.8.3

OPC server (optional)

The OPC server makes it possible to access data on the device. These data are madeavailable to OPC clients in real time. The OPC server meets the requirements of the OPC
specifications regarding the supply of data to an OPC client. Access is via RS232/RS485,
USB or Ethernet interface (network). Communication takes place using automatic device
detection; the operator does not need to make any additional settings. The OPC server
enables the flexible and powerful exchange of data and is easy and convenient to use.

Endress+Hauser

41

Operation options

Memograph M, RSG45

The following instantaneous values can be provided:• Analog channels• Digital channels• Mathematics• Totalizer
For details, see Operating Instructions BA00223R/09/xx

7.8.4

FieldCare/DeviceCare configuration software

Function scope
The configuration software is an FDT/DTM-based system asset management tool. It canconfigure all smart field devices in a system and helps you manage them. By using thestatus information, it is also a simple but effective way of checking their status andcondition. Access is via USB or Ethernet interface (network).
Typical functions:• Device configuration• Loading and saving device data (upload/download)• Documentation of the measuring point
Download at: www.endress.com/download
Overview of device description files (DTM)
Information and files are available free of charge at:
See online at: www.de.endress.com/fieldcare

42

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

System integration

8

System integration

8.1

Integrating the measuring device in the system

8.1.1

General notes

The device has (optional) fieldbus interfaces for exporting process values. Measured values
and statuses can also be transmitted to the device via fieldbus.
Note: Counters cannot be transferred.
Depending on the bus system, alarms or faults occurring during data transmission aredisplayed (e.g. status byte).
The process values are transferred in the same units that are used to display the values on
the device.
Information on compliance with FDA 21 CFR Part 11 requirements when using
fieldbus systems:
If no measured values are received via fieldbus, the device activates a potential-freeswitch contact (e.g. relay) following an adjustable timeout. The evaluation of theswitching contact is the responsibility of the user.

8.1.2

Ethernet

Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → Ethernet
The IP address can be entered manually (fixed IP address) or assigned automatically using
DHCP.
The port for data communication is preset to 8000. The port can be changed in the Expert→ Communication → Ethernet menu.
The following functions are implemented:• Data communication with PC software (analysis software, configuration software, OPC
server)• Web server
The following connections are possible at the same time:• 1x Port 8000 (configuration software, OPC server or analysis software)• 1x Port 8002 (OPC server only)• 1x Port 5094 (HART® IP)• 4x Modbus slave TCP• 5x Web server
Ports can be changed!
As soon as the maximum number of connections has been reached, new connection
attempts are blocked until an existing connection has been terminated.

8.1.3

Web server with "Ethernet over USB" function

To provide easy and efficient access via Web server for operation, setup andcommissioning, the USB-B interface can be switched to the "Ethernet over USB" mode.
Ethernet communication is established here via the USB interface. This has the advantagethat the Ethernet interface in the case of commissioning laptops, for example, does notneed to be reconfigured (IP address, ports, etc.). Instead, a standard USB cable can be used

Endress+Hauser

43System integration

Memograph M, RSG45

to establish a point-to-point connection. The Web server itself retains its complete rangeof functionality.
Important information:• Do not connect several devices via USB to a laptop/PC at the same time
• The PC should not be connected to "Ethernet via USB" (USB-B connector on front
panel of device) and a standard Ethernet network (RJ45 connector on rear panel ofdevice) simultaneously if both connections use the same address parameters.
• Driver software (EH ECM device) must be installed on the PC.
• The "Ethernet over USB" mode is not a gateway, i.e. the Ethernet/RJ45 and USB
networks are separate from each other (no two-way access).
• The USB cable should be disconnected from the device for at least 10 s before being
reconnected (prevention of errors due to response time of system)• It takes at least 10 s before the USB driver is activated by Windows andcommunication with the device is possible.
• Initialization of the USB interface takes place when the PC and device are connected
via a USB cable.
Supported services/functions
The following services/functions are provided via the USB interface:• Web server• CDI TCP (port 8000)• WebDAV server
All other services/functions are available only by Ethernet via RJ45!
Driver installation at PC end
To use the Web server via USB, a driver must be installed once at the PC end.
1.

The driver can be found under "..\Drivers\USB_ECM" on the Field Data Manager(FDM) software DVD supplied.

2.

Alternatively: Download "USB_ECM.zip" at www.endress.com/downloads

3.

Execute the "setup.exe" and follow the instructions.

The necessary drivers are installed.
From version V1.04.01 of the Field Data Manager (FDM) software provided, thedriver is automatically installed with the PC software.
The driver can be installed directly from the DVD without first having to copy the files
to the PC.
Changing the USB-B mode to "Ethernet over USB" (panel version)Communication can be established only if the device has been configured accordingly.
1.

Supply power to the device, restart and wait for start screen.

2.

Open dropdown menu under "Setup → Advanced setup → Communication →Function USB-B".

3.

"Always USB" option: USB-B is always set to Standard USB.

4.

"Always Ethernet over USB" option: Ethernet over USB is always set.

5.

"By user input" option: A prompt for the mode (option) appears once a USB cable isplugged in.

The device is now ready to establish a connection.
Changing the USB-B mode to "Ethernet over USB" (DIN rail version)Communication can be established only if the device has been configured accordingly.

‣ Change the position of the DIP switch (9) from "USB-B" to "IP". The device is now set to"Always Ethernet over USB"

The device is now ready to establish a connection.
44

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Commissioning

Establishing communication
1.

Using a standard USB cable, connect the device at the USB-B interface to any of the
PC's USB interfaces.

2.

With "Always Ethernet over USB" function: The Web server can be started
immediately.

3.

With "By user input" function: Once the USB cable has been plugged into the device,the "Select USB function" dropdown menu appears. Then select "Ethernet over USB" on
the device. The device returns the IP address.

4.

Open the browser, enter http://192.168.1.212 and follow the instructions fromsection →  64

The device is now ready to communicate with the Web server.
The IP address of the Web server via USB is set permanently to http://192.168.1.212
If the USB cable is already connected to a PC when the device starts up, there is noprompt even if the "By user input" option is selected. Instead, the previously selectedfunctionality is used.

8.1.4

Modbus RTU/TCP slave

The device can be connected to a Modbus system via RS485 or Ethernet interface. The
general settings for the Ethernet connection are made in the Setup → Advanced setup →Communication → Ethernet menu. Modbus communication is configured in the Setup →Advanced setup → Communication → Modbus Slave menu.
Up to 40 analog inputs and 20 digital inputs can be transmitted via Modbus and stored in
the device.
Menu position

RTU (RS485)

Ethernet

Device address:

1 to 247

IP address manual or automatic

Baud rate:

9600/19200/38400/57600/115200-

Parity:Even/Odd/None-

Stop bits:

1/2

-

Port:

-

502

Transfer of values
The actual Modbus TCP protocol is located between layer 5 to 6 in the ISO/OSI model.
To transfer a value, 3 registers of 2 bytes each (2-byte status + 4-byte float) or 5 registersof 2 bytes each (2-byte status + 8-byte double) are used.
For more information about Modbus, see the supplementary documentation.

9

Commissioning

9.1

Function check

Perform the following checks prior to commissioning:• "Post-mounting check" checklist →  16.
• "Post-connection check" checklist →  31.

Endress+Hauser

45Commissioning

Memograph M, RSG45

9.2

Switching on the measuring device

After the operating voltage is applied, the green LED lights up and the device is ready for
operation.
If you are commissioning the device for the first time, program the setup as described in
the following sections of the Operating Instructions.
If you are commissioning a device that is already configured or preset, the device starts
measuring immediately as defined in the settings. The values of the channels currently
activated are shown on the display.
Remove the protective film from the display as this would otherwise affect thereadability of the display.

9.3

Setting the operating language

Factory setting: English or ordered local language
Version with stainless steel front and touchscreen, or when operating with theexternal USB mouse:
Calling the main menu, configuring the operating language:
1.

Press or click the "Menu" soft key at the bottom edge of the screen

2.

The main menu appears on the display with the "Sprache/Language" option

3.

To change the default language setting: press or click "Sprache/Language" and selectthe desired language from the drop-down menu

4.

Use "Back" or "ESC" to quit the main menu

The operating language has been changed.
Version with navigator and front interfaces:
Calling the main menu, configuring the operating language:
1.

Press the navigator

2.

The main menu appears on the display with the "Sprache/Language" option

3.

To change the set language: Press the navigator, turn the navigator to select thedesired language and press the navigator to apply the change.

4.

Use "Back" or "ESC" to quit the main menu

The operating language has been changed.
The function"Back" appears at the end of each menu/submenu.

Press "Back" briefly to go up one level in the menu structure.
To quit the menu immediately and return to the measured value display, press andhold "Back" (>3 sec.). The changes made are accepted and saved.
DIN rail version:
The operating language can only be changed via the Web server (Setup) or configuration
software (DTM).

9.4

Configuring the measuring device (Setup menu)

Access to the setup is enabled when the device leaves the factory and can be locked invarious ways e.g. by entering a 4-digit access code or by user administration.
When locked, basic settings can be checked but not changed. The device can also be put
into operation and configured via the PC.
46

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Commissioning

Device configuration options:• Setup directly at the device (panel-mounted device only)• Setup via SD card or USB stick by transferring the parameters stored on it• Setup via Web server using Ethernet or Ethernet over USB• Setup via FieldCare/DeviceCare configuration software
Information on configuration using FieldCare/DeviceCare configuration software• Offline configuration: Most of the parameters are available (depending on thedevice configuration).
• Online configuration: Only parameters labeled "Online configuration" are available.
→  130

9.4.1

Step-by-step: to the first measured value

Procedure and necessary settings:
1.

Check the date/time in the main menu under "Setup" and set it if necessary

2.

Make settings for the interfaces and communication in the main menu under "Setup-> Advanced setup -> Communication"

3.

Create universal or digital inputs in the main menu under "Setup -> Advanced setup-> Inputs -> Universal inputs/Digital inputs": Add input: select "Universal inputx" or "Digital input x" with which the input signal should be detected. Then selectand configure the new input that has been created.

4.

Activate relays or analog outputs (optional) in the main menu under "Setup ->Advanced setup -> Outputs"

5.

Assign activated inputs to a group in the main menu under "Setup -> Advanced
setup -> Application -> Signal groups -> Group x"

6.

Use "Back" or "ESC" to quit the main menu. The changes made are accepted and saved.

The device is in the measured value display mode and displays the measured values.

9.4.2

Step-by-step: set or delete the limit values

Procedure for setting limit values:
1.

Open the limit values in the main menu under "Setup -> Advanced setup ->Application -> Limits"2.

Add a limit value: select "Yes"3.

Select and configure "Limit value x"

4.

Use "Back" or "ESC" to quit the main menu. The changes made are accepted and saved.

The device is in the measured value display mode and displays the measured values.
Procedure for deleting limit values:
1.

Open the limit values in the main menu under "Setup -> Advanced setup ->Application -> Limits"

2.

Delete a limit value: select "Yes"3.

Select the limit value to be deleted from the list

4.

Use "Back" or "ESC" to quit the main menu. The changes made are accepted and saved.

The device is in the measured value display mode and displays the measured values.

Endress+Hauser

47Commissioning

Memograph M, RSG45

9.4.3

Step-by-step: read HART® values (option)

Procedure for reading measured values from a HART® device/sensor:
1.

Make settings for HART® communication (HART® master, connection attempts)
under "Setup -> Advanced setup -> Communication -> HART"2.

Add new value to be read by selecting "Add value -> Yes"

3.

Open the configuration for "Value x"

4.

Select the physical interface to which the HART® device is connected "Connection ->Channel x"

5.

Set the address of the connected device, the HART® value to be read and the channel
identifier

6.

Activate the universal input in the main menu under "Setup -> Advanced setup ->Inputs -> Universal inputs"

7.

Select the "HART" signal type and assign the previously defined HART® values. Selectusing the channel identifier of the HART® value.

8.

Other settings for the universal input are made in the same way as for standard
analog inputs.

9.

Assign activated inputs to a group in the main menu under "Setup -> Advanced
setup -> Application -> Signal groups -> Group x"

10. Use "Back" or "ESC" to quit the main menu. The changes made are accepted and saved.
The device is in the measured value display mode and displays the measured values.

9.4.4

Step-by-step: HART® communication between an FDT Frame
application (FieldCare) and a HART® device/sensor (optional)

The RSG45 HART® CommDTM enables HART® communication between a PC with an FDT
Frame application and a HART® device. At this point, the RSG45 acts as a gateway/modem
between the PC and the HART® devices that are connected to the HART® input cards of
the RSG45. Communication between the PC and the RSG45 is via the TCP/IP protocol only.
Procedure for establishing a connection:
1.

Start RSG45 HART® CommDTM in the FDT Frame application2.

Set the communication parameters, IP address of Memograph M RSG45, port for
HART® communication and scan range (scan range 0 for a point-to-pointconnection)

3.

Open the "Create network" menu to call up the "Select communication channel"
dialog field to select the channel

4.

Tick the check box beside the slot/channel to which one or more HART® devices areconnected. Select "OK" to confirm the menu and start the scan.

5.

All HART® devices that are found are displayed in the FDT Frame application and can
now be accessed.
Detailed help is provided with the RSG45 HART® CommDTM.

48

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Commissioning

9.4.5

Device setup

In the "Setup" menu and in the "Advanced setup" submenu, you will find the mostimportant settings for the device:
Parameter

Possible settings

Description

Change date/time

UTC time zone
dd.mm.yyyy hh:mm:ss

Change the date and time.

Advanced setup

Advanced settings for the device e.g. system settings,
inputs, outputs, communication, application etc.

SystemBasic settings that are needed to operate the device,(e.g. date/ time, security, memory management,
messages, etc.)

InputsSettings for the analog and digital inputs.

Outputs

Settings only required if outputs (e.g. relays or
analog outputs) are to be used.

Communicati
on

Settings required if the USB, RS232/RS485 or
Ethernet interface of the device is to be used (PCoperation, serial data export, modem operation, etc.).
different interfaces (USB, RS232/RS485,
 The
Ethernet) can be operated in parallel. However,simultaneous use of the RS232 and RS485
interface is not possible.

Application

Various application-specific settings (e.g. groupsettings, limit values, etc.).

For a detailed overview of all the operating parameter, please refer to the Appendix of
the Operating Instructions. →  130

9.4.6

Setup via SD card or USB stick

An existing device configuration ("Setup data" *.DEH) from another Memograph M RSG45
or from FieldCare/DeviceCare can be uploaded directly to the device.
Import new setup directly at the device: The function used to load the setup data can befound in the main menu under "Operation -> SD card (or USB stick) -> Load setup ->Select directory -> Next".
In the case of the DIN rail version, the setup can only be uploaded to the device using
an SD card.

9.4.7

Setup via Web server

To configure the device via the Web server, connect the device to a PC via Ethernet (orEthernet over USB).
Please observe the information and communication settings for Ethernet (or Ethernet overUSB) and the Web server under →  43.
To configure the device via a Web server, Administrator or Service authentication isrequired. ID and password administration is performed in the main menu under"Setup -> Advanced setup -> Communication -> Ethernet -> Configuration Web
server -> Authentication".
ID default value: admin; Password: admin
Note: The password should be changed during commissioning!
If security settings are according to "FDA 21 CFR Part 11", you must have
Administrator rights to configure the device via a Web server.

Endress+Hauser

49

Commissioning

Memograph M, RSG45

Establishing a connection and setup
Procedure for setting up a connection:
1.

Connect the device to the PC via Ethernet (or Ethernet over USB).

2.

Start the browser on the PC; enter the IP address: http://<IP address> to open the
Web server for the device. Note: Leading zeros in IP addresses must not be entered(e.g. enter 192.168.1.11 instead of 192.168.001.011).

3.

Enter the ID and password, and confirm each by clicking "OK" (see also the "Webserver" section of the Operating Instructions →  64)

4.

The Web server shows the instantaneous value display of the device. In the Web
server taskbar, click "Menu -> Setup -> Advanced setup".

5.

Start the configuration

Procedure for establishing a connection with the DIN rail version:
OFF

ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
A0036815

Version 1: via Web server/USB (requires a USB driver)1.

Set DIP switch 11 (USB-B/IP) to IP (ON)2.

Connect the USB and open the Web server using the Web browser (IP
192.168.1.212)

3.

Configure the device under "Expert -> Communication -> Ethernet" (fixed IP
address or DHCP)
DIP switches 10 and 11 should not be set to ON simultaneously. In this case, only
Ethernet or USB may be connected.
DHCP: The IP address assigned by DHCP is determined under "Network" (the device
must be connected via Ethernet).
If DIP switches 1 to 8 are all set to ON or OFF, software addressing is active. In allother cases hardware addressing is active. The first 3 octets are therefore used by thesoftware IP address (DHCP = off). The last octet must be configured via the DIP
switches.
The USB driver must be installed.
If the position of DIP switch 11 (USB-B/IP) is changed, the USB cable must be
disconnected from the device for at least 10 seconds.

Procedure for establishing a connection with the DIN rail version:
Version 2: via DTM/USB

50

1.

Set DIP switch 11 (USB-B/IP) to USB-B (OFF)2.

Connect the USB

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Commissioning

3.

Open the DTM (offline parameterization) and configure the device under "Expert ->Communication -> Ethernet" (fixed IP address or DHCP)
DIP switches 10 and 11 should not be set to ON simultaneously. In this case, only
Ethernet or USB may be connected.
DHCP: The IP address assigned by DHCP can be viewed in the online configuration
under "Diagnostics -> Device information -> Ethernet" (the device must beconnected by Ethernet).
If DIP switches 1 to 8 are all set to ON or OFF, software addressing is active. In allother cases hardware addressing is active. The first 3 octets are therefore used by thesoftware IP address (DHCP = off). The last octet must be configured via the DIP
switches.
The PC must be configured correctly (see also the procedure for "Point-to-pointconnection")
The USB driver must be installed.
If the position of DIP switch 11 (USB-B/IP) is changed, the USB cable must be
disconnected from the device for at least 10 seconds.

Procedure for establishing a connection with the DIN rail version:
Version 3: via Ethernet1.

Set DIP switch 10 (Service) to ON

2.

Connect the Ethernet cable (point-to-point connection; a crossover cable is not
required)3.

Now configure the device via the IP address 192.168.1.212 by Web server or DTM(see version 1 and 2)

4.

Following configuration, set DIP switch 10 back to OFF. It is now possible tocommunicate with the device via the configured IP address.
DIP switches 10 and 11 should not be set to ON simultaneously. In this case, only
Ethernet or USB may be connected.
With this method it is not possible to determine which DHCP address the device hasreceived. DHCP should be disabled for this reason. Alternatively, a network
administrator must determine the IP address via the MAC address.
The PC must be configured correctly (see also the procedure for "Point-to-pointconnection")
The USB driver must be installed.
If DIP switches 1 to 8 are all set to ON or OFF, software addressing is active. In allother cases hardware addressing is active. The first 3 octets are therefore used by thesoftware IP address (DHCP = off). The last octet must be configured via the DIP
switches.

Continue with device configuration in accordance with the Operating Instructions for thedevice. The complete Setup menu i.e. all of the parameters listed in the Operating
Instructions, can also be found on the Web server. After configuration, accept the setup
with "Save settings".
Procedure to establish a direct connection via Ethernet (point-to-point connection):→  62Endress+Hauser

51

Commissioning

Memograph M, RSG45

NOTICE
Undefined switching of outputs and relays‣ When configuring using a Web server, the device may adopt undefined states! This
may result in the undefined switching of outputs and relays.
An existing device configuration ("Setup data" *.DEH) from another Memograph M
RSG45 or from FieldCare/DeviceCare can be uploaded directly to the device via the
Web server.
Procedure for uploading a new setup via the Web server:
1.

Establish a connection to the device via the Web server →  50

2.

Click "Data management -> Import device settings" in the Web server function bar

3.

Select the setup file and press "OK" to confirm

4.

The file is transferred, checked and accepted5.

Once the device settings are accepted, information to this effect is displayed in the
Web server.

9.4.8

Setup via FieldCare/DeviceCare configuration software

To configure the device using the configuration software, connect the device to your PC via
USB or Ethernet.
Download at: www.endress.com/download
Establishing a connection and setup
Continue with device configuration in accordance with the Operating Instructions for thedevice.
Information on configuration using FieldCare/DeviceCare configuration software• Offline configuration: Most of the parameters are available (depending on thedevice configuration).
• Online configuration: Only parameters labeled "Online configuration" are available.
→  130NOTICE
Undefined switching of outputs and relays‣ During configuration using the configuration software, the device may assume
undefined statuses! This may result in the undefined switching of outputs and relays.

9.5

Advanced settings (Expert menu)
The Expert menu is protected by the code "0000". If an access code is set up under"Setup -> Advanced setup -> System -> Security -> Protected by -> Access code",
this must be entered here.
If security settings are according to "FDA 21 CFR Part 11", you must be logged in as auser with Administrator rights to access the Expert menu.

The "Expert" menu contains all of the device settings:

52

Parameter

Possible settings

Description

Direct access

000000-000

Direct access to parameters (fast access)

SystemBasic settings that are needed to operate the device,(e.g. date/ time, security, memory management,
messages, etc.)

InputsSettings for the analog and digital inputs.

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Commissioning

Parameter

Possible settings

Description

Outputs

Settings only required if outputs (e.g. relays or
analog outputs) are to be used.

Communication

Settings required if the USB, RS232/RS485 or
Ethernet interface of the device is to be used (PCoperation, serial data export, modem operation, etc.).
different interfaces (USB, RS232/RS485,
 The
Ethernet) can be operated in parallel. However,simultaneous use of the RS232 and RS485
interface is not possible.

Application

Define various application-specific settings (e.g.
group settings, limit values, etc.).

Diagnosis

Device information and service functions for a quick
device check.

A detailed overview of all the operating parameters is provided in the appendix at theend of the Operating Instructions. →  130

9.6

Configuration management
You can save the setup data ("Configuration") to an SD card or a USB stick, to a PC
drive via the Web server, or store them in a database using the configuration
software. This allows additional devices to be configured very easily using the samesettings.

Save setup: The function used to save the setup files can be found in the main menu under"Operation -> SD card (or USB stick) -> Save setup".

LCAUTION
If the SD card or USB stick are removed directly:
Risk of data loss on SD card or USB stick‣ To remove the SD card or the USB stick, always select "Operation -> SD card (or USB
stick) -> Safe removal" in the main menu!
Procedure for saving a setup via the Web server:
1.

Establish a connection to the device via the Web server →  50

2.

Click "Data management -> Save device settings" in the Web server function bar

3.

Select the setup file4.

Transfer the file5.

Verify and accept

6.

Once the device settings are accepted, information to this effect is displayed in the
Web server.
The function for saving the setup data must be enabled at the device for the Web
server under "Setup -> Advanced setup -> Communication -> Ethernet ->Configuration Web server; Setup -> Yes".

9.7

Simulation

Various functions/signals can be simulated for test purposes here.

Endress+Hauser

53Commissioning

Memograph M, RSG45

NOTICE
Selecting simulation: Simulation of the relays and the WebDAV client can be found in
the main menu under "Diagnostics -> Simulation". The simulation of the measured
values can be found in the main menu under "Expert -> Diagnostics -> Simulation".
Only the simulated values are recorded during simulation. The simulation is recorded in
the event logbook.
‣ Do not start simulation if measured value recording must not be interrupted!

9.8

Access protection and security concept

To protect the setup from unauthorized access following commissioning, there are many
options to ensure access protection to the setup settings and the user entries. Access andauthorizations can be configured and assigned passwords.
Hardware protection (digital input, DIP switch) and password protection can be used
redundantly.
The user of the device is responsible for access protection and the security concept. In
addition to the device functions listed, user policies and procedures, in particular,
must also be applied (e.g. password allocation, password sharing, physical accessbarriers, etc.).
The following protection options and functionalities are available:• Protection per control input• Protection via access code
• Protection via user roles• Protection via user administration according to "FDA 21 CFR Part 11"• Protection via DIP switches (DIN rail version)
Overview of access protection and security concept
Access protection User

Setupchanges

Description

Open access-

Permitted

No protection, not recommended, all setup and systemsettings are accessible.

Control input-

Permitted

Access protection via digital input (e.g. via key switch), all
setup and system settings are accessible if input actuated.

Access code-

Permitted

Access protection via access code, access authorization(distribution of access code) must be defined via (in-house)
regulations and securely controlled. All setup and systemsettings can be accessed after entering the access code.

Passwordprotected userroles

FDA 21 CFR Part
11 User
Administration
passwordprotected

54

Protection levels and access authorization can be defined via
3 levels of access (user roles). Access authorization(distribution of passwords) must be defined via (in-house)
regulations and securely controlled.
Administrator Permitted

Access protection via administrator password, all setup andsystem settings can be accessed after entering the password.

Service

Permitted

Access protection via service password, all setup and systemsettings can be accessed after entering the password,
advanced functions (e.g. preset) are possible in the service
mode.

Operator

LockedAll setup and system settings are locked, access to device
information and display values after entering the password.
Protection levels and access authorization can be defined via
5 levels of access (in accordance with FDA 21 Part 11 User
Administration). Access authorization (distribution ofpasswords) must be defined via (in-house) regulations andsecurely controlled. The user logs in with his user name andthe password he has been assigned. All actions are logged ina tamper-proof manner in the audit trail (logbook) inaccordance with the FDA.

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Commissioning

Access protection User

DIP switches (DIN
rail device)

Setupchanges

Description

Administrator Permitted

No protection, all setup and system settings are freely
accessible.

Main user

LockedSetup and system settings are locked. Limit value changes,
data entries, confirmation of registration, etc. are allowed.

User Level 1

LockedSetup, limit value and system settings are locked, data entries(e.g. text entries), registration confirmation, etc. are allowed.

User Level 2

LockedData entries and setup, limit value and system settings arelocked. Display function for device status and measured
values, registration confirmation are allowed.

User Level 3

LockedNo data entries possible, display function only for device
status and measured values.

-

Permitted

Access protection via DIP switch at front (limited protection);
protection level can be increased by additional externalmeasures (e.g. locked control cabinet). All setup and systemsettings can be accessed when the DIP switch is set to "Accesspermitted".

In order to change any parameter, the correct code must first be entered or the device must
be unlocked using the control input.
Setup lock via control input: The settings for the control input can be found in the main
menu under "Setup -> Advanced setup -> Inputs -> Digital inputs -> Digital input X ->Function: Control input; Action: Lock setup".
It is preferable to lock the setup using a control input.
Setting up an access code: The settings for the access code can be found in the main
menu under "Setup -> Advanced setup -> System -> Security -> Protected by -> Accesscode". Factory setting: "Open access", i.e. modifications can always be made.
Make a note of the code and store in a safe place.
Setting up user roles: The settings for the user roles (operator, admin and service) areprovided in the main menu under "Setup -> Advanced setup -> System -> Security ->Protected by -> User roles" . Factory setting: "Open access", i.e. modifications can always
be made.
The passwords should be changed during commissioning.
Make a note of the code and store in a safe place.
Setting up user administration according to "FDA 21 CFR Part 11": The settings for user
administration can be found in the main menu under "Setup -> Advanced setup ->System -> Security -> Protected by -> FDA 21 CFR Part 11". Factory setting: "Openaccess", i.e. modifications can always be made.

9.9

HTTPS Web server setup

To operate the HTTPS Web server, an X.509 certificate and a suitable private key must be
installed on the device. For security reasons, installation is via a USB stick only.
The certificate that is preinstalled on the device when delivered from the factoryshould not be used!
Server certificates cannot be installed via the "USB stick/import SSL certificates"
function!

Endress+Hauser

55

Commissioning

Memograph M, RSG45

Prerequisites
Private key:
• X.509 PEM file (Base64 encoded)• RSA key with max. 2048 bit• May not be password-protected
Certificate:• X.509 file (Base64 encoded PEM or binary DER format)• V3 incl. extension required• Signed by a certification authority (CA) or sub-certification authorities (recommended),
self-signed where necessary.
Certificate and private key can be created or converted using openssl(https://www.openssl.org) for example. Contact your IT administrator to create thecorresponding files.
Tip: More information on this topic is provided in our How To Videos underhttps://www.youtube.com/endresshauser
Installation:
1.

Copy the private key onto a USB stick into the root directory. File name: key.pem

2.

Copy the certificate onto a USB stick into the root directory. File name: cert.pem orcert.der3.

Connect the USB stick to the device. The private key and the certificate are installed
automatically. The installation is logged in the event logbook.

4.

Remove the USB stick using the "Safe removal" function
Notes:• In the DIN rail version, the device will automatically copy any data not yet saved to
the USB stick• The device may have to be restarted for the browser to use the new certificate• Delete the private key from the USB stick following installation• Keep the private key in a safe place• Use the private key and the certificate for one device only
• To prevent unauthorized use, it is possible to disable the USB A port on the device.
In this way, an attacker cannot replace the certificate or the private key ("Denial ofService"). If necessary, install a perimeter guard to prevent access to the device.

Checking certificates
You can check the certificate via "Main menu -> Diagnostics -> Device information ->SSL certificates". For this purpose, select the "Server certificate" point under thecertificate.
Replace the certificate in good time before it expires. The device will display adiagnostic message 14 days before the certificate expires.
Uninstalling certificates and the private key
You can check the certificate via "Main menu -> Diagnostics -> Device information ->SSL certificates". For this purpose, select the "Server certificate" point under thecertificate. You can delete the certificate here.
In this case, the preinstalled certificate is reused.
Using self-signed certificatesSelf-signed certificates must be stored in the PC's certificate memory under "Trusted
Root Certification Authorities" so that the browser does not display a warning.
Alternatively, an exception can be saved in the browser.

56

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Commissioning

9.10

TrustSens Calibration Monitoring

Available in conjunction with iTHERM TrustSens TM371 / TM372.
Application package :• Up to 20 iTHERM TrustSens TM371 / TM372 devices can be evaluated via the HART
interface• Self-calibration data displayed on screen or via the Web server• Generation of a calibration history• Creation of a calibration protocol as an RTF file directly at the RSG45• Evaluation, analysis and further processing of the calibration data using "Field DataManager" (FDM) analysis software
Enable the function: Self-calibration monitoring is switched on under Expert →Application → Monitor self-calibration.
For more information, see additional Operating Instructions →  BA01887R

Endress+Hauser

57Fulfilling requirements in accordance with "FDA 21 CFR Part 11"

Memograph M, RSG45

10

Fulfilling requirements in accordance with
"FDA 21 CFR Part 11"

10.1

General notes

Before applying electronic signatures the
Office of Regional Operations (HFC-100)
5600 Fishers Lane
Rockville, MD 20857
USA
is to be informed, by means of an informal letter with handwritten signature, that thecompany intends to use electronic documents/signatures in future. Administrators andusers must be instructed / trained in accordance with 21 CFR 11 or must already possess
the relevant knowledge or qualifications. Commercial software used in electronic recording
systems in accordance with 21 CFR 11 must be validated. The suitability of the device andthe associated PC software (incl. operating system) for the application in question must be
specified, validated, and documented (e.g. with regard to data confidentiality, printout ofthe device parameters, security backup of the set parameters, assignment of accessauthorizations in the PC software, suitability of the software used for commercial purposes– such as operating system, etc.).
The identity of the relevant person must be verified before assigning / determining theelectronic signature (or elements of this electronic signature, e.g. unique ID / initialization
password). The administrator must ensure and document the uniqueness of the ID and its
correct assignment to the relevant person. Electronic signatures may only be used byauthorized users. They must not be passed on to third parties. Administrators and users
must undertake not to misuse their user IDs and passwords (including initialization
passwords).
Written procedural instructions, which make individuals responsible for all actions carriedout using their electronic signature, must be drawn up and observed so as to provide adeterrent mechanism for the falsification of documents and signatures.
Suitable checks of system documentation must be made (distribution, access, and use of
documentation for system operation and maintenance). Revision and change control
procedures must be implemented for the system documentation in which thechronological order of the development and change to system documentation is
documented. The system is not intended for use in Internet applications/open systems.

58

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Fulfilling requirements in accordance with "FDA 21 CFR Part 11"

NOTICEThe user is responsible for observing the following instructions for ensuring
compliance with FDA 21 CFR Part 11:‣ The scope of application for this FDA 21 CFR Part 11 evaluation refers to the
Memograph M RSG45 and the associated Field Data Manager (FDM) PC software,
which have been produced and tested by the manufacturer. The overall system must be
subjected to a final evaluation by the end user.
‣ Recordings from the device and the associated PC software in accordance with "FDA
Guidance for Industry: Computerized Systems Used in Clinical Investigations: 2007"
cannot be used for clinical studies.
‣ In order to satisfy the requirements of FDA 21 CFR Part 11 with regard to theelectronic signature, the device may only be read out with the associated Field DataManager (FDM) PC software.
‣ The device and the associated PC software do not take into account the requirementsof FDA 21 CFR Part 11, §11.30 for "Open systems". Operation within the context of anopen system must be excluded.
‣ The operator must take suitable management precautions to prevent the loss ofpassword access data/authentication data.
‣ The printer must be connected correctly and its long-term function guaranteed, even in
the event of local changes (e.g. network printer).
‣ Due to the aging of components, the device must be calibrated at regular intervals.
‣ Regular maintenance must also be carried out.
‣ Measures must be taken to prevent the device from being moved (e.g. physicalprotection).
‣ No data will be recorded in the event of a power failure.
‣ The battery buffer for the backup clock is checked and, where necessary, a warning
issued.
‣ Wireless transmission may not be used between the device and the PC software. In thecase of wired transmission, operation is only permitted within the closed company
network. This must be checked during the validation of the complete system.
NOTICEThe user is responsible for observing the following instructions for ensuring
compliance with FDA 21 CFR Part 11:
Requirements for connected hardware components:‣ Associated hardware components (e.g. a PC connected to the device) are part of thesystem but must be provided by the user. Backup measures designed to prevent harddisk defects or a memory overrun are the responsibility of the user.
‣ Wired peripherals, such as a USB keyboard for the device or a keyboard for the PC, canbe scanned in using "Keylogger". It is the user's responsibility to prevent the use of socalled "sniffers".

Endress+Hauser

59Fulfilling requirements in accordance with "FDA 21 CFR Part 11"

10.2

Memograph M, RSG45

Important device settings

NOTICE
In order to satisfy the requirements from 21 CFR 11, certain device functions are
required. In particular, some user administration settings must be made:‣ Activate user administration and password protection according to FDA 21 CFR Part
11: In the main menu go to "Setup -> Advanced setup > System -> Security ->Protected by -> FDA 21 CFR Part 11"‣ Create a user: In the main menu go to "User administration -> Create user account"to create a new user.
‣ Make general user administration settings and define password rules: In the main
menu go to "User administration -> General". Recommendation: Password valid for
60 days in order to prevent it from becoming too familiar to the user.
‣ Assign the permitted rights to users in the main menu under "User administration ->General -> User rights"‣ All changes to the device are automatically recorded in the event logbook. The event
logbook can be opened from the main menu under "Diagnostics -> Event logbook"
NOTICEThe user is responsible for observing the following instructions for ensuring
compliance with FDA 21 CFR Part 11:
Requirements for the device:‣ The device must be regarded as a closed system.
‣ Administrator rights are required to change the configuration. The device must be
locked via hardware protection (terminal cover) and a digital input assigned. Changes
are documented in the event logbook / audit trail. The event logbook can be opened
from the main menu under "Diagnostics -> Event logbook".
‣ User administration with ID and password must be active.
‣ All changes must always be documented with the user's name in the event logbook. It isessential that user administration is active for this. All users must be createdaccordingly under User administration.
‣ All settings relating to password complexity and validity period are the responsibility of
the administrator.
‣ During commissioning, the special requirements for the admin role must be taken into
account (stricter password rules). User administration can only be disabled by theadministrator. Under certain circumstances the administrator may lock users out of thesystem or sabotage user administration.
‣ The initial password set by the administrator must be changed on the first login(configurable).
‣ If the wrong password is entered repeatedly (max. number of attempts is adjustable),
access is blocked and an alarm can be sent by e-mail.
‣ After setting up/using the device, the user must log out. Automatic logout after aconfigurable time must be activated.
‣ Communication interfaces can be blocked by the administrator. The interface for using
the modem must be switched off.
‣ Hardware locking must be performed for the device update. This ensures that only theadministrator can perform a firmware update.
‣ Any manipulation of the time synchronization is the responsibility of the user.
‣ In order to prevent a loss of data, the data must be read out regularly from the memory.
‣ Administrator rights are required in order to delete the internal memory. A hardware
lock can also be used to prevent the memory from being deleted.
‣ The device produces a diagnosis list in which faults are documented. The diagnosis list
must be checked regularly; this can be done in the main menu under "Diagnostics ->Diagnosis list ".
‣ Proof testing of the error log is recommended; this is done from the main menu under"Diagnostics -> Device information -> Error log".

60

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Fulfilling requirements in accordance with "FDA 21 CFR Part 11"

NOTICEThe user is responsible for observing the following instructions for ensuring
compliance with FDA 21 CFR Part 11:
Requirements for the external memory:‣ The external storage medium (SD card/USB stick) must only be removed using thefunction "Operation -> SD card/USB stick -> Remove safely".
‣ In contrast to the protected data format, which features CRC16 protective measures,the stored data can be manipulated when using the open format (*.csv).
‣ In order to prevent unauthorized access (e.g. through theft), the external memory canalso be disabled or removed.

10.3

Important settings in the Field Data Manager (FDM)
PC software

NOTICE
In order to satisfy the requirements according to FDA 21 CFR Part 11, certain
functions are required in the associated PC software. In particular, some user
administration settings must be made.
‣ Use only operating systems with user administration (e.g. MS Windows® 2000/XP/
Vista/7/8).
‣ Create an administrator: Create an administrator under "Extras -> Useradministration".
‣ Activate user administration and password protection according to FDA 21 CFR Part
11: Under "Extras -> Settings -> User administration" select "Activate user
management" and "Password protection in compliance with FDA 21 CFR Part 11".
The software applies the settings following a restart.
‣ Additional users can now be created under "Extras -> User administration" with thecorresponding access roles.
‣ All changes made to the software are recorded in the "Audit trail". This can be opened
via "Extras -> Audit trail".
‣ Where appropriate, use the high-performance automatic functions of the PC software(e.g. automatic read out, automatic backup function, automatic e-mail alert).
‣ Note:Detailed instructions can be found on the DVD provided with the PC software.
NOTICEThe user is responsible for observing the following instructions for ensuring
compliance with FDA 21 CFR Part 11:‣ Modem operation cannot be implemented as a closed system.
‣ User administration must be active in order to record the user names in the audit trail.
‣ The password must be changed on the first login.
‣ If the administrator forgets the password, a master password, which is only valid for alimited period, may be used. Access is granted to the user on request and following
authorization.
‣ If a user does not log out, an automatic lockout (screensaver) is activated via the
Windows® system setting.
‣ It is possible to use the Field Data Manager PC software without identification or
password protection, but this is not compliant with FDA 21 CFR Part 11.
‣ The ending of the automatic system service must be controlled via Windows® user
rights.
‣ Since the PC date/time is used for the audit trail, it is theoretically possible tomanipulate the time stamp. This must be prevented by the user by means of Windows®
user rights.
‣ Regular backups and preventive maintenance (e.g. by means of software updates) must
be carried out.
‣ It is important to ensure that no data can be intercepted or manipulated duringcommunication between the device and the database.

Endress+Hauser

61

Operation

Memograph M, RSG45

11

Operation

The "Operation" menu is geared towards the tasks and activities of the operator. It contains
all the parameters that are needed in ongoing operation. Historical values and analyses,
for example, can be displayed in the "Operation" menu and display settings can be made.
Any settings made for the local display have no effect on the measurement section or theconfigured device parameters, however.
The device's simple operating concept and the integrated help function enables you to
perform operation for many applications without the need for hardcopy operating
instructions.

11.1

Reading-out and changing the Ethernet setting
address

To establish communication with the device via Ethernet, the following settings must be
known or modified where necessary:
Display IP/MAC address (only if DHCP is enabled): For the device's IP or MAC address,
see the main menu under "Diagnostics -> Device information -> Ethernet".
Display/change Ethernet settings: For the device's Ethernet settings, see the main menu
under "Setup -> Advanced setup -> Communication -> Ethernet".
In the case of the DIN rail version: These settings can only be accessed by Web server
under "Menu -> Diagnostics -> Device information -> Ethernet".
Procedure to establish a direct connection via Ethernet (point-to-point connection):1.

Configure the PC (depends on operating system): e.g. IP address: 192.168.1.1; subnet
mask: 255.255.255.0; gateway: 192.168.1.1

2.

Disable DHCP on the device

3.

Make communication settings on the device: e.g. IP address: 192.168.1.2; subnet
mask: 255.255.255.0; gateway: 192.168.1.1
A crossover cable is not required.

11.2

Reading off the device locking status

If setup is locked via a control input, a padlock symbol appears on the top right of thescreen. The setup must first be unlocked via the control input before device parameters canbe edited.
Setup lock via control input: For the settings for the control input, see the main menu
under "Setup -> Advanced setup -> Inputs -> Digital inputs -> Digital input X ->Function: Control input; Action: Lock setup".
If setup is locked via the access code, all the operating parameters can be displayed, andcan also be edited as soon as the access code is entered.
In the case of the DIN rail version: These settings can only be accessed by Web server
under "Setup -> Advanced setup -> Inputs -> Digital inputs -> Digital input X ->Function: Control input; Action: Lock setup".

62

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Operation

11.3

Reading off measured values (display devices)

d

c
5

b

a
6

7

5

8

6

7

8

9

9

4

10

3

1

4

10

2
A0024709

 16
a
b
c
d
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Device front (left: version with navigator and front interfaces; right: version with stainless steel front andtouchscreen)

Slot for SD card
USB B socket "Function" e.g. to connect to PC or laptop
USB A socket "Host" e.g. for USB memory stick, external keyboard, barcode reader or printerYellow LED for read/write access to the SD card
Navigator: press briefly to open the main menu and confirm messages (=Enter); press for longer to open the
online help
Green LED (top) lit: power supply present. Red LED (bottom) flashing: maintenance required
Variable "soft keys" 1 to 4 (from left to right)
Function indicator of the "soft keys"
Header: group name, analysis type
Header: current date/time
User ID (when function is active)
Header: alternating display indicating the percentage space on the SD card or USB stick that has already beenused. The display alternates between displaying memory information and status symbols.
Area for measured value display (e.g. curve display). Display of current measured values and the status in theevent of an error/alarm condition. In the case of counters, the type of counter is displayed as a symbol.
Status bar

An overview of all the symbols and icons is provided in the "Operation options" section.
→  38
If a measuring point has limit value status, the corresponding channel identifier ishighlighted in red (quick detection of limit value violations). During a limit value
violation and device operation, the acquisition of measured values continues
uninterrupted.
Information on how to rectify a problem if an error occurs is provided in the"Troubleshooting" section. →  82

Endress+Hauser

63

Operation

Memograph M, RSG45

11.4

Web server

The device features an integrated Web server, which enables access via Ethernet (orEthernet over USB). The Web server is used for convenient device commissioning andconfiguration and to visualize measured values. Access is possible from any access point
when the device is connected to an Ethernet network. An appropriate IT infrastructure,
security measures etc. must be implemented in accordance with the requirements of theplant. Point-to-point access via Web server and Ethernet via USB is particularly well-suited
for service purposes.
While the DIN rail device version can be operated and configured using the FieldCare andDeviceCare software tools, it is preferably configured and operated via the Web server.
Activation of the Web server in the menu Setup → Advanced setup → Communication →Ethernet → Web server → Yes or menu Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Webserver → Yes
The Web server port is preset to 80. The port can be changed in the Expert →Communication → Ethernet menu.
If the network is protected by a firewall, the port may need to be activated.
The following web browsers are supported:• MS Internet Explorer 11 and higher• MS Edge• Mozilla Firefox 52.1.0 and higher• Opera 12.x and higher• Google Chrome 66 and higher
A minimum resolution of 1920x1080 (full HD) is recommended.
In order to use the full functionality of the Web server, it is recommended that thelatest version of the browser is used. To access the device via a Web server, you musthave Administrator, Service or Operator authentication →  54
The Web server is not optimized for visualization on smartphones.
When delivered, the following default values are set for the user roles in the device andWeb server:• ID: admin; password: admin• ID: service; password: service• ID: operator; password: operator
FDA role-based access protection is not pre-defined. Proceed as follows: perform a basic
setup logged in as "admin" and then enable "FDA compliant" access protection.
Note: Passwords should be changed during commissioning!
The ID and password can be changed in the main menu under "Setup -> Advanced
setup -> Communication -> Ethernet -> Configuration Web server ->Authentication".

11.4.1

Access to the Web server via HTTP (HTML)When using an Internet browser, it suffices to enter the address http://<IP address> todisplay the information as HTML in the browser.
Note: Leading zeros in IP addresses must not be entered (e.g. enter 192.168.1.11
instead of 192.168.001.011).
As in the case of the display, you can alternate between the display groups in the Web
server. The measured values are automatically updated. In addition to the measured
values, status and limit value flags are displayed.

64

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Operation

11.4.2

Access to the Web server via XML

XML format is available in addition to HTML format and contains all measured values of agroup. This can be integrated into additional systems as the user wishes.
The XML file is available in ISO-8859-1 (Latin-1) coding at http://<IP address>/values.xml (alternative: http://<IP address>/xml). However, some special characters,such as the Euro symbol, cannot be displayed in this file. Texts such as digital statuses are
not transmitted.
Note: Leading zeros in IP addresses must not be entered (e.g. enter 192.168.1.11
instead of 192.168.001.011).
The decimal point is always displayed as a period in the XML file. All times are given
in UTC. The time difference in minutes is noted in the following entry.
The structure of the channel values for the XML file is explained as follows:<device

id="AI01IV" tag="Channel 1" type="INTRN"><v1>50.0</v1><u1>%</u1><vtime>20130506-140903</vtime><vstslvl1>0</vstslvl1><hlsts1>L</hlsts1><param><min>0.0</min><max>100.0</max><hh></hh><hi></hi><lo></lo><ll></ll></param><tag>Channel 1</tag><man>Manufacturer</man></device>
Tag

Description

device id

Unique ID of measuring point

tag

Channel ident.

type

Data type (INTRN, MODBUS)

v1

Measured value of channel as a decimal value

u1

Unit of measured value

vtime

Date and time

vstslvl1

Error level0 = OK, 1 = warning, 2 = error

hlsts1

Limit value status
H = upper limit value, L = lower limit value, LH = upper and lower limit value violation

param
min
max
hh
hi
lo
ll

Parameter (optional)
Lower zoom
Upper zoom
Upper alarm limit
Upper warning limit
Lower warning limit
Lower alarm limit

MAN

Manufacturer

11.4.3

Setup, operation and service via the Web server

Establish a connection to the Web server:
1.

Connect the PC to the device via Ethernet (or Ethernet over USB)

2.

Start the browser on the PC

3.

Enter the device's IP address in the browser http://<ip address>

4.

Log in with the ID and password

The startup screen of the Web server appears.
Endress+Hauser

65

Operation

Memograph M, RSG45

Data Manager
DIN rail unit

A0037114

General information regarding the Device name, Device tag and Status signal isdisplayed in the top section of the Web server. The following functions can be accessed in
the middle of the screen:
Health status – Measured values – Menu – Data management - Network.
Clicking the functions calls up the following submenus. The submenus are closed by
selecting "Cancel" or by clicking "Back" several times.
Health status (advanced device status)
Function

Description

Device information Advanced device status, Ethernet settings, hardware configuration, device options,memory information, SSL certificate
Confirm messages

Submenu to confirm system messages

Event logbook

Submenu for the event logbook

Measured values (choice of measured value display)
Function

Description

Instantaneous values

Measured values are displayed as numerical instantaneous values, the signalgroups can be selected as tabs here

Instantaneous values ascurvesThe measured values are displayed as curves

History

Displays a history of the measured values

Menu
The menu structure displayed in the Web server corresponds largely to the menu structurein the device →  33
Data management
Update functions and parameters relating to the firmware, load/save setup, save setup as
RTF, import SSL certificates
Network
Displays the Ethernet parameters (IP address, subnet mask, gateway, domain)

66

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Operation

Displays the current measured values and history data
Under Measured values a selection window appears for Instantaneous values –Instantaneous values as curves – History. Click to display the corresponding display
function.
Current measured values can also be called up via the Web server without logging inwith the address http://<IP address>/iv. Device configuration is not possible in thiscase, however.
Note: The browser must support HTML5.
Optional command parameters:• Syntax: http://<ip address>/iv?group=<x>&refresh=<y>• group=<x> where x = 1 to 10• refresh=<y> where y = 3 to 3600 in seconds
Note: Pay attention to lower and upper case if using an optional parameter.
This function can be disabled in the setup. If this function is disabled, the option toexport instantaneous values to XML is also disabled for security reasons.
Instantaneous values
The current measured values are displayed in numerical format. Clicking the tabs displays
the signal groups defined in the setup.

A0037118

Instantaneous values as curves
The current measured values are displayed as a curve and numerically over the time axis.
The refresh rate can be set in a selection window. The display mode can be set to fullscreen. Clicking the tabs displays the signal groups defined in the setup.

A0037117

Display functions
If the cursor is moved over one of the curves, the instantaneous value of the current pointin the curve is displayed with the time stamp and unit. Channels can be displayed andhidden using the channel checkboxes in the legend.

Endress+Hauser

67

Operation

Memograph M, RSG45

History (logged measured values)
Clicking the History button loads the data previously logged. This may take a few seconds
depending on the data connection (USB, Ethernet, WLAN) and the number of measuring
channels. The data for each channel is loaded to display the content of one screen. The
logged (history) values are displayed as a curve and numerically over the time axis. The
display mode can be set to full screen. Clicking the tabs displays the signal groups definedin the setup.

A0037115

Display functions
If the cursor is moved over one of the curves, the instantaneous value of the current pointin the curve is displayed with the time stamp and unit. Channels can be displayed andhidden using the channel checkboxes in the legend.
Moving the dashed cursor line along the time axis updates the numerical display of themeasured values accordingly (on right).
Go to …: Enter a point in time. The history is reloaded. If you enter a time for which nomeasured values are available, the next possible time where measured values are available
is displayed.
Search older: The information displayed moves half a screen to the left (displays older
measured values). Press the << button to move the information one entire screen to theleft (older measured values).
Search newer: The information displayed moves half a screen to the right (displays more
recent measured values). Press the >> button to shift the information one entire screen to
the right (more recent measured values).
Note: If no measured values were recorded for a certain range of time (e.g. as there
was no power supply), this is indicated by a symbol at the top of the window. The
curves jump accordingly.

68

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Operation

A0037116

11.4.4

Remote control via the Web serverThis function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
The device can be remote-controlled via the Web server. In the Web server, the remotecontrol function can be found under "Measured values -> Remote control". Here thedisplay shown corresponds directly to the device display. The device is operated using
buttons below this display. The interval for refreshing the display can be set in the"Refresh" menu.
Enabling remote control on the device:1.

In the menu Setup -> Advanced setup -> Communication -> Ethernet ->Configuration Web server -> Remote control, select "Yes" or under2.

Expert -> Communication -> Ethernet -> Configuration Web server -> Remotecontrol, select "Yes".

11.5

Changing the group

The group to be displayed can be changed in the main menu under "Operation -> Changegroup". Alternatively, the group can also be changed by turning the navigator.
Version with stainless steel front and touchscreen:
The active groups can be changed with a horizontal "swiping" movement.
For the DIN rail version: The active groups can only be queried and changed via the
Web server under "Measured values -> Instantaneous values / Instantaneous
values as curves / History". The groups are created as tabs and can be selected bymouse click.
Only the active groups are displayed here. The settings for this can be made in themain menu under "Setup -> Advanced setup -> Application -> Signal groups ->Group x".

11.6

Locking operation

This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.

Endress+Hauser

69

Operation

Memograph M, RSG45

Local operation can be blocked in the main menu under "Operation -> Lock operation" toprevent unintended or incorrect operation (e.g. when cleaning the device).
The device is unlocked by pressing the navigator or the OK operating key for 3 s.
When using an external keyboard, the device is unlocked with the key combination"Ctrl-Alt-Del".

11.7

Login / logout

Log onto the device or log off the user currently logged on.
Only for active user administration (FDA 21 CFR Part 11) or role-based accessprotection →  54

11.8

Changing the password

Change the user password.
The access concept (free/access code/user roles/FDA) must first be defined: "Menu ->Expert -> System -> Security -> Protected by -> FDA 21 CFR Part 11" →  54
The password can also be changed via the Web server under "Data management ->Change password".

11.9

SD card/USB stick

11.9.1

Function of SD card or USB stick

Without affecting the internal memory, data packets are copied block by block (min. 1 xdaily, midnight) to the SD card. Tests are also made to determine whether the data havebeen written without any errors. Once a new SD card is inserted, the device starts saving
the data automatically after 5 minutes. The use of a USB stick is only recommended if
certain data ranges should be copied.
For the panel version: The USB stick is not used for storing the measured values
continuously, i.e. it is not automatically updated.

70

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Operation

Data are saved in two different folders on the storage media depending on the storage
method:• All data are copied cyclically to the rec_data_<Device name> folder if a data packet iscomplete or the function "Update" is activated under "Operation -> SD card/USB stick > Update".
• The data for the selected time range that was selected under "Operation -> SD card /USB stick -> Save measured value" are copied to the rng_data_<device name> folder.
Copying these data does not affect the storage of the data in the rec_data_<device
name> folder.
• Only use new, formatted SD cards that are recommended by the manufacturer (see"Accessories" →  97).
• During normal operation, the used memory space on the SD card or USB stick isdisplayed on the top right of the display ("SD: xx%" or "USB: xx%").
Dashes "–" on this display mean that no SD card is inserted.
• The SD card must not be write-protected.
• Prior to removing the external data carrier, select "Operation -> SD card/USB stick-> Update". The current data block is closed and saved to the external data carrier.
This ensures that all the current data (up until the last save) is included on the datacarrier.
• Depending on the device configuration (see "Setup –> Advanced setup –> System–> Ext. memory –> Warning at"), an acknowledgeable message on the display
notifies the user that the external data carrier has to be changed before the datacarrier is 100 % full.
• The device keeps track of which data have already been copied onto the SD card or
USB stick. If the data carrier is not changed in time or if no SD card is inserted, the
new external data carrier is filled with the missing data from the internal memory insofar as the data are still in the memory. As measured value acquisition/recording
is assigned the highest priority, it may take several minutes in this case for the data
to be copied from the internal memory to the SD card or USB stick.

11.9.2

DIN rail version: function of SD card or USB stick

USB A socket "Host" e.g. for USB memory stick or printerIf a USB stick is inserted, data that have not yet been saved are copied to the stick
automatically. The red LED flashes while data are being copied to the stick.
Do not remove the USB stick when the red LED is flashing! Risk of data loss!
If an error occurs (e.g. USB stick full or defective), the red LED is lit constantly. Remove theUSB stick and replace it.
SD cardCyclic storage is completed via the "Safe SD card removal" button, the LED (d) goes out. The
SD card can now be removed.
If the SD card is not removed within 5 minutes, the write cycles start again.
LED at SD slot. Yellow LED lit or flashing when the device writes to the SD card or reads it.
Do not remove the SD card if the LED is lit or flashing! Risk of data loss!

11.9.3Functions relating to the SD card or USB stick

These functions are not supported by the DIN rail version.

Endress+Hauser

71

Operation

Memograph M, RSG45

For functions to save measured data and device settings on a removable medium, see themain menu under "Operation -> SD card / USB stick" (only if an SD card or USB stick isprovided).
Remove safely:
All internal access is terminated to ensure safe removal of the storage medium from thedevice. A message is displayed when the storage media can be removed. If the SD card is
not removed, the device automatically starts to save data to the storage medium again
after 5 minutes.
Only remove the data storage medium using this function; otherwise data may be
lost!
Update:Measurement data not yet saved on the storage medium are now saved. This may take amoment. Measured value acquisition is running in parallel and has top priority.
Data from several devices can be saved onto one storage medium.
• Save measured values:
A user-definable time range can be saved on the data storage medium.
• Load setup:
Loads device settings (setup) from the storage medium onto the device.
• Save setup:
All device settings (setup) are saved onto the storage medium. They can be archived orused for other devices.
• Save setup as RTF:
Saves the setup on the storage medium in a readable format as an RTF file (rich text
format).
The RTF file can be opened and formatted using suitable word processing software (e.g.
MS Word), allowing printouts to be easily made.
• Screenshot:
Save the current measured value display as a bitmap on the SD card or USB stick.
• Update firmware:
Loads new firmware onto the device. Only visible if a firmware file is provided on the SD
card or USB stick.
Caution: The device will restart. Save the setup and measured values beforehand on
the SD card or USB stick.
• Process screens:
Load, export or delete process screens.
Load: Loads a process screen from the external storage medium into device memory.
Export: Saves the process screen in the device onto the external storage medium totransfer it to another device.
Delete: Deletes the selected process screen from device memory.
Procedure for creating and processing process screens: →  73
• Load user administration:
Loads all settings and user accounts from the storage medium to the device. The file has
the extension ".ids2".
Caution: Any existing settings/accounts are overwritten!

72

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Operation• Save user administration:
Saves all settings and user accounts to the storage medium. The file has the extension".ids2".
• User administration as RTF:
Saves the user administration on the storage medium in a readable format as an RTF file(rich text format).
• Import SSL certificate:
Uploads an SSL certificate (X.509) to the device. Certificates are needed to establish an
SSL connection in order to send e-mails in an encrypted manner for example. Certificatesare available from your network administrator or provider. The following are supported:
DER, CER and CRT (binary or Base64-encoded).
Only visible if an SSL certificate is provided on the SD card or USB stick.
Creating a process screen using the process picture generator
This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
The DVD provided with the Field Data Manager (FDM) software includes a process
picture generator.
Alternatively download at:www.readwin2000.com/tools_files/ProcessPictureGenerator.zip
This program allows the user to generate a process screen quickly and easily.
Start the process picture generator and create the first project:
1.

Copy the entire "ProcessPictureGenerator" directory from the DVD to a local directoryon the PC

2.

Alternatively, unzip the downloaded ZIP file in a local directory on the PC

3.

Double-click on the "FieldDiagramer.exe" application it contains

4.

The process picture generator is started and a new project is created5.

Select all fields required for the project such as project name, device type, etc. as wellas the background picture

6.

Edit the process screen accordingly

7.

Use the function "File -> Save" to save the current project8.

Using the "File -> Export" function, save the process screen ("PP_GROUP_<xx>.bmp")with the necessary INI file ("PP_GROUP_<xx>.ini") to a USB stick or an SD card. Note:
The "xx" in the file name stands for the group (01 to 10).

9.

Remove the USB stick or SD card from the PC

Further help can be called directly from the help menu of the process picture generator.
Load the process screen in the device:
1.

Plug the USB stick or the SD card containing the generated process screen into thedevice2.

In the main menu under "Operation -> SD card / USB stick -> Process screen ->Group", select the group to which the process screen is to be assigned

3.

In the main menu under "Operation -> SD card / USB stick -> Process screen ->Load", select the desired process screen and upload it to the device

4.

In the main menu under "Operation -> Change display mode", change the display
mode to "Process screen".

Editing process screens on the device
Process screens can be edited on the device.

Endress+Hauser

73

Operation

Memograph M, RSG45

The following functions are possible:• Add channels to/remove channels from the process screen• Change the position, font size, and alignment• Delete the process screen
Call up the Context menu: In the measured value display, press the navigator or "Menu"
for longer than 3s.
The "Process screen" submenu can be accessed in the context menu that now opens:
Parameter

Parameter/description"Edit" submenu

Edit the process screen currently displayed (position, font size, etc.).

"Channel 1-8"
submenu

Edit the selected channel of the process screen (enable, change position/font size etc.).
Display in the process screen
Switch the channel in the process screen on or off.
Note: Does not affect measured value storage/configuration.
Options: No, yes; factory setting: no
Channel ident.
Specify whether the channel identifier should be displayed in addition to the measured
value. The channel identifier is displayed above the measured value.
Options: No, yes; factory setting: no
Alignment
Specify how the measured value should be aligned.
For "Align left", the x-position is the left top-hand corner of the measured value. For
 "Align
right", the x-position is the right top-hand corner of the measured value.
Options: Align left, align right
Factory setting: Align rightx-position
Selection of the x-position where the measured value is to be displayed.
User entry: 0 to 799 pixels; factory setting: 10
The point of origin (x-/y-zero point) is the top left. When the x-value is increased thetext moves to the right.
y-position
Selection of the y-position where the measured value is to be displayed.
point of origin (x-/y-zero point) is the top left. When the y-value is increased
 The
the text moves down.
User entry: 0 to 450 pixels; factory setting: 50 (channel 1) to 260 (channel 8)
Font size
Selection of the font size in which the measured value is to be displayed.
Options: Small, medium, large, very large; factory setting: large

Accept changes

Saves the changes to the process screen in the device memory.

DeleteDeletes the selected process screen from the device memory. The device then changes tothe curve display.

11.9.4

Notes on e-mail encryption

In addition to sending unencrypted e-mails, it is also possible to send encrypted e-mails via
SSL (TLS). To do so, you can choose either of two ways:• By SMTPS: fully encrypted via port 465.
The complete connection runs over TLS. The port is 465 by default but this value can bechanged in the Setup.
• Via port 25 or 587 using STARTTLS.
With this method the device first establishes a plain SMTP connection via port 25 andcontinues this connection following agreement and switchover to encryption.
The required process can be selected as follows: "Setup -> Advanced setup -> Application-> E-mail -> Server requires SSL" or under "Expert -> Application -> E-mail -> Server
requires SSL".
74

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Operation

TLS V1.0 (=SSL 3.1), V1.1 and V1.2 are supported. Older standards are not supported. The
encryption method is automatically agreed with the counterparty.
A certificate must be installed in order to be able to send encrypted e-mails. Thesecertificates can be obtained from your e-mail service provider. The following file formats
are supported:• *.CER: DER- or Base64-encoded certificate• *.CRT: DER- or Base64-encoded certificate• *.DER: DER-encoded certificate
The file name of the certificate may only contain the following characters: a..z, A..Z,
0..9, +, -, _, #, (, ), !
To establish an SSL connection, the device automatically selects the certificate that best
suits the counterparty from all the installed certificates. An error message is displayed if
the device does not have any of the required certificates.
When e-mail encryption is enabled, no e-mails can be sent if a valid certificate is notavailable or if the certificate has expired.

11.9.5

Notes on WebDAV encryption

In addition to sending unencrypted data to the WebDAV server, it is also possible to send
encrypted data via SSL (TLS). All data are sent in encrypted format via the SSL port of theexternal WebDAV server.
The complete connection runs over TLS. The port is 80 by default but this value can bechanged in the Setup. The procedure to be used can be selected as follows: "Setup ->Advanced setup -> Application -> WebDAV Client -> Enable -> Yes (SSL)" or under"Expert -> Application -> WebDAV Client -> Enable -> Yes (SSL)".
TLS V1.0 (=SSL 3.1), V1.1 and V1.2 are supported. Older standards are not supported. The
encryption method is automatically agreed with the counterparty.
A certificate must be installed in order to be able to send encrypted data. These certificates
can be obtained from your WebDAV server service provider. The following file formats aresupported:• *.CER: DER- or Base64-encoded certificate• *.CRT: DER- or Base64-encoded certificate• *.DER: DER-encoded certificate
The file name of the certificate may only contain the following characters: a..z, A..Z,
0..9, +, -, _, #, (, ), !
To establish an SSL connection, the device automatically selects the certificate that best
suits the counterparty from all the installed certificates. An error message is displayed if
the device does not have any of the required certificates.
When WebDAV client encryption is enabled, no data can be sent if a valid certificate
is not available or if the certificate has expired.

11.9.6

SSL certificates

Importing an SSL certificate
Installing a certificate via SD card or USB stick:Endress+Hauser

1.

Copy a certificate on a PC to an SD card or USB stick2.

Insert the SD card or USB stick into the device

3.

In the main menu, select "Operation -> SD card (or USB stick) -> Import SSL
certificate"4.

Select the required certificate from the list and follow the dialog on the display.

75

Operation

Memograph M, RSG45

Installing a certificate via the Web server:
1.

On the Web server, select "Data management --> Import SSL certificate"2.

Select the file3.

Start the process by clicking OK
Up to 3 certificates can be installed simultaneously.

Verifying the installed SSL certificates
The installed certificates can be verified in the main menu under "Diagnostics -> Device
information -> SSL certificates". The most important certificate information, e.g. subject
key ID, organization and validity period, are displayed in the parameter list.
Not all fields are completed on all the certificates. This is because the parties issuing
the certificates do not make all the information available.
Deleting an SSL certificate
In the main menu select the certificate to be deleted under "Diagnostics -> Device
information -> SSL certificate -> Certificate" and select "Yes" under "Delete certificate".
Period of validity of certificates
Certificates are valid for a defined period (valid from ... to …). The device checks thecertificate validity once a day or each time the device is rebooted. 14 days before thecertificate expires the device notifies the user daily (by e-mail, screen display, entry in
event log) that the certificate will expire shortly.
If the certificate has expired the alarm relay switches (if activated) and a message isdisplayed on the screen. An entry is also made in the event log. If a certificate is deleted all
errors related to this certificate are reset.

11.10 Show data logging
For the DIN rail version, see →  67
You can scroll through the saved measured values in the main menu under "Operation ->History". Turn the navigator clockwise or counterclockwise to scroll back and forth
between the measured value curves. Press the navigator to make other settings for thehistorical data display (e.g. scroll speed, time scaling or change display mode) or to quit thehistorical data function.
Version with stainless steel front and touchscreen:
The measured value curves can be scrolled back and forth with a horizontal "swiping"
movement.
The gray header on the screen and the symbol in the status bar indicate that
historical values are being displayed. In the instantaneous value display the color of
the header is blue.

11.10.1 Historical data: changing a group
It is possible to change the group to be displayed in the historical data under "Operation ->Change group" in the data history.

76

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Operation

11.10.2 Historical data: Scroll speed
It is possible to change the scroll speed in the historical data under "Operation -> Scroll
speed" in the data history.
The scroll speed can also be set via the soft key with the arrow symbol < or >. The speed
can be changed from < (slow) to <<<< (fast) by pressing the soft key repeatedly.

11.10.3 Historical data: Time scaling
It is possible to scale the displayed time range in the historical data under "Operation ->Time scaling" in the data history.
Notes:• "1:1" option: Every measured value is displayed.
• "1:n" option: Only every nth measured value is displayed (increases the displayed
time range).
• No interpolation is performed, nor is the mean value determined.
• If the value for "n" is large, this can result in extended loading times.
• Time scaling does not affect the process for storing the measured value.
• The time range displayed per screen for the currently set time scaling is also
displayed in the menu.

11.10.4 Historical data: Time range displayed
The displayed time range is shown in the historical data under "Operation -> Time range
displayed" in the data history. This tells the user which time range is displayed per screenin the standard memory cycle.
If the alarm cycle differs from the standard memory cycle, this is not taken into
consideration.

11.10.5 Historical data: Screenshot
The current measured value display can be saved as a bitmap to an SD card or USB stick in
the historical data under "Operation -> Screenshot".

11.10.6 Historical data: Change the display mode
For the DIN rail version, see →  67
It is possible to change the display mode of the active group in the historical data under"Operation -> Change display mode" in the data history.
The following display modes are possible: Curve, Curve in ranges, Waterfall, Waterfall in
ranges, and Circular chart.
The various display modes have no influence on the signal recording.

11.10.7 Historical data: Store text
A predefined text can be selected or a user-defined text can be saved in the historical data
under "Operation -> Store text". This text is assigned to a definable point in time.

11.11 Signal analysis
The analyses saved in the device are displayed in the main menu under "Operation ->Signal analysis".

Endress+Hauser

77

Operation

Memograph M, RSG45• Actual intermediate analysis:
The current (i.e. not yet completed) intermediate analysis can be displayed here.
• External analysis 1-4:
Current (i.e. not yet completed) external analyses can be displayed here.
• Actual day:
The current (i.e. not yet completed) daily analysis can be displayed here.
• Actual week:
The current (i.e. not yet completed) weekly analysis can be displayed here.
• Actual month:
The current (i.e. not yet completed) monthly analysis can be displayed here.
• Actual year:
The current (i.e. not yet completed) annual analysis can be displayed here.
• Search:
Search and display of analyses. Select which analyses the system should search for/display: Intermediate analysis, Daily analysis, Monthly analysis, Annual analysis.

11.12 Search in trace
In the main menu, the internal memory can be searched for events or times under"Operation -> Search in trace".
For the DIN rail version, see →  67
Search for events: The event logbook forms the basis for searches for events. To searchmore easily for certain events (e.g. setup changes), the search filter can be used to selectand search for the desired events. In the standard all events are shown. In the event list
displayed, it is possible to select an event and go directly to this point in the history (if stillin the memory).
Search for time: When searching for a time in the past, the user can enter a date and atime to specify when the system should start displaying historical data. Once the date/time
have been entered and confirmed, the display goes to the selected time in the active group.

11.13 Changing the display mode
The display mode of the active group can be changed in the main menu under "Operation-> Change display mode".
The following display modes are possible: Curve, Curve in ranges, Waterfall, Waterfall in
ranges, Bargraph, Digital display, Instrument display, Circular chart and Process screen.
The various display modes have no influence on the signal recording.

11.14 Store text
A predefined text can be selected, or a user-defined text can be saved, in the main menu
under "Operation -> Store text". This text is assigned to a definable point in time.

11.15 Printout
This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
The device settings, user administration data, event log, current measured values or ascreenshot of the measured value display can be printed out in the main menu under"Operation -> Printout".

78

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Operation

NOTICEDue to technical restrictions, the printout from the device is always in English whenusing the following operating languages: Polish, Russian, Swedish, Czech, Japanese,and Chinese.
Printout via PC:‣ The device settings or user administration can be saved in the set language in the formof an RTF file and printed out from the PC.
NOTICEDue to technical restrictions, the event log cannot be printed out from the device
when using the following operating languages: Polish, Russian, Swedish, Czech,
Japanese, and Chinese.
Printout via PC:‣ The event log can be printed out via the Field Data Manager (FDM) software.
Alternatively the event log can be saved as a CSV file and printed out from the PC.

11.16 Adjusting the brightness of the display
This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
You can adjust the brightness of the display in the main menu under "Operation -> Adjust
brightness":
Parameter

Possible settings

Description

Adjust brightness

0-100
Default: 80

Sets the brightness of the display

11.17 Limit values
This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
It is possible to change the limit values during operation in the main menu under"Operation -> Limits".
This function must be enabled beforehand in the main menu under "Expert ->Application -> Limits -> Change limits: outside of setup also".
Detailed description of the limit values: →  245

11.18 WebDAV client
The function of the WebDAV client is to transmit recorded data automatically to aconnected WebDAV server (e.g. NAS drive). The recorded data are sent to the connected
WebDAV server cyclically every 15 minutes. The generated files correspond to the files
that are automatically saved to the SD card.
The client is configured via "Setup -> Advanced setup -> Application -> WebDAV
Client". The settings under "Setup -> Advanced setup -> System -> External memory"
are also used, with the exception of the settings for the SD card (Memory build-up,
Warning and Relays). The memory is regarded as a stack memory.
Detailed description of the parameters: →  269
Note: With the WebDAV client, the data are transmitted to the WebDAV server inaccordance with the selection made in the .CSV or "Protected format".

11.18.1 Access to the WebDAV server via HTTP (HTML)
Address entry in browser: http://<ip-address>/webdav
Endress+Hauser

79

Operation

Memograph M, RSG45

The data are updated cyclically every 15 minutes. The data are automatically updated eachtime a user logs in.
Note: Leading zeros in IP addresses must not be entered (e.g. enter 192.168.1.11
instead of 192.168.001.011).
Administrator or service authentication is required. ID and password administration is
performed in the main menu under "Setup -> Advanced setup -> Communication ->Ethernet -> Configuration Web server -> Authentication".
ID default value: admin; Password: admin
Note: The password should be changed during commissioning!
If security is activated in accordance with "FDA 21 CFR Part 11", authentication as auser with administrator rights is required in order to establish a connection.
Note: For devices with a stainless steel front and touchscreen, the data are always
made available in "Protected format" via the WebDAV server.

11.19 Data analysis and visualization with the Field DataManager software (FDM) provided
The analysis software offers centralized data management with visualization for recorded
data.
This enables the data of a measuring point to be fully archived, e.g.:• Measured values• Diagnostic events• Protocols
The analysis software stores data in an SQL database. The database can be operated locallyor in a network (client/server). The free PostgreTMSQL database supplied on the DVD canbe installed and used.
For details, see the Operating Instructions on the analysis software DVD provided.

11.19.1 Structure/layout of a CSV file
The CSV files are comprised as follows:
File name (=serial number + Description
file number + configuration
number + date and start
time + data type)

Coding

H4000504428 0000000279
0000000185 2013-11-07
11-18-00 GROUP01.csv

Contains all the measured values of the group from thestarting time indicated in the file name. An individual CSV
file is created for each group.

ANSI

H4000504428 0000000279
0000000185 2013-11-07
11-30-00 ANALYSIS01.csv

Contains the signal analyses of the active channels fromthe starting time indicated in the file name. An individual
CSV file is created for every analysis (01 - 04).

ANSI

H4000504428 0000000279
2013-11-07 11-18-34
EVENTS.csv

Contains the event log from the starting time indicated in
the file name.

Unicode UTF-8(see the notes in
the following
section)Meaning of the values under "Status" and "Limit" when analyzing a group:
Status of the channel:
0: OK
1: Cable open circuit

80

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Operation

Status of the channel:
2: Input signal too high3: Input signal too low
4: Invalid measured value
6: Error value, i.e. not the calculated value (for mathematics if an input variable is invalid)
7: Sensor/input error
Bit 8: Not assigned
Bit 9: Alarm storage
Bit 10..13: Not assigned
Bit 14: Use error value
Bit 15: Not assigned

General status:
1: High speed storage is active
2: Additional hour for summer/normal time changeover
Note: A combination of 1 and 2 is also possible.

Status of the limit value ("Limit"):
0: OK, no limit value has been violated
Bit 0: Lower limit value
Bit 1: Upper limit value
Bit 2: Increasing gradient
Bit 4: Decreasing gradientNote: A combination is also possible.

11.19.2 Importing UTF-8-encoded CSV files into spreadsheets
You might encounter problems displaying information if importing UTF-8-encoded CSV
files directly into more recent versions of MS ExcelTM (2007 and higher).
Importing CSV data from the event logbook ("Events") into MS ExcelTM (version 2007
and higher):Endress+Hauser

1.

In the menu select "Data -> Get external data - From text"

2.

MS Office 365 and higher: In the menu select "Data -> From text/CSV"

3.

Select the CSV file4.

Follow the instructions in the wizard

5.

Select file origin "Unicode UTF-8"

81

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Memograph M, RSG45

12

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

The following section contains an overview of possible causes of errors to provide initialassistance during troubleshooting.

12.1

General troubleshooting

LWARNING
Danger! Electric voltage!
‣ Do not operate the device in an open condition for error diagnosis!
Display

Cause

Remedial action

No measured value display; no
LED litNo supply voltage connected

Check the device supply voltage.

Supply voltage is applied; device orpower unit is defective

Replace the power unit or device.

Diagnostic message is displayed

For a list of diagnostic messages, see the next section.

Dead pixels: Dead pixels refer to pixels on LCD and TFT displays that are defect due tothe technology or manufacturing techniques used. The TFT display used can have up
to 10 dead pixels (Class III as per ISO 13406-2). These dead pixels do not entitle theuser to a warranty claim.

12.2

Troubleshooting

The Diagnostics menu is used for the analysis of the device functions and offers
comprehensive assistance during troubleshooting. Always proceed as follows to locate thecause of device errors or alarms.
General troubleshooting procedure
1.

Open diagnosis list: lists the 30 most recent diagnostic messages. This can be used todetermine which errors are currently present and whether an error has repeatedly
occurred.

2.

Diagnosis of current measured values: Verify the input signals by displaying thecurrent or scaled measuring ranges. To verify calculations, call up calculated auxiliary
variables if necessary.

3.

Most errors can be rectified by performing steps 1 and 2. If the error persists follow
the troubleshooting instructions in the following sections.

4.

If this does not rectify the problem, contact the Service Department. Any time youcontact the Service Department please always have the error number and theinformation in the main menu under "Diagnostics -> Device information" (program
name, serial number etc.) to hand.

The contact data for your Endress+Hauser representative can be found on the Internet atwww.endress.com/worldwide.

12.2.1

Device error/alarm relay

One relay can be used as an alarm relay. If the device detects a system error (e.g. hardware
defect) or a malfunction (e.g. cable open circuit), the selected output/relay switches. The
alarm relay is assigned in the main menu under "Setup -> Advanced setup -> System ->Fault switching -> Relay x". Factory setting: Relay 1.
This "alarm relay" switches if "F"-type or "S"-type errors occur, i.e. "M"-type or "C"-type errors
do not switch the alarm relay.

82

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.3

Diagnostic information on the local display

The diagnostic message consists of a diagnostic code and a message text.
The diagnostic code is made up of the error category as per Namur NE 107 and themessage number.
Error category (letter in front of the message number)• F = Failure. A malfunction has been detected.
The measured value of the affected channel is no longer reliable. The cause of themalfunction is to be found in the measuring point. If a controller is connected, it should
be switched to manual mode. An alarm relay can be assigned to this error category in
the Advanced setup.
• M = Maintenance required. Action must be taken as soon as possible.
The device still measures correctly. Immediate measures are not necessary. Proper
maintenance efforts may prevent a possible malfunction in the future.
• S = Out of specification. The measuring point is being operated outside specifications.
Operation is still possible. There is the risk of increased wear, a shorter operating life orless accurate measurements. The cause of the problem is to be found outside themeasuring point.
• C = Function check. The device is in Service mode.
Diagnosticcode

Message text

Description

RemedyF100

Sensor/input error!

Sensor/input error!

Check connections and parameters

F101

Open circuit

Open circuit

Check connections

F105

Invalid value!

Measured value is invalid (when calculating -->NAN)

Check connections and process variables

F201

Device fault

Device error

Contact the Service Department

F261

Error: RAM

No access to RAM

Contact the Service Department

F261

Error: FlashNo access to flash

Contact the Service Department

F261

Error: SRAM

No access to SRAM

Contact the Service Department

F261

Analog card x is out oforder!

Hardware defect detected

Contact the Service Department, replace card

F261

HART card out of order!

Hardware defect detected

Contact the Service Department, replace card

F261

Power supply out of order!

Hardware defect detected

Contact the Service Department, replace power unit

F261

Digital card out of order!

Hardware defect detected

Contact the Service Department, replace card

F261

Fieldbus card out of order!

Hardware defect detected

Check contacts of Anybus card, contact the Service
Department

M262

Fieldbus module is obsolete. The installed fieldbus module is not approved
Please replace thefor this firmware version.
hardware!

Replace the hardware or downgrade the firmware (notrecommended).

M284

Firmware update

Firmware has been updated

No action required. Message can be acknowledged.

M290

Internal flash reaches theend of its lifetime. Please
replace device.

The internal flash memory is defective.

Replace device

F301

Error: Cannot load setup

Setup defective

Switch the device off and then on again, re-configure,contact the Service Department if necessary

M302

Setup restored from backup

Setup has been loaded from backup

Check setup

F303

Error: Device data

Device data defective

Contact the Service Department

M304

Backup: Device data

Device data defective. However it was possible
to continue working with the backup data.

Check settings (e.g. serial number)

F307

Error: Customer preset
value defective

Customer preset value defective

Endress+Hauser

83

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Memograph M, RSG45

Diagnosticcode

Message text

Description

F309

Error: Date/time is not set

Invalid date/time (e.g. internal battery is empty) Device was switched off too long. The date/time must
be set again. Battery might need to be replaced(contact the Service Department).

F310

Error: Cannot save setup

The setup could not be saved

Contact the Service Department

F311

Error: Device data

The device data could not be saved

Contact the Service Department

F312

Error: Calibration data
defective

The calibration data could not be saved

Contact the Service Department

F312

Analog card x is notcalibrated!

Analog card x is not calibrated! The device
works with default values, i.e. the measured
values may be inaccurate under certain
circumstances.

Contact the Service Department

M313

SRAM has been
defragmented

SRAM was defragmented after firmware update No action required. Message can be acknowledged.

F314

Error: Option code

Activation code is no longer correct (incorrect
serial number/program name). Option was
disabled and setup preset has been performed.

Enter new code

M315

No IP address could beobtained from the DHCP
server!

No IP address could be obtained from the DHCP
server!

Check the network cable

M316

Invalid MAC address!

No or incorrect MAC address

Contact the Service Department

M317

Battery voltage < 2.5 V.
Please replace battery!

F348

Firmware cannot be
updated:• Checksum incorrect• Firmware incompatible!

Firmware update has been aborted because thefirmware file is damaged or is not compatible
with this device

Contact the Service Department

M350

Measured value acquisitioninterrupted for calibration/
service work.

Measured value acquisition was interrupted/
reactivated for service/maintenance purposes.

No action required. Message can be acknowledged.

M351

RemedyBattery needs to be replaced (contact the Service
Department)

Measured value acquisition
restarted.

Causes include:• Calibration of inputs/outputs• Firmware update

The device is restarted.

The device is rebooting.

No action required. Message can be acknowledged.

Causes include:• Following a firmware update• Change to device options
F431

Error:Calibration

Calibration data missing

Contact the Service Department

M502

Device is locked!

Device is locked! The message appears when an
attempt is made to update the firmware, forexampleCheck lock per digital channel

F510

Setup was corrected.

The device has discovered that theconfiguration is no longer correct. All theparameters concerned have been reset to thefactory default settings.

Check the configuration of the device. If hardware has
been replaced, no other action is needed(recommendation: change the operating language sothat the error message no longer appears after the
next restart).

Possible causes:• Input cards have been removed or replaced byanother type
• An input card is no longer working correctly
A firmware update has caused compatibility
problems.
Note: This error message appears each time thedevice is restarted until at least one change has
been made to the configuration.
F510

84

User administration wascorrected

The device detected that the user
administration settings were no longer correct.
All the parameters concerned have been resetto the factory default settings.

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnosticcode

Message text

Description

RemedyM520

SMTP: Name could not be
resolved (DNS)!

Problem with name resolution (DNS).

Check the corresponding settings

SNTP: Name could not be
resolved (DNS)!

SNTP: time synchronization

F526• Support points not OK!
• Support points: x-value
exists more than once
• Upper and lower support
points are identical

Support points entered for the linearizationtable are not plausible.

M528

Setup is not compatible with An attempt was made to load a setup which is
this firmware
not compatible with this firmware (e.g. anotherdevice type)

Check whether the correct file has been selected.

M530

Cannot copy setup.

Replace the SD card or USB stick

SMTP: e-mailAn error occurred when a setup was loaded
from an SD card or USB stick

Check support points

Setup file defective?

An error occurred when a setup was saved to an
SD card or USB stick
F537

EtherNet/IP: IP address
conflict identified

The IP address configured for EtherNet/IP isalready being used by another device

Check the IP configuration and change it as necessary

F537

EtherNet/IP: IP
configuration not accepted
at all or in partAt least one setting for the IP address, subnet
mask and/or gateway is incorrect and has notbeen accepted.

Check the IP configuration and change it as necessary

S901

Input signal too small

Input signal too small

Check connections and parameters. Check connected
sensor/transmitter.

S902

Input signal too highInput signal too highCheck connections and parameters. Check connected
sensor/transmitter.

M905

Limit xLimit x has been violated

Note: Error number only occurs if e-mails are sent

M906

End limit x

Limit x no longer violated

Note: Error number only occurs if e-mails are sent

F907

Error DP flow

Error during DP flow calculation

F910

This software is not enabled The current firmware is not enabled for thisfor this device.
hardware

M913

DP Flow: outside ISO 5167!

Error during DP flow calculation

M914

DP Flow: density
calculation!

Error during DP flow calculation

M920

Too many messages thatneed to be acknowledged!

There are too many messages that need to beacknowledged. Another message could not be
added.

Acknowledge messages

M921

SD card x% full.

External memory is full

Replace SD card

M922

No cyclic value readout

The instantaneous values were not read out fora set time

M922

No cyclic transfer

The device was not read out via fieldbus for a
configurable time

Check the communication of the fieldbus. Check PLC.

M923

Error printing!

Various problems while printing, e.g.:• Printer spooler is full• Printer needs paper!
• Printer is not ready!
• Replace toner/ink!

Check printer status at the printer.

M924

Error accessing SD card!
Error accessing USB stick!
SD card is not or wrong
formatted!
USB stick is not or wrong
formatted!

Impossible to access the removable data
medium. Causes include:
Memory is larger than 32 GB

Check/replace removable data medium

SD card is write-protected!

SD card is write-protected!

M925

Endress+Hauser

Contact the Service Department

Invalid format (only FAT or FAT32 arepermitted)
Remove write protection

85

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Memograph M, RSG45

Diagnosticcode

Message text

Description

RemedyM927

Insufficient space free ondata storage medium!

An attempt was made to save to the SD card or
USB stick (setup, screenshot, etc.), but notenough free memory space is available.

Use other SD card/USB stick. Delete files that are nolonger needed from the SD card/USB stick

M927

Insufficient space free ondata storage medium!

An attempt was made to save to the WebDAV
server but not enough free memory space isavailable.

Use other WebDAV server. Delete files that are nolonger needed from the WebDAV server.

F929

File is damaged!

The file that should be loaded is damaged/
invalid (e.g. wrong checksum).

Create file again, use other storage medium.

This message can occur in connection with thefollowing actions, for instance:• Loading setup from SD card/USB stick• Firmware update• Load process screens
M940

E-mail could not be sent! (x) E-mail could not be sent!

Check settings/network connection

Optional: Error code (x) from server: e.g.:• 451: Requested action aborted: local
processing error• 554: Transaction failed. Possible reason: email was not sent as suspected of being
SPAM• 1: No free buffer• 2: No receiver specified• 451: Try again• 554: Use other e-mail provider

M941

No connection to the e-mailserver!

A connection to the e-mail server could not beestablished because:• The entered connection data are incorrect• The connection is lost

Check settings/network connection

M942

SMTP: Fault occurred (x).

An error occurred when sending an e-mail.
x= error code:
0: SMTP was switched off when the mail was
being sent
3: TCP/IP connection was denied
4: TCP/IP connection error
5: SMTP server denied
6: Error during authentication
7: Connection unexpectedly lost
8: Server responded with error code
9: Timeout
10: Internal protocol error

Check settings/network connection

M944

SMTP: authentication
failed!

M945

SNTP: Time was notsynchronized!

Time could not be synchronized via SNTP.

SNTP server 1 not
responding. Try server 2.

Time could not be synchronized via SNTP.

M946

Screenshot could not besaved (x)!

Screenshot could not be created.
Possible causes (x):0: Error when writing
1: Insufficient free space
2: Bitmap could not be created
3: SD card/USB stick not available or not yet
ready

Check/replace the SD card or USB stick

M947

Modem could not be
initialized! Check the cableand modem.

The connected modem could not be initialized
by the device.

Check the cable and modem.

M945

86

Check settings/network connection

Possible reasons:• SNTP server temporarily unavailable• Settings not correct

Possible reasons:• SNTP server temporarily unavailable• Settings not correct• Check settings• Check whether the error occurs often. If it does,choose another time server.

• Check settings• Check whether the error occurs often. If it does,choose another time server.

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnosticcode

Message text

Description

RemedyM950

Cannot load SSL certificate.

Cannot load SSL certificate. Cause:• Use a certificate with a valid file format• Import certificate to device again• Invalid file format• File is damaged
F951

SSL certificate '…' has
expired!

Certificates have an expiry date, i.e. they must
be renewed from time to time.

Install a new certificate

M952

SSL certificate '…' expireson ...!

The device warns the user shortly before thecertificate expires.

Install a new certificate

M953

x certificates have alreadybeen installed. Delete
certificates that are nolonger required.

The device can manage a maximum of 3 X.509
certificates.

Delete a certificate that is already installed and nolonger required

M954

SSL certificate not found:
key ID = …

Unable to establish an SSL connection as asuitable certificate is not installed.

Install a suitable certificate

M955

SSL connection denied!

M956

Incorrect password. Your
user account has been
locked!

Incorrect password. User account has been
locked!

Contact the administrator to unfreeze the account.

M956

Incorrect password. Your
user account has been
locked for 10 minutes!

An incorrect password was entered and theaccount is locked temporarily.

Wait until the temporary block has been disabled orcontact your administrator.

M957

Wet steam alarm

Warning for wet steam alarm

Check the application (pressure, temperature inputs)

M965

SMS could not be sent!

SMS could not be sent because:
Check connections and communication settings• The entered connection data are incorrect• There is no connection to the service provider

M971

No channels assigned tobatch x!

The batch functionality was switched on but nochannels were assigned to the batch.

Check group settings

M980

No connection to the
WebDAV server

A connection to the WebDAV server could not
be established because the entered connection
data are incorrect or the connection has beeninterrupted.

Check settings/network connection

M981

WebDAV: authentication
failed!

M982

WebDAV: directory or file
could not be created!

Configured directory path not available.

M983

WebDAV: Fault

An unassigned error has occurred. The error isdisplayed in English.

M984

No Ethernet connection.

The device is not connected by an Ethernet
cable.

M985

The test cannot be carriedout because data are
currently being copied by
WebDAV.

M988

Server certificate cannot beloaded. Invalid format.

The file must be Base64-encoded.
Format: X.509 certificate V3 incl. extension

Create the certificate again according to thespecifications

M989

Private key cannot beloaded. Invalid size/format.

The file must be Base64-encoded. Only RSA
keys with max. 2048 bits are supported.

Create the certificate again according to thespecifications

M990

Server certificate cannot be
installed.

General error. Unable to read or write to file.

Check the files on the USB stick and create again if
necessary. If the error persists, contact the Service
Department.

Endress+Hauser

Check settings
Create a directory manually in the WebDAV server

Establish cable connection.
Repeat later

87

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Memograph M, RSG45

HART® error messages
Diagnosticcode

Message text

Description

M490

Channel x: Max. 5 devices
Max. 5 HART® devices may be connected to themay be connected per
input
channel in Multidrop mode.

M960

Value uncertain/
communication faulty

M970

Multi-master collision

M986

Unable to read out selfcalibration: channel=x,
device address=y

M987

The device does not support The connected device was replaced during
self-calibration: channel=x, operation. This device does not support selfdevice address=ycalibration, however.

RemedyUse other channels

In the case of fieldbus systems: The status of thevalue is uncertain
In the case of HART®: The current value is usedinstead of the digital value• Check additional master in HART® network (e.g.
handheld)• Check master settings (secondary/primary)The device was unable to read out the necessary
data for determining the self-calibration.

12.4

Check the settings, check communication with the
HART device

Pending, current diagnostic messages

The diagnostic message that is currently active, the last diagnostic message and the lastdevice restart are displayed in the main menu under "Diagnostics -> Actual diagnostics","Diagnostics -> Last diagnostics" or under "Diagnostics -> Last restart".

12.5

Diagnosis list

The last 30 diagnostic messages are displayed in the main menu under "Diagnostics ->Diagnosis list" (messages with Fxxx, Sxxx or Mxxx-type error numbers).
The diagnosis list is designed as a ring memory, i.e. when the memory is full the oldest
messages are automatically overwritten (no message).
The following information is saved:• Error number• Error text
• Date/time

12.6

Event logbook

Events such as alarm set point infringement and power failure are displayed in the correcttime sequence. It can be found in the main menu under "Diagnostics -> Event logbook".
Individual events can be selected and details displayed.

12.7

Device information

Important device information, e.g. serial number, firmware version, device name, device
options, memory information, SSL certificates etc. are displayed in the main menu under"Diagnostics -> Device information" .
For further information open the online help on the device.

88

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.8

Diagnostics of measured values

Displays the current measured values in the main menu under "Diagnostics -> Measured
values". The input signals can be verified here by displaying the scaled and calculated
values. To verify calculations, call up calculated auxiliary variables if necessary.

12.9

Diagnostics of outputs

Displays the current states of the outputs (analog outputs, relays) in the main menu under"Diagnostics -> Outputs".

12.10 Simulation
Various functions/signals can be simulated for test purposes here.
NOTICE
Invoke simulation: for the simulation of the relays, see the main menu under"Diagnostics -> Simulation". For the simulation of the measured values, see the main
menu under "Expert -> Diagnostics -> Simulation".
Only the simulated values are recorded during simulation. The simulation is recorded in
the event logbook.
‣ Do not start simulation if measured value recording must not be interrupted!

12.10.1 Test barcode reader
This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
The function (e.g. character set) of the barcode reader can be tested in the main menu
under "Diagnostics -> Simulation -> Test barcode reader".
Only visible if a barcode reader is connected.

12.10.2 E-mail test
A test mail can be sent to the selected recipient in the main menu under "Diagnostics ->Simulation -> E-mail".
At least one e-mail address must be set beforehand.

12.10.3 Test WebDAV client
A test file can be sent to the selected WebDAV server in the main menu under"Diagnostics -> Simulation -> WebDAV Client".
The settings for the WebDAV server to be addressed must be set beforehand under"Setup -> Advanced setup -> Application -> WebDAV Client".

12.10.4 Test telealarm
The telealarm functionality can be tested in the main menu under "Diagnostics ->Simulation -> Test telealarm". During this test, alarms are simulated and triggered.
Only possible for the "Telealarm" device option.
For detailed descriptions of this device option, see the associated documentation.

Endress+Hauser

89

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Memograph M, RSG45

12.10.5 Test time synchronization/SNTP
Time synchronization (SNTP setting) can be tested in the main menu under "Diagnostics > Simulation -> SNTP".
SNTP must be enabled beforehand in the main menu under "Setup -> Advanced
setup -> System -> Date/time set-up -> SNTP".
Note: The test can take some time.

12.10.6 Test universal output
The active analog and pulse outputs can be tested in the main menu under "Diagnostics ->Simulation -> Universal output".

12.10.7 Relay test
The relay selected under "Diagnostics -> Simulation -> Relay x" can be switchedmanually in the main menu.

12.11 HART® diagnostics
Displays the device information and status of the connected HART® devices/sensors in themain menu under "Diagnostics -> HART".
Note: It can take several seconds until all the information regarding the device/sensor
is available!
Caution: Measured value acquisition slows down as additional information has to beread out.
For further information open the online help on the device.

12.12 PROFINET diagnostics (option)
Display PROFINET diagnostics information in the main menu under "Diagnostics ->PROFINET".

12.13 Diagnostics EtherNet/IP (option)
Display EtherNet/IP diagnostics information in the main menu under "Diagnostics ->EtherNet/IP".

12.14 Initializing the modem
Initializes the modem connected (to automatically answer calls). The modem must support
the complete AT command syntax.
• Set the baud rate in the main menu under "Setup -> Advanced setup ->Communication -> Serial interface" and select "RS232" as the interface type.
• Connect the modem to the RS232 interface of the device. For this purpose only use
the modem cable, which is available as an accessory.
A GSM modem can only be initialized if a SIM card is inserted and the PIN is enteredor the prompt to enter the PIN has been disabled.

90

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.15 GSM terminal
Information on the reception quality.
Only possible for the "Telealarm" device option.
For detailed descriptions of this device option, see the associated documentation.

12.16 Status telealarm
Information on the status of individual alarms.
Only possible for the "Telealarm" device option.
For detailed descriptions of this device option, see the associated documentation.

12.17 Resetting the measuring device
The device can be reset to the as-delivered state with a PRESET. This function should only
be performed by a service technician.
The function can be found in the main menu under "Expert -> System -> PRESET"PRESET is only visible under "Expert" once the service code has been entered.
Procedure for resetting the measuring device
The PRESET returns all parameters to the factory default setup! The internal memory
content is deleted!

‣ Save the setup and measured values on the USB stick or SD card. Then perform a
PRESET.
 The device is reset to the factory default settings.

12.18 Clear memory
The internal memory should be cleared after commissioning so that the analysis
software does not contain any unnecessary data.

12.19 Reset analysis
The analyses should be reset after commissioning so that the analysis software does
not contain any unnecessary data.

12.20 Firmware history
Overview of unit software history:

Endress+Hauser

Unit software
Version / date

Software changes

FDM analysis
software version

Version of OPC server

OperatingInstructions

V02.00.00 /08.2015

Original software

V01.03.00.00 andhigher

V5.00.03.00 and higher

BA01338R/09/01.
15

V2.01.00 /04.2016

Extendedfunctionality/bug
fixes

V01.03.01.00 andhigher

V5.00.03.00 and higher

BA01338R/09/02.
16

V2.01.05 /11.2016

Extendedfunctionality/bug
fixes

V01.03.01.01 andhigher

V5.00.03.00 and higher

BA01338R/09/03.
1691

Maintenance

Memograph M, RSG45

Unit software
Version / date

Software changes

FDM analysis
software version

Version of OPC server

OperatingInstructions

V2.02.00 /11.2017

Ethernet function
via USB

V1.04.00 andhigher

V5.00.04.00 and higher

BA01338R/09/04.
17

V2.04.00 /09.2018

DIN rail version,
Web server
extension,
Trustsens support

V1.04.02 andhigher

V5.00.04.01 and higher

BA01338R/09/05.
18

V2.04.05 /08.2021

Support for HTTPS
server; bugfixes

V1.04.02 andhigher

V5.00.04.01 and higher

BA01338R/09/06.
21

13

MaintenanceNo special maintenance work is required for the device.

13.1

Updating the device software ("firmware")Updating the device software ("firmware") via USB stick, SD card or Web server.
The function to update the firmware via the Web server must be enabled beforehand
under "Expert -> Communication -> Ethernet -> Configuration Web server".
There are two ways to update the firmware:• In the main menu under "Operation -> SD card or USB stick -> Update firmware"• In the Web server under "Data management -> Update firmware"
It is advisable to save the setup and measured values beforehand on the SD card or
USB stick.
The device software ("firmware") should only be updated by a service technician.
The device will restart following the firmware update.
If an older firmware version (< V2.04.00) is installed on the device, the internal
memory must then be cleared under "Expert -> System".
Only special, approved firmware versions may be installed for the "EtherNet/IP" and"PROFINET" options. For detailed descriptions of these device options, see theassociated documentation.

13.2

Instructions for enabling a software option

Various device options can be enabled via an activation code. Available device options canbe ordered as an accessory →  97. Once you place your order, you will receive
instructions on how to activate the option and a code which must be entered under "Mainmenu -> Expert -> System -> Device options -> Activation code".

13.3

Cleaning

The front of the housing can be cleaned with a clean dry or damp cloth.

92

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Repair14

Repair

14.1

General notes

Repairs that are not described in these Operating Instructions must only be carried out
directly by the manufacturer or by the service department.
Always quote the serial number of the device when ordering spare parts! Installation
instructions are included with the spare part.

14.2

Spare parts

Information on accessories and spare parts that are currently available for the productcan be found online at: www.endress.com/spareparts_consumables → access to
specific device information → enter serial number.
1

2
3
4

7

6
5
A0025589 17

Picture of spare parts, panel version

List of spare parts for panel version:

Endress+Hauser

Item No.

Description

Order No.

1

Power unit 24 V AC/DC for slot 6

XPR0011-NB

1Power unit 100-230 V AC (+/-10%) for slot 6

XPR0011-NA

2

Housing seal

XPR0011-A1

3

Digital card extension (8x digital inputs + 6x relays + 2x analog outputs)
for slot 5 (rear panel must also be ordered with the extension)

XPR0011-A7

4

Rear panel analog (incl. imprint)

XPR0011-A2

4

Rear panel analog + digital (incl. imprint)

XPR0011-A3

5

Terminal cover can be sealed for panel-mounted housing

XPR0011-A5

6

Analog card (4 channels) for slots 1-5

XPR0011-A6

6

HART® card (4 channels) for slots 1-5

XPR0011-A4

7

Housing fastening unit, short (1 pc)

71035184

93

Repair

Memograph M, RSG45

2
3

1
4

5
6
A0037149

 18

Picture of spare parts, DIN rail version

List of spare parts, DIN rail version:
Item No.

Description

Order No.

1

Power unit 24 V AC/DC incl. relay for slot 6

XPR0011-ND

1Power unit 100-230 V AC (+/-10%) incl. relay for slot 6

XPR0011-NC

2

Connection board, reverse side (DIN rail)

71412098

3

CPU card + software with interfaces for slot 0 (2-piece)

XPR0013-xxxxCx

4

Digital card extension (8x digital input + 6x relay + 2x analog output) for
slot 5

XPR0011-A7

5

Analog card (4 channels) for slots 1-5

XPR0011-A6

5

HART® card (4 channels) for slots 1-5

XPR0011-A4

6

Terminal cover can be sealed for DIN rail version

XPR0011-A8

General spare parts list:
Item No.

Description

Order No.

RS232/RS485 adapter set, DIN rail, 230 V AC, galvanic isolation +interface cable for PC/modem

RSG40A-S6

RS232/RS485 adapter set, DIN rail, 150 V AC, galvanic isolation +interface cable for PC/modem

RSG40A-S7"Industrial Grade" SD card, industry standard, 1 GB

71213190

Terminals:
Plug-in terminal, 3-pin for mains connection "N L PE" RM5.08 – orange
color at slot 671123475

3-pin terminal for power supply at slot 650078843

Plug-in terminal, 3-pin FKC2.5/3-ST-5.08 for relay 1 (changeover) at slot 71037408
6
Plug-in terminal, 4-pin FMC1.5/4-ST-3.5 for digital card extension slot 5(analog outputs)

9471037350

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

RepairItem No.

Description

Order No.

Plug-in terminal, 10-pin FMC1.5/10-ST-3.5 for digital card extension slot 71037351
5 (digital inputs)
Plug-in terminal, 4-pin FKC2.5/4-ST-5.08 for relay 2+3 on slot 6 or relay
7+8 / 9+10 / 11+12 on slot 571037410

Plug-in terminal, 6-pin FKC2.5/6-ST-5.08 for relay 4+5+6 at slot 671037411

Plug-in terminal, 9-pin FMC1.5/9-ST-3.5 for digital inputs at slot 671037363

Plug-in terminal, 6-pin FMC1.5/6-ST-3.5 for analog input at slot 1-5

51009211

Product structure for option retrofit
Item No.

Description

Order code

Option retrofit (please enter the serial number)

XPR0012-_ _ _ _

DIN rail version: If one of the two CPU cards is replaced/removed,
data may be lost and the time must be reset!

Software:Without software application
Mathematics
Tele-alarm + mathematics
Batch + mathematics
Wastewater + RSB + tele-alarm + mathematics
Energy software, water + steam + mathematics
Tele-alarm + energy software + water + steam + mathematics

XPR0012-A _ _ _XPR0012-B _ _ _XPR0012-C _ _ _XPR0012-D _ _ _XPR0012-E _ _ _XPR0012-F _ _ _XPR0012-G _ _ _Communication Master functionality:
NoneStandard + Modbus RTU/TCP master, max. 40 x analog

XPR0012-_ A _ _XPR0012-_ B _ _Communication Slave functionality:
NoneStandard + Modbus RTU/TCP slave, max. 40 x analog

XPR0012-_ _ A _XPR0012-_ _ B _Option:Standard

XPR0012-_ _ _ A

The software option can be enabled directly on the device. After ordering the option,
instructions are delivered with a code that must be entered.

14.3

ReturnThe requirements for safe device return can vary depending on the device type andnational legislation.
1.

Refer to the website for more information:
http://www.endress.com/support/return-material

2.

Return the device if repairs or a factory calibration are required, or if the wrong
device was ordered or delivered.

14.4

Disposal

14.4.1IT security

Observe the following instructions before disposal:

Endress+Hauser

1.

Clear data

2.

Reset the device

3.

Delete/change passwords
95

Repair

Memograph M, RSG45

4.

Delete user

5.

Carry out alternative or complementary measures to destroy the storage medium

14.4.2

Removing the measuring device

1.

Switch off the device

2.

Carry out the mounting and connection steps from the "Mounting the measuring
device" and "Connecting the measuring device" sections in reverse order. Observe thesafety instructions.

14.4.3

Disposing of the measuring device

If required by the Directive 2012/19/EU on waste electrical and electronic equipment(WEEE), the product is marked with the depicted symbol in order to minimize thedisposal of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste. Do not dispose of products bearing thismarking as unsorted municipal waste. Instead, return them to Endress+Hauser for
disposal under the applicable conditions.

96

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Accessories

15

Accessories
Always quote the serial number of the device when ordering accessories! Installation
instructions are provided with the accessory!

Various accessories, which can be ordered with the device or subsequently from Endress+Hauser, are available for the device. Detailed information on the order code in question isavailable from your local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of theEndress+Hauser website: www.endress.com.

15.1

Device-specific accessories

Description

Order No.

"Industrial Grade" SD card, industry standard, 1GB

71213190

Field Data Manager analysis software with SQL database support (1 x workstation
license, Professional version)

MS20-A1

OPC server software (full version on CD)

RXO20-11

Description

Order No.

Accessories for RXU10 data manager

RXU10- _ _Identifier:
Cable set RS232 for connection to PC or modem
USB - RS232 converter
Cable USB-A - USB-B, 1.8 m (5.9 ft)
Configuration software "FieldCare Device Setup" + USB cable

RXU10-B _RXU10-E _RXU10-F _RXU10-G _Description

Order No.

Field housing IP65 (for panel-mounted device)

RXU10-H _254 (10)320 (12.6)

320 (12.6)

A0024766 19

Endress+Hauser

Dimensions in mm (in)97

Accessories

Memograph M, RSG45

Description

Order No.

Desktop housing (for panel-mounted device), cable with Schuko plug
Desktop housing (for panel-mounted device), cable with US plug
Desktop housing (for panel-mounted device), cable with Swiss plug

RXU10-I _RXU10-J _RXU10-K _236 (9.29)

188 (7.4)

173 (6.81)

293.4 (11.6)

184 (7.24)
212.6 (8.37)

173 (6.81)

293.4 (11.6)

236 (9.29)
A0024767

 20

Dimensions in mm (in)Version:Standard
Neutral

RXU10- _ 1
RXU10- _ 2

Description

Order No.

Terminal cover can be sealed (for panel-mounted device)
An optional terminal cover is available to prevent tampering at the device terminals
and terminal temperature measurement.

XPR0011-A5

A0029023

98

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Accessories

Order No.

Terminal cover can be sealed (for DIN rail version)
An optional terminal cover is available to prevent tampering at the device terminals
and terminal temperature measurement.

XPR0011-A8

134 (5.28)

Description

51 (

2)

134

8)
(5.2

A0046633

Endress+Hauser

99

Technical data

Measuring principle

Memograph M, RSG45

16

Technical data

16.1

Function and system design

Electronic acquisition, display, recording, analysis, remote transmission and archiving of
analog and digital input signals as well as calculated values.
Panel version: Device with display and operating keys for installation in a panel or control
cabinet door. There is also the option of operating it in a desktop housing or field housing.
Panel version with stainless steel front: Device with touch screen (no operating keys) for
installation in a panel or a cabinet door. There is also the option of operating it in adesktop housing or field housing.
DIN rail version: Device without a display or operating keys for mounting on a DIN rail.

Measuring system

Multichannel data recording system with multicolor TFT display (order option,
178 mm (7 in) screen size), internal memory, external memory (SD card and USB stick),galvanically isolated universal inputs (U, I, TC, RTD, pulse, frequency), HART® inputs,
digital inputs, transmitter power supply, limit relays, digital and analog outputs,
communication interfaces (USB, Ethernet, RS232/485), optionally available with Modbus,
Profibus DP or PROFINET I/O or EtherNet/IP.
An Essential Version of the Field Data Manager (FDM) software is included for SQLsupported data analysis at the PC.
The number of inputs available in the basic device can be individually increased usinga maximum of 5 plug-in cards. The device supplies power directly to connected twowire transmitters. The device is configured and operated via the navigator (jog/shuttledial) or by touchscreen (optional) using the integrated Web server and a PC, an
external USB keyboard or mouse or with the FieldCare / DeviceCare configuration
software. Online help supports the user during local operation.
Ex version:• The hazardous area version (Ex version) is only available in conjunction with thestainless steel front and touch control.
• In this version, the SD card is integrated in the device and cannot be removed. The
card can be read out using the Field Data Manager (FDM) software supplied via USB
or Ethernet or via WebDAV.

Application packages /software options

In the standard version, the Advanced Data Manager has a variety of functions, including
an end-to-end safety concept to meet the requirements of FDA 21 CFR Part 11. The
following application packages are available to help users meet the requirements of theirapplications and save time:• Mathematics• Telealarm• Batch management• Wastewater + RSB (rain spillway basin)• Energy calculation
The application packages contain the standard functions and the specific package
functions. The individual packages can be largely combined as the user requires. The
application packages can also be activated retroactively by entering the activation code.

100

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Technical data

Standard functions• Signal analysis: external, 1 min to 12 h, day, week, month, year
• Web server• User administration compliant with FDA 21 CFR Part 11• Event log/audit trail• Process screen• Operation time counter• Text entry/comments• Change language• Time synchronization• Linearization• Access protection through release code
• E-mail notification in event of alarms and limit violation• Encrypted e-mail transmission via SSL (TLS)• Operation via external USB keyboard and mouse• External USB or network printerMathematics
With the mathematics package, measured values of the inputs or the results of other mathchannels can be linked mathematically. A formula with up to 200 characters can becreated using a formula editor. Once entered, the user can then check the plausibility of
the formula.
Functions:• 12 math channels• Mathematics functions via formula editor• Basic arithmetic operations, relational operators, logic operations and functions
Telealarm software
The Telealarm software facilitates user mobility, allowing users to respond to events while
they are on the road. E-mails or SMS messages triggered by process alarms or otherimportant process events can be sent to several recipients simultaneously or automaticallyforwarded to a recipient/destination. Messages can be confirmed, relays controlled
remotely and current values queried by cellular phone. The Advanced Data Manager with
GSM (GPRS) or Ethernet is ideal both for environmental applications to monitor unstaffed
outstations, and for tank monitoring applications.
The Telealarm software contains the mathematics package.
Functions:• Advanced SMS/e-mail notification in the event of an alarm• Instantaneous values queried by cellular phone• Remote relay switching• Alarm confirmation by SMS
Batch software
Batch management allows users to reliably record and visualize discontinuous processes.
User-definable or externally controlled analysis intervals are possible for up to four
batches simultaneously. Batches are assigned batch-specific values and the measured data,
the start, end and duration of every batch, along with the current batch status, aredisplayed on the device and in the Field Data Manager software. At the end of the batch,batch information is automatically printed out directly at the device (USB or network
printer) or is printed out via a PC with the Field Data Manager software.
The batch software contains the mathematics package.

Endress+Hauser

101

Technical data

Memograph M, RSG45

Functions:• Batch report for 4 batches simultaneously• USB barcode reader• Automatic batch printout• Preset counter
Wastewater + RSB (rain spillway basin)
The water/wastewater software supports operations monitoring of the water/wastewater
sewage network to obtain information about the quality and efficiency of the plant. The
daily, weekly, monthly and yearly maximum and minimum value is determined per
quantity channel. Infiltration water recording and the monitoring of rain spillway basins
for reservoir and overflow events are also functions of this software option.
The water/wastewater software contains the mathematics package and the telealarm
software.
Functions:• Rain spillway basin (reservoir/overflow)• Highest and lowest values for quantities• Highest and lowest values from ¼-hourly averages• Determination of infiltration water
Energy package (water + steam)The energy package allows users to calculate the mass and energy flow in water and steam
applications on the basis of the flow, pressure and temperature (or temperature
differential). Furthermore, energy calculations are also possible using glycol-based
refrigerant media.
By balancing the results against one another or by linking the results to other input
variables (e.g. gas flow, electr. energy), users can calculate overall balances, efficiency
levels etc. These values are important indicators for the quality of the process and form thebasis for process optimization and maintenance.
The internationally recognized standard IAPWS-IF 97 is used to calculate thethermodynamic state variables of water and steam.
In the energy software, it is also possible to compensate differential pressure flow
measurement ("DP-Flow"). The calculation of flow based on the differential pressure
method is a special form of flow measurement. Volumes or mass flow rates that are
determined using the DP method require specific correction. By solving the calculation
equations listed in the standard in an iterative manner, highly accurate results for DP flow
measurements can be achieved. The measurement (orifice plate, nozzle, Venturi pipe) is
performed in accordance with ISO5167. Flow measurement based on the dynamic
pressure method uses the interrelation between differential pressure and flow.
The energy package contains the mathematics package.
Additional functions:• 12 math channels(Channels 1-8: energy-specific formulas and formula editor, channels 9-12: formula
editor)• Heat quantity + mass calculation for water and steam applications• Efficiency calculation
TrustSens Calibration Monitoring
Available in conjunction with iTHERM TrustSens TM371 / TM372.

102

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Technical data

Application package :• Up to 20 iTHERM TrustSens TM371 / TM372 can be monitored via the HART interface• Self-calibration data displayed on screen or via the Web server• Generation of a calibration history• Creation of a calibration protocol as an RTF file directly at the RSG45• Evaluation, analysis and further processing of the calibration data using "Field DataManager" (FDM) analysis software
Dependability

Reliability
Depending on the device version, the mean time between failures (MTBF) is between 52
years and 16 years (calculated based on SN29500 standard at 40°C)
Maintainability
Battery-backed time and data memory. It is advisable to have the backup battery replaced
by a service technician after 10 years.
Real time clock (RTC)• Automatic or manual summer time changeover• Battery buffer. It is advisable to have the backup battery replaced by a service technician
after 10 years.
• Drift: <10 min./year.
• Time synchronization possible via SNTP or via digital input.
Standard diagnostic functions as per Namur NE 107
The diagnostic code is made up of the error category as per Namur NE 107 and themessage number.
• Cable open circuit, short-circuit• Incorrect wiring• Internal device errors• Overrange/underrange detection• Ambient temperature out-of-range detection
Device error/alarm relay
One relay can be used as an alarm relay. If the device detects a system error (e.g. hardware
defect) or a fault (e.g. cable open circuit), the selected relay switches.
This "alarm relay" switches if the device status is "F" (Failure). If the device status is "M"(Maintenance required), the alarm relay does not switch.
SafetyRecorded data are saved in a tamper-proof format and can be exported and archived withmanipulation protection using the Field Data Manager software.

16.2
Measured variables

Input

Analog universal inputs
Standard version without universal inputs. Optional multifunction cards (slot 1-5) with 4
universal inputs (4/8/12/16/20) each.
You are free to choose between the following measured variables for each universal input:
U, I, RTD, TC, pulse input or frequency input.
Integration of input variable for totalization e.g. flow (m3/h) in quantity (m3).

Endress+Hauser

103

Technical data

Memograph M, RSG45

HART® inputs
Standard version without HART® inputs. Optional HART® input cards (slot 1-5) with 4
inputs (4/8/12/16/20) each.
Both the digital HART® values and the 4 to 20 mA signal can be evaluated at every input.
The 4 HART® values (PV, SV, TV, QV) of a sensor can be evaluated and the analog HART®
value (PV) can be measured via the digital HART® signal. Up to 40 digital HART® values
can be recorded in total. It is possible to access the HART® sensor in the field from a PC
tool (e.g. FieldCare). In this way, the sensor can be configured from the control room andthe status information of the sensor can be analyzed/displayed. The Memograph M acts asa HART® Gateway.
Access to the connected sensors is only possible if the device is connected by Ethernet.
Port 5094 must be open in the firewall.
Digital inputs
Standard version: 6 digital inputs
Optional digital card (slot 5): 8 additional digital inputs, 6 additional relays and 2 analog
outputs
Mathematics channels
12 math channels (optional). Mathematics functions can be freely edited via a formula
editor.
Integration of calculated values e.g. for totalization.
Limit values
60 limit values (individual channel assignment)
Calculated process variables
The values of the universal and HART® inputs can be used to perform calculations in themath channels.
The results of the math channels can also be used for calculations in other math channels.
Measuring range

According to IEC 60873-1: An additional display error of ±1 digit is permitted for every
measured value.

User-definable measuring ranges per universal input of the multifunction card:
Measuredvariable

Measuring range

Maximum measured error ofmeasuring range (oMR),
temperature drift

Input
resistance

Current (I)

0 to 20 mA; 0 to 20 mA quadratic
0 to 5 mA
4 to 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA quadratic±20 mA
Overrange: up to 22 mA or -22 mA±0.1% oMR
Temperature drift: ±0.01%/K oMR

Load: 50 Ω
±1 Ω

Voltage (U)>1 V

0 to 10 V; 0 to 10 V quadratic
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V; 1 to 5 V quadratic
±10 V
±30 V

±0.1% oMR
Temperature drift: ±0.01%/K oMR≥1 MΩ

Voltage (U)≤1 V

0 to 1 V; 0 to 1 V quadratic±1 V±150 mV±0.1% oMR
Temperature drift: ±0.01%/K oMR≥2.5 MΩ

104

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Measuredvariable

Technical data

Measuring range

Maximum measured error ofmeasuring range (oMR),
temperature drift

Resistance
Pt100: -200 to 850 °C (-328 to 1562 °F) (IEC 60751:2008, α=0.00385)
thermometer Pt100: -200 to 510 °C (-328 to 950 °F) (JIS C 1604:1984, α=0.003916)(RTD)
Pt100: -200 to 850 °C (-328 to 1562 °F) (GOST 6651-94, α=0.00391)
Pt500: -200 to 850 °C (-328 to 1562 °F) (IEC 60751:2008, α=0.00385)
Pt500: -200 to 510 °C (-328 to 950 °F) (JIS C 1604:1984, α=0.003916)
Pt1000: -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F) (IEC 60751:2008, α=0.00385)
Pt1000: -200 to 510 °C (-328 to 950 °F) (JIS C 1604:1984, α=0.003916)

4-wire: ±0.1% oMR
3-wire: ±(0.1% oMR + 0.8 K)
2-wire: ±(0.1% oMR + 1.5 K)
Temperature drift: ±0.01%/K oMR

Cu50: -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F) (GOST 6651-94, α=4260)
Cu50: -200 to 200 °C (-328 to 392 °F) (GOST 6651-94, α=4280)
Pt50: -200 to 1100 °C (-328 to 2012 °F) (GOST 6651-94, α=0.00391)
Cu100: -200 to 200 °C (-328 to 392 °F) (GOST 6651-94, α=4280)

4-wire: ±0.2% oMR
3-wire: ±(0.2% oMR + 0.8 K)
2-wire: ±(0.2% oMR + 1.5 K)
Temperature drift: ±0.02%/K oMR

Pt46: -200 to 1100 °C (-328 to 2012 °F) (GOST 6651-94, α=0.00391)
Cu53: -200 to 200 °C (-328 to 392 °F) (GOST 6651-94, α=4280)

4-wire: ±0.3% oMR
3-wire: ±(0.3% oMR + 0.8 K)
2-wire: ±(0.3% oMR + 1.5 K)
Temperature drift: ±0.02%/K oMR

Thermocoupl Type J (Fe-CuNi): -210 to 1200 °C (-346 to 2192 °F) (IEC 60584:2013)
es (TC)Type K (NiCr-Ni): -270 to 1300 °C (-454 to 2372 °F) (IEC 60584:2013)
Type L (NiCr-CuNi): -200 to 800 °C (-328 to 1472 °F) (GOST R8.585:2001)
Type L (Fe-CuNi): -200 to 900 °C (-328 to 1652 °F) (DIN 43710-1985)
Type N (NiCrSi-NiSi): -270 to 1300 °C (-454 to 2372 °F) (IEC 60584:2013)
Type T (Cu-CuNi): -270 to 400 °C (-454 to 752 °F) (IEC 60584:2013)
Type A (W5Re-W20Re): 0 to 2500 °C (32 to 4532 °F) (ASTME 988-96)
Type B (Pt30Rh-Pt6Rh): 42 to 1820 °C (107.6 to 3308 °F) (IEC 60584:2013)
Type C (W5Re-W26Re): 0 to 2315 °C (32 to 4199 °F) (ASTME 988-96)
Type D (W3Re-W25Re): 0 to 2315 °C (32 to 4199 °F) (ASTME 988-96)
Type R (Pt13Rh-Pt): -50 to 1768 °C (-58 to 3214 °F) (IEC 60584:2013)
Type S (Pt10Rh-Pt): -50 to 1768 °C (-58 to 3214 °F) (IEC 60584:2013)
Pulse input(I) 1)

Min. pulse length 40 μs, max. 12.5 kHz; 0 to 7 mA = LOW; 13 to 20 mA = HIGH

Frequency
input (I) 1)

0 to 10 kHz, overrange: up to 12.5 kHz; 0 to 7 mA = LOW; 13 to 20 mA = HIGH

1)

Input
resistance±0.1% oMR from -100 °C (-148 °F)±0.1% oMR from -130 °C (-202 °F)±0.1% oMR from -100 °C (-148 °F)±0.1% oMR from -100 °C (-148 °F)±0.1% oMR from -100 °C (-148 °F)±0.1% oMR from -200 °C (-328 °F)
Temperature drift: ±0.01%/K oMR≥1 MΩ±0.15% oMR from 500 °C (932 °F)±0.15% oMR from 600 °C (1112 °F)±0.15% oMR from 500 °C (932 °F)±0.15% oMR from 500 °C (932 °F)±0.15% oMR from 100 °C (212 °F)±0.15% oMR from 100 °C (212 °F)
Temperature drift: ±0.01%/K oMR≥1 MΩ

Load: 50 Ω
±1 Ω
±0.02% @ f <100 Hz of reading±0.01% @ f ≥100 Hz of reading
Temperature drift: 0.01% of
measured value over the entire
temperature range

If a universal input is used as a frequency or pulse input, a series resistor must be used in series connection with the voltage source. Example: 1.2kΩ series resistor at 24 V

Current measuring range of the HART® card:
Measuredvariable

Measuring range

Maximum measured error ofmeasuring range (oMR),
temperature drift

Input
impedance

Current (I)4 to 20 mA
Overrange: up to 22 mA±0.1% oMR
Temperature drift: ±0.01%/K oMR

Load: 10 Ω
±1 ΩEndress+Hauser

105

Technical data

Memograph M, RSG45

Maximum load and additional input parameters of the multifunction cards
Limit values for input voltage and current as well as cable open circuit detection/line influence/temperature compensation:
Measured variable

Limit values (steady-state, without
destroying input)

Cable open circuit detection/line influence/temperature compensation

Current (I)Maximum permitted input voltage: 2.5 V
Maximum permitted input current: 50 mA

4 to 20 mA range with disengageable cable open circuit monitoring to NAMUR
NE43. The following error ranges apply when NAMUR NE43 monitoring isswitched on:≤3.8 mA: underrange≥20.5 mA: overrange≤ 3.6 mA or ≥ 21.0 mA: open circuit (display shows: – – – –)Pulse, frequency (I)Maximum permitted input voltage: 2.5 V
Maximum permitted input current: 50 mA

No cable open circuit monitoring

Voltage (U) >1 V

Maximum permitted input voltage: 35 V

1 to 5 V range with disengageable cable open circuit monitoring:<0.8 V or >5.2 V: cable open circuit (display shows: - - - -)Voltage (U) ≤1 V

Maximum permitted input voltage: 24 V

Resistance
Measuring current: ≤1 mA
thermometer (RTD)

Maximum barrier resistance (or line resistance):
4-wire: max. 200 Ω; 3-wire: max. 40 Ω
Maximum influence of barrier resistance (or line resistance) for Pt100, Pt500
and Pt1000: 4-wire: 2 ppm/Ω, 3-wire: 20 ppm/Ω
Maximum influence of barrier resistance (or line resistance) for Pt46, Pt50,
Cu50, Cu53, Cu100 and Cu500: 4-wire: 6 ppm/Ω, 3-wire: 60 ppm/Ω
Cable open circuit monitoring if any connection is interrupted.

Thermocouples (TC) Maximum permitted input voltage: 24 V

Influence of line resistance: <0.001%/Ω
Error, internal temperature compensation: ≤ 2 K

Maximum load and additional input parameters of the HART® cards
Limit values for input voltage and current as well as cable open circuit detection:
Measured variable

Limit values (steady-state, without
destroying input)

Cable open circuit detection

Current (I)Maximum permitted input voltage: 0.5 V
Maximum permitted input current: 50 mA

4 to 20 mA range with disengageable cable open circuit monitoring to NAMUR
NE43. The following error ranges apply when NAMUR NE43 monitoring isswitched on:≤3.8 mA: underrange≥20.5 mA: overrange≤ 3.6 mA or ≥ 21.0 mA: open circuit (display shows: – – – –)Scan rate
Current/voltage/pulse/frequency input: 100 ms per channel
Thermocouples and resistance thermometers: 1 s per channel
Data storage / save cycle
Choose from the following for the memory cycle: off / 100 ms / 1s / 2s / 3s / 4s / 5s /10s / 15s / 20s / 30s / 1min / 2min / 3min / 4min / 5min / 10min / 15min / 30min / 1h
Highspeed storage (100 ms) can be selected for up to 8 channels in Group 1 only.
Highspeed storage is not available in the energy package (option).

106

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Technical data

Typical logging duration
Prerequisites for following tables:• No limit value violation / integration• Digital input not used
• Signal analysis 1: off, 2: day, 3: month, 4: year
• No active mathematics channels
Frequent entries in the event log reduce the memory availability!
256 MB internal memory:
AnaloginputsChannels in groups

1

Storage cycle (weeks, days, hours)
5 min

1 min

30 s

10 s

1s

1/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0

1796, 6, 13

362, 5, 17

181, 4, 9

60, 4, 3

6, 0, 104

4/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0

1319, 2, 23

267, 5, 17

134, 1, 2

44, 5, 10

4, 3, 88

4/4/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0

661, 4, 3

133, 6, 21

67, 0, 16

22, 2, 17

2, 1, 1612

4/4/4/0/0/0/0/0/0/0441, 3, 8

89, 2, 944, 5, 3

14, 6, 11

1, 3, 1020

4/4/4/4/4/0/0/0/0/0

265, 0, 15

53, 4, 7

26, 5, 21

8, 6, 160, 6, 640

4/4/4/4/4/4/4/4/4/4

132, 4, 8

26, 5, 16

13, 2, 23

4, 3, 80, 3, 3External memory, 1 GB SD card:
AnaloginputsChannels in groups

1

Storage cycle (weeks, days, hours)
5 min

1 min

30 s

10 s

1s

1/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0

12825, 5, 20

2580, 4, 18

1291, 2, 5

430, 4, 14

43, 0, 12

4

4/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0

8672, 5, 12

1749, 6, 13

875, 6, 13

292, 1, 8

29, 1, 148

4/4/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0

4343, 1, 1

875, 1, 17

438, 0, 6

146, 0, 17

14, 4, 7

12

4/4/4/0/0/0/0/0/0/0

2896, 6, 13

583, 3, 21

292, 0, 6

97, 2, 20

9, 5, 420

4/4/4/4/4/0/0/0/0/0

1738, 6, 4

350, 1, 3

175, 1, 14

58, 3, 2

5, 5, 2240

4/4/4/4/4/4/4/4/4/4

869, 5, 0

175, 0, 15

87, 4, 729, 1, 13

2, 6, 11

The available storage capacity of the internal and external memory can be displayedin the main menu under "Diagnostics → Device information → Memory
information". The storage capacity depends on the specific device set-up.
Converter resolution
24 bitTotalization
The interim, daily, weekly, monthly and yearly value and the total value can be determined(15-digit, 64 bit).
Analysis
Recording of quantity/operating time (standard function), also a min/max/mediananalysis within the set time frame.
Digital inputs

Endress+Hauser

Input level

Logical "0" (corresponds to -3 to +5 V), activation with logical "1" (corresponds to+12 to +30 V)

Input frequency

max. 25 Hz

107

Technical data

Memograph M, RSG45

Pulse length

Min. 20 ms (pulse counter)

Pulse length

Min. 100 ms (control input, messages, operating time)

Input current

max. 2 mA

Input voltage

Max. 30 V

Selectable functions• Functions of the digital input: control input, ON/OFF event, pulse counter (15-digit, 64bit), operational time, event+operation time, quantity from time, Profibus DP,
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET.
• Functions of the control input: start recording, screensaver on, lock setup, timesynchronization, change group, limit value monitoring on/off, individual LV on/off,block keyboard/navigator, start/stop analysis.
Additionally for the batch software option: reset batch number, batch limit values on/
off.

16.3
Auxiliary voltage output

Analog and pulse outputs

Output

The auxiliary voltage output can be used for loop power supply or to control the digital
inputs. The auxiliary voltage is short-circuit proof and galvanically isolated.
Output voltage

24 VDC ±15%Output current

Max. 250 mA

NumberOptional digital card (slot 5): 2 analog outputs which can be operated as current or pulse
outputs.
Analog output (current output)
Output current: 0/4 to 20 mA with 10% overrange
Max. output voltage: approx. 16 V
Accuracy: ≤0.1% of end of range value
Temperature drift: ≤0.015%/K of end of range value
Resolution: 13 Bit
Load: 0 to 500 Ω
Error signal as per NAMUR NE43: 3.6 mA or 21 mA can be configured
Digital output (pulse output)
Output voltage:≤5 V corresponds to LOW≥12 V corresponds to HIGH
Short-circuit proof (maximum 25 mA)
Speed: max. 1000 pulses/s
Pulse width: 0.5 to 1000 ms
The pulse pause is at least as long as the pulse width.

108

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Technical data

Load: ≥1 kΩ
Relay outputs

A mix of low voltage (230 V) and safety extra low voltage (SELV circuits) is not permitted
at the connections of the relay contacts.
Alarm relay
1 alarm relay with changeover contact.
Standard relay
5 relays with NO contact, e.g. for limit value messages (can be configured as NC contact).
Optional relays
Optional digital card (slot 5): 6 additional relays with NO contact e.g. for limit value alarms(can be configured as an NC contact).
Relay switching capacity• Max. relay switching capacity: 3 A @ 30 V DC
• Max. relay switching capacity: 3 A @ 250 V AC
• Min. switching load: 300 mW
Switching cycles>105

Galvanic isolation

All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated from each other and designed for thefollowing test voltages:
Relay

DigitalinAnalog Analog Ethern RS232/
in/
out
et
RS485
HART®

USB

Auxiliary voltage output

Relay

500
VDC

2 kVDC

2 kVDC

2 kVDC

2 kVDC

2 kVDC

2 kVDC

2 kVDC

Digital in

2 kVDC

500
VDC
but: 1)

500
VDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

500 VDC

500 VDC

500 VDC

Analog2 kVDC
in/HART®

500
VDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

500 VDC

500 VDC

500 VDC

Analogout

2 kVDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

500 VDC

500 VDC

500 VDC

Ethernet

2 kVDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

-

500 VDC

500 VDC

500 VDC

RS232/RS485

2 kVDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

-

500 VDC

500 VDCUSB

2 kVDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

500 VDC

Galvanicall 500 VDC
yconnected

Auxiliary
voltage
output2 kVDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

500
VDC

500 VDC

500 VDC1)

Endress+Hauser-

Test voltage applies between inputs on power unit (terminals D11 to D61) to inputs on optional digital
card (terminals D71 to DE1). The inputs are galvanically connected on the same plug-in connector.

109

Technical data

Cable specification

Memograph M, RSG45

Cable specification, spring terminals
All connections on the rear of the device are designed as pluggable screw or spring
terminal blocks with reverse polarity protection. This makes the connection very quick andeasy. The spring terminals are unlocked with a slotted screwdriver (size 0).
Please note the following when connecting:• Wire cross-section, auxiliary voltage output, digital I/O and analog I/O: max. 1.5 mm2(14 AWG) (spring terminals)• Wire cross-section, mains: max. 2.5 mm2 (13 AWG) (screw terminals)• Wire cross-section, relays: max. 2.5 mm2 (13 AWG) (spring terminals)• Stripping length: 10 mm (0.39 in)
No ferrules must be used when connecting flexible wires to spring terminals.
Shielding and grounding
Optimum electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) can only be guaranteed if the systemcomponents and, in particular, the lines - both sensor lines and communication lines - areshielded and the shield forms as complete a cover as possible. A shielded line must be used
for sensor lines that are longer than 30 m. A shield coverage of 90% is ideal. In addition,
make sure not to cross sensor lines and communication lines when routing them. Connect
the shield as often as possible to the reference ground to ensure optimum EMC protection
for the different communication protocols and the connected sensors.
To comply with requirements, three different types of shielding are possible:• Shielding at both ends
• Shielding at one end on the supply side with capacitance termination at the device• Shielding at one end on the supply side
Experience shows that the best results with regard to EMC are achieved in most cases ininstallations with one-sided shielding on the supply side (without capacitance termination
at the device). Appropriate internal device wiring measures must be taken to allow
unrestricted operation when EMC interference is present. These measures have beentaken into account for this device. Operation in the event of disturbance variables as per
NAMUR NE21 is thus guaranteed.
Where applicable, national installation regulations and guidelines must be observed
during the installation! Where there are large differences in potential between theindividual grounding points, only one point of the shielding is connected directly with thereference ground.
If the shielding of the cable is grounded at more than one point in systems without
potential matching, mains frequency equalizing currents can occur. These can damage
the signal cable or significantly impact signal transmission. In such cases the shieldingof the signal cable is to be grounded on one side only, i.e. it may not be connected to
the ground terminal of the housing. The shield that is not connected should be
insulated!

16.4

Power supply

Connections

110

Endress+Hauser

24V
Out

+

D11
D21
D31
D41
D51
D61
GND1

R52

R61

R62

R41

R42

R51

R21

R22

R31

R32

R12

R11

R13

Technical data

L/+
N/PE

Memograph M, RSG45

RK

5
4

RL

G6

.

.
…

Ch16
…

G1

C6

.

.
…

…
…

.

.
…

86

.

46

Ch4

.
…

Ch8

81

…

B6
76
36

41

.

.
…

.

.
…

.

.
…

…
…
…

Ch3

Ch2

C1

Ch12

F6

.

.
…

…

F1

E6
A6

B1
Ch7

71

66
26

56
16

31

…

.

.
…

…

.

.
…

…

.

.
…

A1
61
21

.
…

Ch1

.

.
…

Ch5

Ch6

96

…

.
…

…

.

51

.

11

…

91

Ch9

Ch10

Ch11

.

E1

D6

D1

…

Ch14

Ch15

RH

RI

RJ

…

.
…

RG

RD

RE

RF

.
…

RA

RB

RC

Ch13

.

O15
O16
O25
O26

D71
D81
D91
DA1
DB1
DC1
DD1
DE1
GND2
GND2

6

3
2
1
0

Ethernet

USB

RS 232 / RS 485

Bus Interface

6

5

4

3 2 1

0
A0024605

 21
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Supply voltage

Connections: back of device, panel version (left), DIN rail version (right)

Slot 6: Power supply with relays
Slot 5: Multifunction card or HART® card (channels 17-20) or digital card
Slot 4: Multifunction card or HART® card (channels 13-16)
Slot 3: Multifunction card or HART® card (channels 9-12)
Slot 2: Multifunction card or HART® card (channels 5-8)
Slot 1: Multifunction card or HART® card (channels 1-4)
Slot 0: CPU card with interfaces• Extra-low voltage power supply unit ±24 V AC/DC (-10% / +15%) 50/60Hz• Low voltage power supply unit 100 to 230 V AC (±10%) 50/60Hz
Overcurrent protection (rated current ≤ 10 A) must be installed for the power cable.

Power consumption• 100 to 230 V: max. 47 VA• 24 V: max. 30 VA
The power actually consumed depends on the individual operating state and the device
version (LPS, USB, brightness of screen, number of channels, etc). The active power here isapprox. 3 W to 25 W.

Power supply failure

Battery-backed time and data memory. The device starts automatically following a power
failure.

Electrical connection

Details about the electrical connection: →  17

Electrical connection,
terminal assignment

Endress+Hauser

All connection examples are illustrated using the panel version. The connections on
the DIN rail version are identical.

111

Technical data

Memograph M, RSG45

Circuit diagram

8

Termination

RL

R= resistor

RS 485(typical 120 Ω)

9

RxD/TxD(+)
RxD/TxD(-)

Further units

12-24 VDC
>5 mA
_
+

Analogoutputs (O)Power supply
100-230 VAC 24 V AC/DC(-10%; +15%)(±10%)
50 / 60 Hz
50 / 60 Hz

Digital in (D)24 V GNDx

GNDx

Dx1

Dx1

Pulse

2

+ - + -

L+ N- PE

_

GNDx

1

Dx1

(Selectable in unit setup)12-24 VDC

10k

GNDx

-+

24 V +>20 ms

O15
O16
O25
O26

24V Out: max. 250 mA

24V

R62
D11
D21
D31
D41
D51
D61
GND1

Out

-

+

R51

R52

R61

R41

R42

R22

R31

R32

R13

R21

R11

R12

Rel. max. 250 V / 3 A
L/+
N/PE

Dx1

1
2
0...20 mA; + - + 4...20 mA

+

O26

D71
D81
D91
DA1
DB1
DC1
DD1
DE1
GND2
GND2

O15

G6

…

…

G1

…

…

Ch16

C6

…

…

C1

Slot 3: analog input / HART 9-12 (option)

86

…

…

81

…

Slot 2: analog input / HART 5-8 (option)
Slot 1: analog input / HART 1-4 (option)

46

…

…

41

…

…

36

…

…

…

…

31

Ch4

…

76

…

…

…

…

Ch8

…

B6

…

…

…

…

…

Ch12

F6

…

…

…

…

F1
71

Ch3

66

…

…

26

…

…

Ch2
21

16

Slot 4: analog input / HART 13-16 (option)

1

6

Slot 0: CPU (standard)

9USB

Ethernet

1

B1

Ch11
Ch7

A6

…

…

A1

…

…

Ch6
61

…

…

…

…

56

…
…

9

6

O16

Ch15
E6

…

…

Ch14
E1

…

…

Ch10

…

D6
96

…

…
…
…

11

5

To PC: Cable with
9 pol. Sub-D plug
RxD - 3
GND - 5TxD - 2

Slot 5: analog input / HART 17-20 or digital-I/O (option)

RL

RK

RJ

RI

RH

RG

RF

RE

RD

RC
…

…

…

D1
91

…

…

Ch5
51

Ch1

…

2 3 5 8 9

…

5

…

9

…

6
1

Ch9

8 9

To modem: Cable with
9 pol. Sub-D socket

RB

RA

Ch13

RS 232

O25

Slot 6: Power supply slot (standard)

RS 232 / RS 485

Bus Interface

x5 x6

x1 x2

5
23 5 8 9

LED

LED

green

yellow

Analog inputs
x1 x2

x3

x4

x3

x4

x5 x6

x1 x2

x3

x4

x5 x6

Pt46, Pt50, Pt100,
Pt500, Pt1000,
Cu50, Cu53, Cu100

RTD

+

I
x1 x2

x3

x4

0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, 0...5 mA, ±20 mA(Volt drop ≤1 V, Ri ≤50 Ohm)x5 x6b) ≤1 Va) >1 V

+

+

-

-

U

a) 0...5 V, 1...5 V, 0...10 V, ±10 V, ±30 Vb) 0...1 V, ±150 mV, ±1 V+
A, B, C, D, J, K, L, N, T, R, S

TC
x1 x2
24 V

x3

x4

x5 x6

>40 µs++R=1.2 kPulse/
frequency

U

-

I

-

LOW = 0...7 mA
HIGH = 13...20 mA

A0026669-EN

 22

112

For connection examples of the HART® inputs (optional), see the Operating Instructions →  25

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Technical data

Supply voltage (power unit, slot 6)Power unit type

Terminal

100-230 VAC

L+

N-

PE

Phase L

Zero conductor N

GroundL+

N-

PE

Phase L or +Zero conductor N or -GroundA0019103

24 V AC/DC

Relay (power unit, slot 6)
TypeTerminal (max. 250 V, 3 A)

A0019103

Alarm relay 1

R11

R12

R13

Changeover
contact

Normally
closed contact(NC) 1)

Normally open
contact (NO) 2)

Relay 2 to 6

1)
2)

Rx1

Rx2

Switching contact

Normally open
contact (NO 2))

NC = normally closed (breaker)
NO = normally open (maker)

The open or close function (= activation or deactivation of the relay coil) in a limit
event can be configured in the setup: "Setup -> Advanced setup -> Outputs -> Relay ->Relay x". However, in the event of a power failure, the relay adopts its quiescent switch
state regardless of the setting programmed.
Digital inputs; auxiliary voltage output (power unit, slot 6)
TypeTerminal

A0019103

Digital input
1 to 6Endress+Hauser

D11 to D61

GND1

Digital input 1 to 6 (+)

Ground (-) for digital
inputs 1 to 6

113

Technical data

Memograph M, RSG45

Type

Terminal

A0019103

Auxiliary
voltage
output, notstabilized,
max. 250 mA

24V Out -24V Out +- Ground+ 24V (±15%)

If the auxiliary voltage is to be used for the digital inputs, the 24 V out - terminal of
the auxiliary voltage output must be connected with the GND1 terminal.
Analog inputs (slot 1-5)
The first digit (x) of the two-digit terminal number corresponds to the associated channel:
Terminal

x1
x2
x3
x4
x5
x6

Chx

Type

A0019303

x1

x2

x3

x4

Current/pulse/frequency
input 1)
Voltage > 1V(+)

Resistance thermometer
RTD (3-wire)(A)

Resistance thermometer
RTD (4-wire)(A)

Thermocouples TC
1)

114

(+)
(A)

x6

(+)

(-)
(-)

Voltage ≤ 1V
Resistance thermometer
RTD (2-wire)

x5

(-)
(B)

a (sense)b (sense)(B)b (sense)

(B)

(+)

(-)

If a universal input is used as a frequency or pulse input, a series resistor must be used in series connection
with the voltage source. Example: 1.2 kΩ series resistor at 24 V

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Technical data

HART® inputs (slot 1-5)
The first digit (x) of the two-digit terminal number corresponds to the associated channel:
Type

Terminal

Chx

Modem

x1
x2
x3
x4
x5
x6

x1
x2
x3
x4
x5
x6

250Ω 10Ω

A0024862

HART® (4 to 20 mA)

x1

x2

x3

x4

x5

x6

SHD

H_1

H_2

Rcom

I+

I-

• A 250 Ω communication resistor (load) is installed on the device side between
terminals x4 and x5.
• A 10 Ω resistor (shunt) is installed on the device side at the current input between
terminals x5 and x6.
• Terminals x2 and x3 (H_1 and H_2) are jumpered internally.
• The internal HART® modem is located between terminals x2/x3 and x6.
Relay extension (digital card, slot 5)

RL

RJ

RK

RH

RI

RF

RG

RE

RC

RD

RA

RB

D71
D81
D91
DA1
DB1
DC1
DD1
DE1
GND2
GND2

Terminal (max. 250 V, 3 A)
O15
O16
O25
O26

Type

A0024736

Relay 7, 8

RA

RB

RC

RD

Relay 9, 10

RE

RF

RG

RH

Relay 11, 12

RI

RJ

RK

RL

Switching contact

Normally open
contact ( 1))

Switching contact

Normally open contact
( 2))

1)
2)

NO)
NO)

The open or close function (= activation or deactivation of the relay coil) in a limit
event can be configured in the setup: "Setup -> Advanced setup -> Outputs -> Relay ->Relay x". However, in the event of a power failure, the relay adopts its quiescent switch
state regardless of the setting programmed.
Analog outputs (digital card, slot 5)

RL

RJ

RK

RI

RG

RH

RE

RF

RC

RD

RA

RB

D71
D81
D91
DA1
DB1
DC1
DD1
DE1
GND2
GND2

Terminal
O15
O16
O25
O26

Type

A0024736

Analogoutput 1-2

Endress+Hauser

O15

O16

O25

Analog output 1 (+)

Ground, analog output Analog output 2 (+)
1 (-)

O26
Ground, analog output
2 (-)

115

Technical data

Memograph M, RSG45

Extension of digital inputs (digital card, slot 5)

RK

RL

RI

RJ

RG

RH

RE

RF

RC

RD

RA

RB

D71
D81
D91
DA1
DB1
DC1
DD1
DE1
GND2
GND2

Terminal
O15
O16
O25
O26

Type

A0024736

Digital input 7 to
14

D71 to DE1

GND2

GND2

Digital input 7 to 14 (+)

Ground (-) for digital inputs 7 Ground (-) for digital inputs 7
to 14
to 14

If the auxiliary voltage is to be used for the digital inputs, the 24 V out - terminal of
the auxiliary voltage output (power unit, slot 6) must be connected with the GND2
terminal.
Device plug

• Panel-mounted device/DIN rail version: connected to mains via plug-in screw terminals
with reverse polarity protection• Desktop version (option): connected to mains via IEC connector

Overvoltage protection

To avoid high-energy transients on long signal cables, connect a suitable surge arrester
upstream (e.g. E+H HAW562) in series upstream.

Connection data interface,communication

USB interfaces:
1 x USB port type A (host) on the front of device (only for version with navigator and front
interfaces)
A USB 2.0 port is available on a shielded USB A socket at the front of the device. A USB
stick as a memory medium, for example, can be connected to this port. An external
keyboard/mouse for device operation, a USB hub, a barcode reader or a printer (PCL5c orhigher) may also be connected.
1 x USB port type B (function) on the front of device (only for version with navigator andfront interfaces)
A USB 2.0 port is available on a shielded USB B socket at the front of the device. This canbe used to connect the device for communication with a laptop, for example.
2 x USB port type A (host) on the rear of the device (standard)
Two USB 2.0 ports are available on shielded USB A sockets at the rear of the device. A USB
stick as a memory medium, for example, can be connected to these ports. An external
keyboard/mouse for device operation, a USB hub, a barcode reader or a printer (PCL5c orhigher) may also be connected.
• USB-2.0 is compatible with USB-1.1 or USB-3.0, i.e. communication is possible.
• The assignment of the USB interfaces complies with the standard such that shielded
standard cables with a maximum length of 3 meters (9.8 ft) can be used here.
• The USB devices are detected by the "plug-and-play" function. If several devices ofthe same type are connected, only the USB device that was connected first isavailable.
• A maximum of 8 external USB devices (incl. USB hub) can be connected if they do
not exceed the maximum load of 500 mA. If overloaded, the corresponding USB
devices are automatically disabled. An active USB hub can be used for higher power
ratings.

116

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Technical data

Reference list for USB printers:
HP Color LaserJet CP1515n, HP Color LaserJet Pro CP1525n, ECOSYS P6021cdn.
The printer must support PCL5c (or higher). GDI printers are not supported!
Reference list for USB barcode readers:
Datalogic Gryphon D230; Metrologic MS5100 Eclipse Series; Symbol LS2208, Datalogic
Quickscan 1, Godex GS220, Honeywell Voyager 9590.
Ethernet interface (standard):
Ethernet interface on back, 10/100 Base-T, plug type RJ45. The Ethernet interface can beused to integrate the device via a hub or switch into a PC network (TCP/ IP Ethernet). A
standard patch cable (e.g. CAT5E) can be used for the connection. Using DHCP, the device
can be fully integrated into an existing network without the need for additional
configuration. The device can be accessed from every PC in the network. Normally only theautomatic assignment of the IP address must be configured at the client. When the device
is started, it can automatically retrieve the IP address, subnet mask and gateway from a
DHCP server. If a DHCP is not used, these settings must be made directly in the device(depends on the specific network). Two Ethernet function LEDs are located on the rear ofthe device.
The following functions are implemented:• Data communication with PC software (analysis software, configuration software, OPC
server)• Web server• WebDAV (Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning) is an open standard forthe provisioning of files via the HTTP protocol. The data saved on the device's SD card
can be read out using a PC. A Web browser or a WebDAV client can be selected as the
network drive for this on the PC side.
Requirements with regard to a network printer:
Network printer reference list:
HP Color LaserJet CP1515n, HP Color LaserJet Pro CP1525n, ECOSYS P6021cdn.
The printer must support PCL5c (or higher). GDI printers are not supported!
Ethernet Modbus TCP master (option):
As a Modbus master, the device can interrogate other Modbus slaves via Ethernet. The
Modbus TCP master can be operated in parallel with the Profibus DP slave, Modbus
RTU/TCP slave or PROFINET I/O Device.
Up to 40 analog inputs can be transmitted via Modbus and stored in the device.
Ethernet Modbus TCP slave (option):
Connection to SCADA systems (Modbus master).
Up to 40 analog inputs and 20 (14 real + 6 virtual) digital inputs can be transmitted via
Modbus and stored in the device.
Serial RS232/RS485 interface:
A combined RS232/RS485 connection is available on a shielded SUB D9 socket at the rearof the device. This can be used for data transfer and to connect a modem. For
communication via modem, we recommend an industrial modem with a watchdog
function.

Endress+Hauser

117

Technical data

Memograph M, RSG45• The following baud rates are supported: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200• Max. cable length with a shielded cable: 2 m (6.6 ft) (RS232), or 1000 m (3281 ft)(RS485)
Only one interface can be used at any one time (RS232 or RS485).
Modbus RTU master (option):
As a Modbus master, the device can interrogate other Modbus slaves via RS485. The
Modbus RTU master can be operated in parallel with the Profibus-DP slave, PROFINET I/O
Device or Modbus TCP slave.
Up to 40 analog inputs can be transmitted via Modbus and stored in the device.
Modbus RTU slave (option):
The device can be interrogated as a Modbus slave by another Modbus master via RS485.
Up to 40 analog inputs and 20 (14 real + 6 virtual) digital inputs can be transmitted via
Modbus and stored in the device.
A Modbus RTU master and RTU slave cannot be operated in parallel.
Remote interrogation with analog or GSM/GPRS wireless modem:
Analog modem:
An analog modem for industrial use (e.g. Devolo or WESTERMO), which is connected to
the RS232 interface with a special modem cable (see accessories →  97), is
recommended.
GSM/GPRS wireless modem:
A GSM/GPRS wireless modem for industrial use (e.g. Cinterion, INSYS or WESTERMO, incl.
antenna and power unit), which is connected to the RS232 interface with a special modem
cable (see accessories →  97), is recommended.
Important: the wireless modem needs a SIM card and data transfer subscription. In
addition, it must be possible to deactivate the PIN prompt.
If the Web server is operated via a wireless modem, this may result in high provider
costs as data are transmitted continuously.
AnyBus® interface (CPU card, slot 0, optional)
PROFIBUS–DP slave:
The device can be integrated into a fieldbus system as per the PROFIBUS–DP standard bymeans of the PROFIBUS-DP interface. Up to 40 analog inputs and 20 (14 real + 6 virtual)
digital inputs can be transmitted via PROFIBUS-DP and stored in the device. Bidirectional
communication with cyclic data transfer is possible. Connection via Sub-D socket.
Baud rate: maximum 12 Mbit/s
EtherNet/IP adapter (slave):
Up to 40 analog inputs and 20 (14 real + 6 virtual) digital inputs can be transmitted via
EtherNet/IP and stored in the device. The built-in module corresponds to I/O server
category (Level 2). It has an integrated 2-port switch, thereby supporting EtherNet/IP
communication in line or ring topologies. Connection via 2 RJ45 standard sockets.
PROFINET I/O device:
Up to 40 analog inputs and 20 (14 real + 6 virtual) digital inputs can be transmitted via
PROFINET IO and stored in the device. The 2-port module for PROFINET IO meetscompliance class B. The integrated switch enables communication in line or ring topologies
without an additional external switch. Connection via 2 RJ45 standard sockets.

118

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Technical data

16.5
Response time

Input

OutputTime [ms]Current, voltage, pulse

Relays, OC, analog output

≤ 550

RTD

Relays, OC, analog output≤ 1150

1)

Relays, OC, analog output≤ 1550

Cable open circuit detection, current input

Relays, OC, analog output≤ 1150Sensor error RTD, TC

Relays, OC, analog output≤ 5000Digital input

Relays, OC, analog output≤ 350

HART® input

Relays, OC, analog output

Non-deterministicTC

1)

Reference operating
conditions

Performance characteristics

If internal measuring point temperature compensation is used, otherwise values as for voltage

Reference temperature

25 °C (77 °F) ±5 K

Warm-up period

120 min.

Humidity

20 to 60 % rel. humidity

Hysteresis

Can be configured for limit values in the setup

Long-term drift

As per IEC 61298-2: max. ±0.1%/year (of measuring range)

16.6
Panel mounting: mounting
location and installation
dimensions

Endress+Hauser

Mounting

The device with a display is designed for use in a panel.
The device must be installed in a pressurized enclosure system for operation in thehazardous area. To ensure safe installation, it is essential to follow the installation
instructions for the cabinet and the installation instructions in the Ex-related Safety
Instructions (XA).

119

Technical data

Memograph M, RSG45

158.5 (6.24)
141.2 (5.56)

195.2 (7.69)

A

27(1.06)

149.2 (5.87)

1(5 38 +1
.43 +0.04)

37.1(1.46)

158.5 (6.24)
141.2 (5.56)

1(5. 38 +1
43 +0.04)

B

31.4 (1.24)

150 (5.91)

196 (7.72)

208 (8.19)
138(5.43)

138 (5.43)
162 (6.38)

70(2.76)

24 (0.94)

C

A0024610

 23
A
B
C

Panel mounting and dimensions in mm (in).

Version with navigator and front interfaces
Version with stainless steel front and touchscreen
Grid dimensions of panel cutouts for multiple devices

Dimensions• Installation depth (excluding terminal cover): approx. 159 mm (6.26 in) for device incl.
terminals and fastening clips.
• Installation depth including terminal cover (option): approx.198 mm (7.8 in)• Panel cutout: 138 to 139 mm (5.43 to 5.47 in) x 138 to 139 mm (5.43 to 5.47 in)• Panel thickness: 2 to 40 mm (0.08 to 1.58 in)• viewing angle range: 50˚ in all directions from the display central axis
• A minimum distance of 12 mm (0.47 in) between the devices must be observed ifaligning the devices vertically above one another or horizontally beside one another.
• The grid dimension of the panel cutouts for multiple devices must be at least
208 mm (8.19 in) horizontally and at least 162 mm (6.38 in) vertically (tolerance notconsidered).
• Securing to DIN 43 834

120

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Mounting location andinstallation dimensions forthe DIN rail version

Technical data

The device without a display is designed for DIN rail mounting.
The DIN rail device is not approved for operation in the hazardous area.

89.9 (3.54)
72.7 (2.86) 17.2 (0.68)

136 (5.35)

181 (7.13)

A0036528

DIN rail version, dimensions in mm (in).

134 (5.28)

 24

51 (

2)

134

8)
(5.2

A0046633

 25

Terminal cover, DIN rail version, dimensions in mm (in)Dimensions• Installation depth: approx. 90 mm (3.54 in) for device incl. terminals (w/o terminal
cover).
• Mounted on DIN rail as per IEC 60715• The devices can be arranged horizontally beside one another without clearance between
the devices.
Endress+Hauser

121

Technical data

Field housing assembly anddesign (optional)

Memograph M, RSG45

As an option, the panel-mounted device can be ordered ready-mounted in a field housingwith IP65.
Dimensions (B x H x D) approx.: 320 mm (12.6 in) x 320 mm (12.6 in) x 254 mm (10 in)

Desktop housing assemblyand design (optional)

As an option, the panel-mounted device can be ordered ready-mounted in a desktop
housing.
Dimensions (B x H x D) approx.: 293 mm (11.5 in) x 188 mm (7.4 in) x 213 mm (8.39 in)(dimensions with bracket, feet and installed device)

16.7

Environment

Ambient temperaturerange–10 to +50 °C (14 to 122 °F)

Storage temperature–20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)

Humidity

5 to 85 %, non-condensing

Climate class

To IEC 60654-1: Class B2

Electrical safety

Class I equipment, overvoltage category II
Pollution level 2

Operating altitude< 2 000 m (6 561 ft) above MSL

Degree of protection

Front of panel-mounted
deviceIP65 / NEMA 4 (UL50 type 4)

Back of panel-mounted
device (terminal side)

IP20

DIN rail version

IP20 (overall device)

Electromagnetic
compatibility

EMC in accordance with all relevant requirements of the IEC/EN 61326 series and
NAMUR NE21. For details, refer to the Declaration of Conformity.
• Interference immunity: as per IEC/EN 61326 series (industrial environment) / NAMUR
NE21
Maximum measured error <1% of measuring range• Interference emissions: as per IEC 61326-1 Class A

16.8
Design, dimensions

122

Mechanical construction

Information about design and dimensions →  119

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Technical data

Weight• Panel-mounted device with navigator and front interfaces (with maximum
configuration): approx. 2.7 kg (5.9 lbs)
• Panel-mounted device with stainless steel front and touchscreen (with maximum
configuration): approx. 3.2 kg (7 lbs)
• DIN rail version: approx. 1.8 kg (3.97 lbs)
• Desktop housing (excluding device): approx. 2.3 kg (5 lbs)
• Field housing (excluding device): approx. 4 kg (8.8 lbs)

Materials

Panel-mounted device with navigator and front
interfaces
Front frame

Zinc die cast GD-Z410, powder-coated

Display glass

Transparent Makrolon® plastic (FR clear 099) UL94-V2

Flap; jog/shuttle dial ("Navigator")

Plastic ABS UL94-V2

Membrane keypad

Polyester membrane PC-ABS UL94-V2

Intermediate frame (front towards control panel)

Plastic PA6-GF20 UL94-V2

Seal towards panel wall; seal in flap; seal towards
navigator

Rubber EPDM 70 Shore A

Casing; rear panel

Galvanized sheet steel St 12 ZE

Panel-mounted device with stainless steel front andtouchscreen
Front frame

AISI 316L

Display glass

6 mm single-pane safety glass (soda-lime glass)Intermediate frame (front towards control panel)

Plastic PA6-GF20 UL94-V2

Seal towards control panel wall

Rubber EPDM 70 Shore A

Window seal between front frame and glass

Rubber EPDM 60 Shore A

Casing; rear panel

Galvanized sheet steel St 12 ZE

DIN rail version
Retaining bracket

EN AW 6060 T66 / AlMgSi0.5 F22

Casing; front

Galvanized sheet steel St 12 ZE

Designation

Short form

PropertiesAISI 316L (corresponds to
1.4404 or 1.4435)

X2CrNiMo17-13-2,
X2CrNiMo18-14-3

Austenitic, stainless steel
High corrosion resistance in general

All materials are silicone-free.
Materials of desktop housing• Housing half-panels: sheet steel, electrolytically plated (powder-coated)• Side sections: aluminum extruded section (powder-coated)• Section ends: colored polyamide• Feet: colored polyamide, fiber-glass reinforced
Field housing materials• Housing (front frame, door, base frame, side parts): thermoplastic polycarbonate PC• Front panel and wall mounting: chrome-nickel stainless steel 1.4301 V2AEndress+Hauser

123

Technical data

Memograph M, RSG45

16.9
Operating concept

Display and operating elements

The description for local operation does not apply for the DIN rail version, as this hasneither a display screen nor operating elements. The description for remoteconfiguration applies for all versions.
The device can be operated directly onsite, or via remote configuration with the PC via
interfaces and operating tools (Web server, configuration software).
Web server
A Web server is integrated into the device. The Web server offers the following range offunctions:• Easy configuration without additional installed software• Instantaneous value display and diagnostics information• Display of current measured value curves via Web browser (remote control)• Display of historical measured data in numerical format or as a curve• Display of events and logbook entries• Loading/saving of device configuration• Device firmware update• Printout of device configuration
Integrated operating instructions
The device's simple operating concept enables you to perform commissioning for many
applications without the need for hardcopy operating instructions. The device has anintegrated help function and displays operating instructions directly on screen.

Local operation

Display elements on panel-mounted device
Type
Wide-screen TFT color graphic display (optionally with touch control)
Size (diagonal screen measurement)
178 mm (7")
Resolution
Wide VGA 384,000 pixels (800 x 480 pixels)
Backlight
50,000 h half value time (= half brightness)
Number of colors
262,000 viewable colors, 256 colors usedViewing angle
Max. viewing angle range: 50˚ in all directions from the display central axis
Screen display• Users can choose between black or white for the background color• Active channels can be assigned to up to 10 groups. These groups can be given a namee.g. "Temp. boiler 1" or "Daily averages" so that they can be uniquely identified.
• Scales linear or logarithmic• Measured value history: quick retrieval of historic data with zoom function• Pre-formatted display formats, such as horizontal or vertical curves, instrument display,
circular chart, process screen, bargraph or digital display.

124

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Measured value display andoperating elements

Technical data

Measured value display and operating elements on panel-mounted device

d

c

b

5

a
6

7

5

8

6

7

8

9

9

4

10

3

1

4

10

2
A0024709

 26

Device front (left: version with navigator and front interfaces; right: version with stainless steel front andtouchscreen)

Item
No.

Operating function (display mode = display of measured values)(Setup mode = operation in the Setup menu)aSlot for SD cardb

USB B socket "Function" e.g. to connect to PC or laptopc

USB A socket "Host" e.g. for USB memory stick, external keyboard, barcode reader or printerd

LED at SD slot. Yellow LED lit or flashing when the device writes to the SD card or reads it.

 Do not remove the SD card if the LED is lit or flashing! Risk of data loss!

Endress+Hauser

1"Navigator": jog/shuttle dial for operating with additional press/hold function.
In display mode: turn the dial to switch between the various signal groups. Press the dial to display themain menu.
In setup mode or in a selection menu: turn the dial anticlockwise to move the bar or the cursor
upwards or to the left, changes the parameter. Turning clockwise moves the bar or cursor down or to
the right, changes the parameter. Press = select highlighted function, start parameter change (ENTER
key).

2

Functions of LED indicators (according to NAMUR NE44:)• Green LED (top) lit: power supply OK• Red LED (bottom) flashing: maintenance required, caused by external factor (e.g. cable open circuitetc.) or a message/notification requiring acknowledgment is pending, calibration is running.

3

Variable "soft keys" 1-4 (from left to right)

4

Function indicator of "soft keys"

5

In display mode: current group name, type of analysis;
In setup mode: name of the current operating item (dialog title)

6

In display mode: displays current date/time
In setup mode: --125

Technical data

Memograph M, RSG45

Item
No.

Operating function (display mode = display of measured values)(Setup mode = operation in the Setup menu)

7

In display mode: user ID (if function is active)
In setup mode: --8

In display mode: alternating display indicating the percentage space on the SD card or USB stick thathas already been used.
Status symbols are also displayed in alternation with the memory information (e.g. simulation mode,
data storage active, operation lock, batch active)
In setup mode: the current "direct access" operating code is displayed

9

In display mode: window for measured value display (e.g. curve display).
Display of current measured values and the status in the event of an error/alarm condition. In the caseof counters, the type of counter is displayed as a symbol.
point has limit value status, the corresponding channel identifier is highlighted
 inIf aredmeasuring(quick detection of limit value violations). During a limit value violation and device
operation, the acquisition of measured values continues uninterrupted.

9

In setup mode: display of operating menu

10

In display mode: alternating status display (e.g. set zoom range) of the analog or digital inputs in theappropriate color of the channel.
In setup mode: different information is displayed here depending on the display type.

Operating elements of the DIN rail version
1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

A0036811

 27

Device front of the DIN rail version

Item
No.

Operating function

1

DIP switches
The behavior of the Ethernet interface is configured via DIP switches (left =OFF, right = ON).
For a detailed description of the DIP switch functions →  50
Function of the DIP switches (1 = top, 12 = bottom):• DIP switches 1-8: configuration of IP address in last octet (e.g.
192.168.1.212)• DIP switch 9:
OFF = setup change not locked
ON = setup locked• DIP switch 10:
OFF = default / OFF
ON = service addressing• DIP switch 11 for the configuration of the USB-B interface:
OFF = USB standard
ON = Ethernet via USB (Web server)• DIP switch 12: not assigned

OFF

ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
A0036815

DIN rail version is supplied with the following Ethernet settings:
 The
IP address: 192.168.1.212; subnet mask: 255.255.255.0; gateway:
0.0.0.02126

Ethernet interface

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Technical data

Item
No.

Operating function

3

USB B socket "Function" e.g. to connect to PC or laptop

4Functions of LED indicators (according to NAMUR NE44:)• Green LED (top) lit: power supply OK• Red LED (bottom) flashing: maintenance required, caused by external factor (e.g. cable open circuitetc.) or a message/notification requiring acknowledgment is pending, calibration is running.

5

Cyclic storage is completed via the "Remove SD card safely" button, the LED (d) goes out. The SD card
can now be removed.

 If the SD card is not removed within 5 minutes, the write cycles start again.
6

USB A socket "Host" e.g. for USB memory stick or printerIf a USB stick is inserted, data that have not yet been saved are copied to the stick automatically. The
red LED on the USB socket flashes while the data are being copied to the stick.

 Do not remove the USB stick when the red LED is flashing! Risk of data loss!
If an error occurs (e.g. USB stick full or defective), the red LED is lit constantly. Remove the USB stickand replace it.
7

LED at SD slot. Yellow LED lit or flashing when the device writes to the SD card or reads it.

 Do not remove the SD card if the LED is lit or flashing! Risk of data loss!
8

Slot for SD card

9

Anybus® interface (option)

10

Serial RS232/RS485 interface

Languages

The following languages can be selected in the operating menu: German, English, Spanish,French, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Polish, Portuguese, Czech, Russian, Japanese, Chinese(Traditional), Chinese (Simplified)

Remote operation

Device access via operating tools
Device configuration and measured value retrieval can also be done via interfaces. The
following operating tools are available for this purpose:

Endress+Hauser

Operating tool

Functions

Access via"Field Data Manager(FDM)" analysis
software, SQL
database support(included in thedelivery)• Export of saved data (measured values, analyses, event log) RS232/RS485, USB,
• Visualization and processing of saved data (measured
Ethernetvalues, analyses, event log)
• Safe archiving of exported data in a SQL database

Web server(integrated into thedevice; access via
browser)• Display of current and historical data and measured value
curves via the Web browser• Easy configuration without additional installed software• Remote access to device and diagnostic information

Ethernet, or Ethernet via
USB

OPC server(optional)

The following momentary values can be provided:• Analog channels• Digital channels• Mathematics• Totalizer

RS232/RS485, USB,
Ethernet"FieldCare /DeviceCare"configuration
software• Device configuration• Loading and saving of device configurations (upload/
download)• Documentation of the measuring point

USB, Ethernet

127

Technical data

Memograph M, RSG45

16.10 Certificates and approvals
For certificates and approvals valid for the device: see the data on the nameplate
Approval-related data and documents: www.endress.com/deviceviewer → (enter theserial number)
CE mark

The product meets the requirements of the harmonized European standards. As such, itcomplies with the legal specifications of the EC directives. The manufacturer confirms
successful testing of the product by affixing to it the CE-mark.

Electronic recording/electronic signature

FDA 21 CFR Part 11

Certifications• HART® certification (HCF)• PROFINET certification• EtherNet/IP certification

Other standards andguidelines• IEC 60529:
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)• IEC/EN 61010-1:
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control, and laboratoryuse• IEC/EN 61326 series:
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC requirements)

The device meets the requirements of the "Food and Drug Administration" for electronic
recording/electronic signature.

16.11 Ordering information
The hazardous area version (Ex version) is only available in conjunction with thestainless steel front and touch control.
Ordering information

Detailed ordering information is available for your nearest sales organizationwww.addresses.endress.com or in the Product Configurator under www.endress.com :1.

Click Corporate

2.

Select the country

3.

Click Products

4.

Select the product using the filters and search field

5.

Open the product page

The Configuration button to the right of the product image opens the ProductConfigurator.
Product Configurator - the tool for individual product configuration• Up-to-the-minute configuration data
• Depending on the device: Direct input of measuring point-specific information suchas measuring range or operating language• Automatic verification of exclusion criteria• Automatic creation of the order code and its breakdown in PDF or Excel output
format• Ability to order directly in the Endress+Hauser Online Shop

128

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Scope of delivery

Technical data

The scope of delivery of the device comprises:• Device (with terminals, as per order)• Panel-mounted device: 2 screw fastening clips• Version with navigator and front interfaces or DIN rail version: USB cable• Panel-mounted device: sealing rubber towards the panel wall
• "Industrial Grade" SD card, industry standard:
Panel-mounted device with navigator and front interfaces: card is located in the SD slot
behind the flap on the front of the device (optional).
Panel-mounted device with stainless steel front and touchscreen: card is located in thedevice and cannot be replaced or retrofitted.
DIN rail version: card is located in the SD slot (optional).
• "Field Data Manager (FDM)" analysis software on DVD (Essential, Demo or Professionalversion, depending on order)• Delivery note
• Multilanguage Brief Operating Instructions, hard copy
• Ex Safety Instructions, hard copy (optional)

16.12 Supplementary documentation
Standard documentation• Technical Information for Memograph M RSG45: TI01180R• Operating Instructions for Memograph M RSG45: BA01338R• Brief Operating Instructions for Memograph M RSG45: KA01177R• System components and data manager - solutions to complete your measuring point:
FA00016K
Supplementary device-dependent documentation• Competence brochure PROFIBUS® - process automation with digital fieldbus technology:
CP00005S• Operating Instructions for Memograph M RSG45 with telealarm: BA01387R• Operating Instructions for Memograph M RSG45 with Modbus RTU / TCP slave:BA01388R• Operating Instructions for Memograph M RSG45 with Modbus RTU / TCP master:BA01390R• Operating Instructions for Memograph M RSG45 with wastewater + RSB (rain spillway
basin) option: BA01337R• Operating Instructions for Memograph M RSG45 with batch software: BA01411R• Operating Instructions for Memograph M RSG45 with energy option: BA01412R• Operating Instructions for Memograph M RSG45 with EtherNet/IP® adapter: BA01413R• Operating Instructions for Memograph M RSG45 with PROFIBUS® DP slave: BA01414R• Operating Instructions for Memograph M RSG45 with PROFINET: BA01415R• Operating Instructions for Memograph M RSG45 with TrustSens Calibration Monitoring:
BA01887R• Ex-related additional documentation:
ATEX II2G Ex px IIC T4 Gb, ATEX II2D Ex pD IIIC T135°C Db: XA01362R

Endress+Hauser

129

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

17

Appendix

17.1

Operating items in the "Expert" menu

The parameter groups for the Expert setup contain all the parameters of the operating
menus: System, Input and Output Setup, Communication, Application, Diagnostics as wellas other parameters that are reserved for experts only.
For most settings, the "Setup" or "Expert" menu must be quit before the settings are
adopted. However settings such as the date/time are accepted immediately.
Information on configuration using FieldCare/DeviceCare configuration software• Offline configuration: Most of the parameters are available (depending on thedevice configuration).
• Online configuration: Only parameters labeled "Online configuration" are available.

Direct access

Navigation

Expert → Direct access

Description

Direct access to active operating items (rapid access). Entering the direct access code takes
you directly to the desired operating parameter. The direct access code is displayed in the
Setup menu on the top right of the display (e.g. 00000-000).

Text entry(e.g. 00000-000)

17.1.1"System" submenu

Basic settings that are needed to operate the device (e.g. date, time, etc.)

Language

Navigation

Expert → System → Language
Direct access code: 010000-000

Description

Select the operating language of the device.

Selection

German, English, Spanish, French, Italian, Dutch, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Swedish,Czech, Japanese, Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional)

Factory setting

English; or preset to customer's preferred language

Device tag

Navigation

Description

130

Expert → System → Device tag
Direct access code: 000031-000
Individual device tag

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

User entry

Text entry (max. 32 characters)

Factory setting

Unit 1

Temp. unit

Navigation

Expert → System → Temp. unit
Direct access code: 100001-000

Description

Selection of temperature unit. All directly connected thermocouples or resistancethermometers (RTD) are displayed in the preset engineering units.

Selection°C, °F, K

Factory setting°C

Decimal separator

Navigation

Expert → System → Decimal separator
Direct access code: 100003-000

Description

Select in which form the decimal separator character is to be displayed.

Selection

Comma, point

Factory setting

Comma

Fault switching

Navigation

Expert → System → Fault switching
Direct access code: 100002-000

Description

If the device detects a system error (e.g. hardware defect) or a fault (e.g. cable open
circuit), the selected output switches.

Selection

Not used, Relay x
All the available relays are displayed.

Factory setting

Relay 1

Keyboard layout

 This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Endress+Hauser

131

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → System → Keyboard layout
Direct access code: 100020/000

Description

Please select the keyboard layout. Only relevant if external keyboard is used.

Selection

Germany, Switzerland, France, USA, USA International, UK, Italy

Factory setting

Germany

Swap mouse buttons

 This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Navigation

Expert → System → Swap mouse buttons
Direct access code: 100050/000

Description

Swap function of left and right mouse button.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No

Paper size

Navigation

Expert → System → Paper size
Direct access code: 540004/000

Description

Please select the paper size of your printer.

Selection

DIN A4, US Letter

Factory setting

DIN A4Lock operation

 This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Navigation

Description

132

Expert → System → Lock operation
Direct access code: 100060/000
Local operation is locked in cases of inactivity once the set time has elapsed to prevent
inadvertent operation (e.g. when cleaning the device). The device is unlocked by pressing
the navigator or the OK operating key for 3 s. When using an external keyboard, thedevice is unlocked with the key combination "Ctrl-Alt-Del".

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Selection

Never, After 2 (5, 10, 15) minutes

Factory setting

After 5 minutes

LED mode

Navigation

Expert → System → LED mode
Direct access code: 100005/000

Description

NAMUR NE 44: Green LED -> Power supply OK. Red LED -> Measuring signal failure. Red
LED flashing -> Maintenance required.
NAMUR NE 44+: As per NAMUR NE 44, with red LED in the event of a limit value
violation.

Selection

NAMUR NE 44, NAMUR NE 44+

Factory setting

NAMUR NE 44

PRESET

Navigation

Description

Expert → System → PRESET
Direct access code: 000044-000
Caution: Resets all the parameters to the factory settings!
Only visible/editable if the service code has been entered.

Selection

No, Factory reset, Customer setting

Clear memory

Navigation

Description

Expert → System → Clear memory
Direct access code: 059000-000
Delete internal memory
Note: In the version with stainless steel front and touchscreen the internal SD card isalso cleared.

Selection

No, Yes

Confirm deletion

Endress+Hauser

133

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → System → Confirm deletion
Direct access code: 059001-000

Description

Please confirm that you want to clear the memory.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No"Date/time setup" (submenu)
Navigation
Description

Expert → System → Date/time setup
Contains settings for date/time.

Date format

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → Date format
Direct access code: 110000-000

Description

Select in which format the date is to be set and displayed.

Selection

DD.MM.YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY-MM-DD

Factory setting

DD.MM.YYYYTime format

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → Time format
Direct access code: 110001-000

Description

Select in which format the time is to be set and displayed.

Selection

24 hour, 12 hour AM/PM

Factory setting

24 hour"Date/time" submenu(Online configuration)
Navigation
Description

134

Expert → System → Date/time setup → Date/time
Contains parameters for setting the date/time.

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

UTC time zone
(Online configuration)

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → Date/time → UTC time zone
Direct access code: 120000-000

Description

Display of the current UTC time zone is on (UTC = universal time coordinated).

Current date/time(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → System → Date/time setup → Date/time → Current date/time
Direct access code: 120003-000
Displays the current date and the current time.

"Change date/time" submenu(Online configuration)
Description
Navigation

Contains parameters for changing the date/time.
Expert → System → Date/time setup → Change date/time

UTC time zone
(Online configuration)

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → Date/time → Change date/time → UTC timezone
Direct access code: 120010-000

Description

Set your UTC time zone (UTC = universal time coordinated).

Selection-12:00, -11:00: Samoa, -10:00: Hawaii, -09:30: Marquesas, -09:00: Alaska, -08:00: LA,-07:00: Denver, -06:00: Chicago, -05:00: New York, -04:00: Caracas, -03:30: St.John’s,-03:00: Brasilia, -02:00: Atlantic, -01:00: Azores, +00:00: London, +01:00: Berlin,+02:00: Cairo, +03:00: Moscow, +03:30: Tehran, +04:00: Abu Dhabi, +04:30: Kabul,+05:00: Islamabad, +05:30: New Delhi, +05:45: Kathmandu, +06:00: Dhaka, +06:30:
Pyinmana, +07:00: Bangkok, +08:00: Peking, +08:45, +09:00: Tokyo, +09:30: Adelaide,+10:00: Canberra, +10:30: Lord-Howe, +11:00:Solom.Isl., +11:30: Norfolk, +12:00:
Auckland, +12:45: Chatham, +13:00, +14:00

Date/time(Online configuration)

Endress+Hauser

135Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → Date/time → Change date/time → Date/time
Direct access code: 120013-000

Description

Set the current date and time for the unit here.

User entry

Date/time in set format"NT/ST changeover" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → System → Date/time setup → NT/ST changeover
Contains settings for normal time/summer time changeover.

NT/ST changeover

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → NT/ST changeover → NT/ST changeover
Direct access code: 110002-000

Description

Function for summer/normal time changeover.
Automatic: Changes to the local regional regulations;
Manual: Changeover times can be set in the following addresses;
Off: No changeover times required.

Selection

Off, Manual, Automatic

Factory setting

Automatic

NT/ST region

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → NT/ST changeover → NT/ST region
Direct access code: 110003-000

Description

Selects the regional settings for summer/normal time changeover.
Only visible if NT/ST changeover = Automatic.

Selection

Europe, USA

Factory setting

EuropeBegin summer time

Occurrence

136

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → NT/ST changeover → Occurrence
Direct access code: 110005-000

Description

Day, when in the spring a change from normal to summer time occurs.
Visible for NT/ST changeover = Automatic or Manual. Only editable if NT/ST changeover =Manual.

Selection1., 2., 3., 4., Last

Factory setting

Last

Day

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → NT/ST changeover → Day
Direct access code: 110006-000

Description

Day, when in the spring a change from normal to summer time occurs.
Visible for NT/ST changeover = Automatic or Manual. Only editable if NT/ST changeover =Manual.

Selection

Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday

Factory setting

SundayMonthNavigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → NT/ST changeover → Month
Direct access code: 110007-000

Description

Month, when in the spring a change from normal to summer time occurs.
Visible for NT/ST changeover = Automatic or Manual. Only editable if NT/ST changeover =Manual.

Selection

January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November,
December

Factory setting

March

Date

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → NT/ST changeover → Date
Direct access code: 110008-000

Description

Date next spring when a change from normal to summer time occurs.
Only visible if NT/ST changeover = Automatic or Manual. Cannot be edited.

Endress+Hauser

137

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Time

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → NT/ST changeover → Time
Direct access code: 110009-000

Description

Time at which the changeover from normal time to summer time is forwarded by one hour
(format: hh:mm).
Visible for NT/ST changeover = Automatic or Manual. Only editable if NT/ST changeover =Manual.

User entry

Time in set time format

Factory setting

02:00

End summer time

Occurrence

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → NT/ST changeover → Occurrence
Direct access code: 110011-000

Description

Day, when in the autumn a change from summer to normal time occurs.
Visible for NT/ST changeover = Automatic or Manual. Only editable if NT/ST changeover =Manual.

Selection1., 2., 3., 4., Last

Factory setting

Last

Day

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → NT/ST changeover → Day
Direct access code: 110012-000

Description

Day, when in the autumn a change from summer to normal time occurs.
Visible for NT/ST changeover = Automatic or Manual. Only editable if NT/ST changeover =Manual.

Selection

Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday

Factory setting

Sunday138

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Month

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → NT/ST changeover → Month
Direct access code: 110013-000

Description

Month, when in the autumn a change from summer to normal time occurs.
Visible for NT/ST changeover = Automatic or Manual. Only editable if NT/ST changeover =Manual.

Selection

January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November,
December

Factory setting

October

Date

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → NT/ST changeover → Date
Direct access code: 110014-000

Description

Date next autumn when summer time changes back to normal time.
Only visible if NT/ST changeover = Automatic or Manual. Cannot be edited.

Time

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → NT/ST changeover → Time
Direct access code: 110015-000

Description

Time at which the changeover from summer time to normal time is turned back by one
hour (in the set time format).
Visible for NT/ST changeover = Automatic or Manual. Only editable if NT/ST changeover =Manual.

User entry

Time in set time format

Factory setting

02:00"SNTP" submenu
Navigation
Description

Endress+Hauser

Expert → System → Date/time setup → SNTP
Contains settings for time synchronization using the Simple Network Time Protocol(SNTP).

139

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

SNTP

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → SNTP
Direct access code: 110020-000

Description

If switched on, time synchronization is carried out via SNTP once a day.
Note: Only possible via Ethernet.
Port 123 must be open in the firewall. The user/network administrator is responsible forthe accuracy of the time server.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No

SNTP server 1

Navigation

Expert → System → Date/time setup → SNTP server → SNTP server 1
Direct access code: 110021-000

Description

Please specify the address of the time server (or the IP address).
Note: The DNS server must be configured (see Communication/Ethernet).
Your administrator can provide the address where necessary.

User entry

Text field

SNTP server 2

Navigation

Description

Expert → System → Date/time setup → SNTP server → SNTP server 2
Direct access code: 110025-000
Shows the IP address of the time server if it was automatically allocated via DHCP. Noneditable display text.
An attempt is always made to synchronize the time via SNTP server 1 first (provided
it is configured)
DHCP must be switched on (see Communication/Ethernet).
DHCP server: Option 42"Security" submenu
Navigation
Description

140

Expert → System → Security
Contains settings that protect the device against unauthorized operation andconfiguration.

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Protected by

Navigation

Expert → System → Security → Protected by
Direct access code: 100006-000

Description

Configure how the device should be protected.

Selection

Open access, access code, FDA 21 CFR Part 11, user roles

Factory setting

Open access

Access code

Navigation

Expert → System → Security → Access code
Direct access code: 100000-000

Description

Using this code, setup access can be protected from unauthorized persons. In order tochange any parameter the correct code must be entered. Factory setting: "0", i.e. changes
can be made at any time.
Hint: Make a note of the code and store in a safe place.
Only visible if "Protected by" = "Access code"

User entry

4-digit number

Factory setting0

Set point code

Navigation

Description

Expert → System → Security → Set point code
Direct access code: 100030-000
If the unit is protected by an access code a set point code can also be defined. The user canchange the set points once the set point code is entered. All other operating positions
remain locked, however.
Only visible if an activation code has been defined.
Factory default: "0" means that alarm set points can only be changed by entering the accesscode.
Alarm set point code and access code should not be identical!

User entry

4-digit number

Factory setting0

Endress+Hauser

141

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Lock hardware

Navigation

Description

Expert → System → Security → Lock hardware
Direct access code: 100099-000
Device functions/interfaces that are not used can be switched off for security reasons.
Fieldbus systems may also be affected in the case of Ethernet or the serial interface.
Please follow the operating instructions.

Selection

Panel version: Ethernet (all ports/services), USB A socket front, USB A socket back, USB B
socket front, serial interface, SD card
DIN rail version: Ethernet (all ports/services), USB A socket, USB B socket, serialinterface, SD card

Factory setting

No lock"Authentication" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → System → Security → Authentication
Define the passwords for the various user roles to allow device access.
Only visible if "Protected by" = "User roles"

Operator
ID: operator
Password

Navigation

Expert → System → Security → Authentication → Password
Direct access code: 470105/000

Description

Enter a password for this user account.

Selection

Text entry max. 12 characters

Factory setting

operator

Administrator
ID: admin
Password

Navigation

Description
142

Expert → System → Security → Authentication → Password
Direct access code: 470102/000
Enter a password for this user account.
Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Selection

Text entry max. 12 characters

Factory setting

adminService
ID: service
Password

Navigation

Expert → System → Security → Authentication → Password
Direct access code: 470101/000

Description

Enter a password for this user account.

Selection

Text entry max. 12 characters

Factory setting

service"External memory" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → System → External memory
Settings for the external data carrier, amongst other things which data is to be stored inwhich format on the external data carrier.

Save asNavigation

Expert → System → External memory → Save as
Direct access code: 140000-000

Description"Protected format": All data is stored in a manipulation protected encrypted format. Thisdata can only be visualized by the PC analysis software supplied.
"Open format": Data is stored in a CSV format, this can be opened by a number of different
programs (for e.g. MS Excel) (Attention: no manipulation security).

Selection

Protected format, Open format (*.csv)
Note: For the device version with stainless steel front and touch operation, only theselection "Protected format" is possible!

Factory setting

Protected format

SD cardEndress+Hauser

143

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Memory build-up

Navigation

Description

Expert → System → External memory → Memory build-up
Direct access code: 140001-000"Stack memory": No more data can be stored once the data carrier is full.
"Ring memory": Once the data carrier is full the oldest data is deleted so that new data canbe stored (First in first out (FIFO).
The "Ring memory" setting refers only to the automatic storage of measured values.
Manual save functions ("Operation -> SD card -> Update/Save measured values") are
not affected.

Selection

Stack memory, Ring memory (FIFO)"Ring memory" can be selected only if "Save as" is set to "Protected format" (and not"CSV").

Factory setting

Stack memory

Warning at

Navigation

Description

Expert → System → External memory → Warning at
Direct access code: 140005-000
Issues a warning before the data carrier is x% full.
A warning is indicated on the device and this is also stored in the event buffer.
A relay can also be switched.
Only for external SD card (does not apply to USB stick)!

User entry

0 to 99%

Factory setting90

Switches relay

Navigation

Expert → System → External memory → Switches relay
Direct access code: 140006-000

Description

When the warning "Data carrier full" is displayed a relay can also be switched on.

Selection

Not used, Relay x
All the available relays are displayed.

Factory setting

Not used

144

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

CSV settings
Also configurable if "Protected format" is set.

Separator for CSV

Navigation

Expert → System → External memory → Separator for CSV
Direct access code: 140002-000

Description

Configure which separator is used by your application (e.g. in Excel = semicolon).

Selection

Comma, Semicolon

Factory setting

Semicolon

Date/time

Navigation

Expert → System → External memory → Date/time
Direct access code: 140003-000

Description

Please select if the date and time should be stored in one column or separate columns
when data is saved in CSV format files.

Selection

One column, Separate columns

Factory setting

Separate columns

Operational time

Navigation

Expert → System → External memory → Operational time
Direct access code: 140004-000

Description

Please select in which format operation times will be stored/displayed.

Selection

0 seconds, 0.0000 hours, 0.00000 days, 0000h00:00

Factory setting

0000h00:00"Messages" submenu
Navigation
Endress+Hauser

Expert → System → Messages
145

Appendix

Description

Memograph M, RSG45

Contains settings for displaying/acknowledging messages. Examples of messages include:
messages triggered by set points; messages triggered by a digital input; error messages;etc.

Acknowledging messages

Navigation

Expert → System → Messages → Acknowledging messages
Direct access code: 100040-000

Description

The time the message is acknowledged can be saved in the events list.
This setting cannot be altered if the user administration system is activated (FDA 21
CFR Part 11).

Selection

Do not save, Save

Factory setting

Do not save

Switches relay

Navigation

Expert → System → Messages → Switches relay
Direct access code: 100042-000

Description

A relay can be switched as soon as a message that has to be confirmed is displayed (e.g.
on/off message, device errors etc.).
The relay takes the initial state as soon as all messages have been confirmed.

Selection

Not used, Relay x
All the available relays are displayed.

Factory setting

Not used"Screensaver" submenu
This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Navigation
Description

Expert → System → Screensaver
To increase the life span of the LCD the rear illumination can be switched off (=screensaver).

Screensaver This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.

146

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Navigation

Expert → System → Screensaver → Screensaver
Direct access code: 160000-000

Description"Switched off": LCD is always switched on.
“Switch on for x min.”: Display goes dark after x minutes. All other functions remain in
operation. Press an operating key: Illumination is switched back on.
"Switched daily": Enter time span.

Selection

Switched off, On after 10 min, On after 30 min, On after 60 min, Switched daily, Control
input

Factory setting

Switched off
This setting has no effect if the screensaver is controlled by a digital input.

ON daily from

Navigation

Description

Expert → System → Screensaver → ON daily from
Direct access code: 160001-000
Set time (hh:mm) as of when the screensaver should be switched on (e.g. shift end time).
The screensaver is switched off as soon as the device is operated via onsite operation.
After 1 min of inactivity it switches back on automatically.
Only visible if screensaver = Switched daily

User entry

Time (hh:mm)

Factory setting

20:00

OFF daily from

Navigation

Expert → System → Screensaver → OFF daily from
Direct access code: 160002-000

Description

Set time (hh:mm) as of when the screensaver should be switched off (e.g. shift start time).
Only visible if screensaver = Switched daily

User entry

Time (hh:mm)

Factory setting

07:00

Alarm response

Navigation

Endress+Hauser

Expert → System → Screensaver → Alarm response
Direct access code: 160003-000

147Appendix

Description

Memograph M, RSG45"Off on alarm": If limit value violations occur or status signal "Maintenance required (Mxxx)"
or "Function check (Cxxx)" is active, the screensaver will be automatically deactivated.
"Always on": If limit value violations occur or status signal "Maintenance required (Mxxx)"
or "Function check (Cxxx)" is active, the screensaver will not be deactivated.
Active messages that require acknowledgment or an active status signal "Failure(Fxxx)" or "Out of specification (Sxxx)" deactivate the screensaver always.

Selection

Off on alarm, Always on

Factory setting

Off on alarm"Barcode reader" submenu
This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Navigation
Description

Expert → System → Barcode reader
Settings for barcode reader (only relevant if a USB barcode reader is connected to thedevice).
Notes on operating a barcode reader: it must behave like a HID keyboard; texts must
be terminated with a carriage return.

Character set

Navigation

Expert → System → Barcode reader → Character set
Direct access code: 100021-000

Description

Please select the keyboard layout.

Selection

Germany, Switzerland, France, USA, USA International, UK, Italy

Factory setting

Germany

Save as event

Navigation

Description

Expert → System → Barcode reader → Save as event
Direct access code: 100022-000
The device can save texts read in using a barcode reader in the events list.
Texts are stored as events if one of the following conditions is NOT met:
• A command sequence was read in• The dialog where batch information is input is active• The dialog for testing the barcode reader is active• The "Save text" function is executed

Selection

148

No, YesEndress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Factory setting

AppendixNo

Timeout sequences

Navigation

Expert → System → Barcode reader → Timeout sequences
Direct access code: 100023-000

Description

Specify the number of seconds after which a command sequence is canceled if thenecessary data are not read in.

User entry

Time in seconds (10-180)

Factory setting

30"Device options" submenu
Navigation

Expert → System → Device options

Description

Hardware and software options of the device.

Activation code
(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → System → Device options → Activation code
Direct access code: 000057-000
Here, you can enter a code to enable the device options.
The options that can be retrofitted are listed under "spare parts" →  95
Note: When an activation code is entered, the device is restarted in order to enable thenew option.
• The activation code entered is not displayed, i.e. this parameter is always empty
following a restart.
• Pay attention to case-sensitivity.

User entry

Text

Slot 1(Online configuration)

Navigation

Endress+Hauser

Expert → System → Device options → Slot 1
Direct access code: 990000-000

149Appendix

Description

Memograph M, RSG45

Shows hardware or software options.
Cannot be edited.
The assignment can be specified in the PC operating software for offline
configuration.

Selection

Not assigned, Universal inputs, HART

Slot 2(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → System → Device options → Slot 2
Direct access code: 990001-000
Shows hardware or software options.
Cannot be edited.
The assignment can be specified in the PC operating software for offline
configuration.

Selection

Not assigned, Universal inputs, HART

Slot 3(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → System → Device options → Slot 3
Direct access code: 990002-000
Shows hardware or software options.
Cannot be edited.
The assignment can be specified in the PC operating software for offline
configuration.

Selection

Not assigned, Universal inputs, HART

Slot 4(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → System → Device options → Slot 4
Direct access code: 990003-000
Shows hardware or software options.
Cannot be edited.
The assignment can be specified in the PC operating software for offline
configuration.

Selection
150

Not assigned, Universal inputs, HART
Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Slot 5(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → System → Device options → Slot 5
Direct access code: 990004-000
Shows hardware or software options.
Cannot be edited.
The assignment can be specified in the PC operating software for offline
configuration.

Selection

Not assigned, Universal inputs, Digital inputs, HART

Communication(Online configuration)

Navigation

Expert → System → Device options → Communication
Direct access code: 990006-000

Description

Shows hardware or software options.
Cannot be edited.

Selection

USB + Ethernet, USB + Ethernet + RS232/485

Fieldbus(Online configuration)

Navigation

Expert → System → Device options → Fieldbus
Direct access code: 990005-000

Description

Shows hardware or software options.
Cannot be edited.

Selection

Not available, Modbus Slave, Profibus DP, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET

Modbus Master(Online configuration)

Navigation

Endress+Hauser

Expert → System → Device options → Modbus Master
Direct access code: 990008-000

151Appendix

Description

Memograph M, RSG45

Shows hardware or software options.
Cannot be edited.
Detailed descriptions of this device option can be found in the associateddocumentation.

Selection

No, Yes

Application(Online configuration)

Navigation

Expert → System → Device options → Application
Direct access code: 990007-000

Description

Shows hardware or software options.
Cannot be edited.

Selection

Standard, Maths, Telealarm, Telealarm + wastewater, Batch, Telealarm + batch, Energy,
Energy + Telealarm

Front of housing(Online configuration)

Navigation

Expert → System → Device options → Front of housing
Direct access code: 990009-000

Description

Shows hardware or software options.
Cannot be edited.

Selection

DIN rail; With interfaces; Stainless steel without interfaces

17.1.2"Inputs" submenu

Settings for the analog and digital inputs.

"Universal inputs" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → System → Inputs → Universal inputs
Settings for the connected measuring points.

Add input

Navigation

152

Expert → System → Inputs → Universal inputs → Add input
Direct access code: 222000/000
Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Description

Addition of an input that must be switched on and configured according to the input
signal.

Selection

No, Universal input x

Factory setting

No

Delete input

Navigation

Expert → System → Inputs → Universal inputs → Delete input
Direct access code: 222001/000

Description

Delete an input configuration.

Selection

No, Universal input x

Factory setting

No"Universal input x" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → System → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x
View or change settings for the selected channel.
x = place holder for selected universal input

SignalNavigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Signal
Direct access code: 220000-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220000-000; Universal input 12: 220000-011

Description

Select the type of signal connected (current, voltage, etc.). The channel is switched off if nosignal type is selected (factory default).

Selection

Switched off, Current, Voltage, Resistance thermometer, Thermocouple, Pulse counter,
Frequency input, Profibus DP (Option), Modbus Slave (option), Modbus Master (option),
HART (option), EtherNet/IP (option), PROFINET (option)

Factory setting

Switched off

Range

Endress+Hauser

153

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Range
Direct access code: 220001-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220001-000; Universal input 12: 220001-011

Description

Select the input range or which resistance thermometer/thermocouple is connected. The
respective terminal layout can be found in the operating manual or on the rear of the unit.
Only visible if signal ≠ Switched off

Selection

Switched off
Current: 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA, 0-5 mA, 0-20 mA squared, 4-20 mA squared, ±20 mA
Voltage: 0-1 V, 0-10 V, 0-5 V, 1-5 V, ±150 mV, ±1 V, ±10 V, ±30 V, 0-1 V squared, 0-10
V squared, 1-5 V squared
Resistance thermometer: Pt100 (IEC), Pt100 (JIS), Pt100 (GOST), Pt500 (IEC), Pt500 (JIS),
Pt1000 (IEC), Pt1000 (JIS), Pt46 (GOST), Pt50 (GOST), Cu50 (GOST, a=4260), Cu50
(GOST, a=4280), Cu53 (GOST, a=4280), Cu100 (GOST, a=4280)
Thermocouple: Type A (W5Re-W20Re), type B (Pt30Rh-Pt6Rh), type C (W5Re-W26Re),
type D (W3Re-W25Re), type J (Fe-CuNi), type K (NiCr-Ni), type L (Fe-CuNi), type L (NiCrCuNi, GOST), type N (NiCrSi-NiSi), type R (Pt13Rh-Pt), type S (Pt10Rh-Pt), type T (CuCuNi)
Pulse counter
Frequency input
Profibus DP (option)
Modbus (option)
Modbus Master (option)
HART (option)
EtherNet/IP (option)
PROFINET (option)

Factory setting

Switched off

Value

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Value
Direct access code: 220023-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220023-000; Universal input 12: 220023-011

Description

Specify the value, which was read out digitally via HART, that should be recorded/
processed.
Only visible if signal = HART

Selection

Switched off, Value x
All the available values are displayed.

Factory setting

Switched off

Measured value type

Navigation

154

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Measured value type
Direct access code: 220022-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220022-000; Universal input 12: 220022-011
Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Description

Type of measured value received.
Only visible if signal = HART or Modbus Master.

Selection

Instantaneous value, Counter

Factory setting

Instantaneous value

Connection

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Connection
Direct access code: 220002-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220002-000; Universal input 12: 220002-011

Description

Specify whether RTDs are connected as 2-, 3- or 4-wire systems.
Only visible if signal = Resistance thermometer

Selection

2-wire, 3-wire, 4-wireFactory setting

4-wireTransmission protocol

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Transmission protocol
Direct access code: 220049-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220049-000; Universal input 12: 220049-011

Description

Modbus TCP: Addressing Modbus TCP slaves.
Modbus TCP with slave address: Addressing gateways which use a table to link the address
to the right slave.
Modbus RTU via TCP: Transmission of the pure Modbus RTU protocol with CRC sum. Usedin signal converters for Ethernet -> RS485.
Only visible if signal = Modbus MasterSelection

Modbus TCP, Modbus TCP with slave address, Modbus RTU over TCP

Factory setting

Modbus TCP

IP address

Navigation

Description

Endress+Hauser

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → IP address
Direct access code: 220041-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220041-000; Universal input 12: 220041-011
Address of Modbus slave
Only visible if signal = Modbus Master

155

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

User entry

IP address

Factory setting

0.0.0.0

Port

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Port
Direct access code: 220048-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220048-000; Universal input 12: 220048-011

Description

Modbus slave port
Only visible if signal = Modbus Master

User entry

Number (max. 5 digits)

Factory setting

502

Slave address

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Slave address
Direct access code: 220040-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220040-000; Universal input 12: 220040-011

Description

Address of Modbus slave
Only visible if signal = Modbus Master

User entry

Number (1 to 255)

Factory setting

1

Readout function

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Readout function
Direct access code: 220042-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220042-000; Universal input 12: 220042-011

Description

Modbus function with which the registers are to be read out.
Only visible if signal = Modbus MasterSelection

Read Input Register (3xxxxx), Read Holding Register (4xxxxx)

Factory setting

Read Input Register (3xxxxx)

156

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Register address

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Register address
Direct access code: 220043-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220043-000; Universal input 12: 220043-011

Description

Register address 1-65535
Only visible if signal = Modbus Master

User entry

Number (1 to 65535)

Factory setting

1

Data type

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Data type
Direct access code: 220044-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220044-000; Universal input 12: 220044-011

Description

Describes the data type of the value received and its sequence of bytes.
Only visible if signal = Modbus MasterSelection

INT16, UINT16, INT32_B, INT32_L, UINT32_B, UINT32_L, FLOAT_B, FLOAT_L,
DOUBLE_B, DOUBLE_L

Factory setting

FLOAT_B

Channel ident.

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Channel ident.
Direct access code: 220003-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220003-000; Universal input 12: 220003-011

Description

Name of the measuring point connected to this input.
Only visible if signal ≠ Switched off

User entry

Text (16 characters)

Factory setting

Channel x

Plot type

Endress+Hauser

157

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Plot type
Direct access code: 220016-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220016-000; Universal input 12: 220016-011

Description

The analog inputs are scanned in a 100ms cycle. Dependent on the store cycle the selected
data is selected, stored and displayed from the scanned values.

Selection

Instantaneous value, Average, Minimum value, Maximum value, Minimum + Maximum,
Counter, Current value + Counter

Factory setting

AverageTime base

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Time baseDirect access code: 220025-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220025-000; Universal input 12: 220025-011

Description

A current value can be determined from the counter reading with the aid of the time basee.g. input liters, time base = second → current value = liters/second.
Only visible if signal = "Pulse counter" and plot type = "Current value + Counter"

Selection

Second (s), Minute (min), Hour (h), Day (d)Factory setting

Second (s)Engineering unit

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Engineering unit
Direct access code: 220004-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220004-000; Universal input 12: 220004-011

Description

Specify the technical (physical) unit for the measuring point connected to this input.
Only visible if signal ≠ Switched off

User entry

Text (6 characters)

Unit/dimension counter

Navigation

Description

158

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Unit/dimension counter
Direct access code: 220024-00x
Examples: Universal input 1: 220024-000; Universal input 12: 220024-011
Technical unit of the count input, e.g. gal, cf, ... .
Only visible if signal = "Pulse counter" and plot type = "Current value + Counter"

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

User entry

Appendix

Text (max. 6 characters)

Pulse counter

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Pulse counter
Direct access code: 220017-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220017-000; Universal input 12: 220017-011

Description

Specify whether the pulse counter is a fast or slow (up to max. 25 Hz) counter. For
example if the number of state changes from a relay are to be monitored then you mustset "up to 25Hz".
Only visible if signal = Pulse counter

Selection

Up to 13kHz, Up to 25Hz

Factory setting

Up to 13kHz

Pulse value

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Pulse value
Direct access code: 220010-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220010-000; Universal input 12: 220010-011

Description

Factor, that when multiplied by the input signal results in the required physical value.
Example: 1 pulse equals 5 m3 -> enter a "5".
Only visible if signal = Pulse counter

User entry

Number, max. 8 digits

Factory setting

1

Calc. factor

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Calc. factor
Direct access code: 220045-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220045-000; Universal input 12: 220045-011

Description

Factor for converting the counter (e.g. the transmitter returns m³/100 -> desired unit ism³ --> enter 0.01 as the factor)
Only visible if signal = Modbus Master

User entry

Number (max. 15 digits)

Factory setting

1.0

Endress+Hauser

159

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Decimal point

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Decimal point
Direct access code: 220005-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220005-000; Universal input 12: 220005-011

Description

Number of places after decimal point for the display.
Only visible if signal ≠ Switched off

Selection

None, One (X.Y), Two (X.YY), Three (X.YYY), Four (X.YYYY), Five (X.YYYYY)

Factory setting

One (X.Y)

Start value range

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Start value range
Direct access code: 220046-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220046-000; Universal input 12: 220046-011

Description

Scaling of the Modbus value
Here, enter the lower-range value for the scale which corresponds to the start of themeasuring range.
Only visible if signal = Modbus Master

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting0

End value range

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → End value range
Direct access code: 220047-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220047-000; Universal input 12: 220047-011

Description

Scaling of the Modbus value
Here, enter the upper-range value for the scale which corresponds to the end of themeasuring range.
Only visible if signal = Modbus Master

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting

100

Lower frequency

160

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Lower frequency
Direct access code: 220018-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220018-000; Universal input 12: 220018-011

Description

Configure the lower frequency that corresponds to the start of the measuring range.
Only visible if signal = Frequency input

User entry

0 to 12500 (Hz)Factory setting

5.0 (Hz)

Range start

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Range start
Direct access code: 220006-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220006-000; Universal input 12: 220006-011

Description

Transmitters convert the physical measured variable to standardized signals. Enter thestart of the measuring range here.
• The start and end of the measuring range may not be identical.
• The start of the measuring range can also be larger than the end (e.g. for deep
wells).
• The parameter can be defined independently of the number of decimal placesconfigured for the measured value as these are only taken into consideration forthe display.

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting

0 (Depends on the input signal selected)

Upper frequency

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Upper frequency
Direct access code: 220019-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220019-000; Universal input 12: 220019-011

Description

Configure the upper frequency that corresponds to the end of the measuring range.
Only visible if signal = Frequency input

User entry

0 to 12500 (Hz)Factory setting

1000.0 (Hz)Meas. range end

Endress+Hauser

161

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Meas. range end
Direct access code: 220007-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220007-000; Universal input 12: 220007-011

Description

Transmitters convert the physical measured variable to standardized signals. Enter the endof the measuring range here.
• The start and end of the measuring range may not be identical.
• The end of the measuring range can also be smaller than the start (e.g. for deep
wells).
• The parameter can be defined independently of the number of decimal placesconfigured for the measured value as these are only taken into consideration forthe display.

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting

100 (Depends on the input signal selected)

Zoom start

Navigation

Description

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Zoom start
Direct access code: 220011-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220011-000; Universal input 12: 220011-011
If the whole value range is not used, you can configure the lower value of the required
section here. The zoom has no influence on the storage.
• The zoom can also be set outside the measuring range. The only restriction is thatthe start and end of the zoom may not be identical.
• If the signal or the range is changed, the zoom is corrected if it no longer fits themeasuring range.
• The zoom start can also be larger than the zoom end. The device will automaticallyrotate the values on the display.

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting

0 (Depends on the input signal selected)

Zoom end

Navigation

Description

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Zoom end
Direct access code: 220012-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220012-000; Universal input 12: 220012-011
Like "Zoom start". Enter the upper value of the required range here.
• The zoom can also be set outside the measuring range. The only restriction is thatthe start and end of the zoom may not be identical.
• If the signal or the range is changed, the zoom is corrected if it no longer fits themeasuring range.
• The zoom end can also be smaller than the zoom start. The device willautomatically rotate the values on the display.

162

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting

100 (Depends on the input signal selected)

Damping

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Damping
Direct access code: 220008-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220008-000; Universal input 12: 220008-011

Description

The more unwanted interference there is on the measurement signal the higher the valuethat should be entered here. Result: Fast changes will be damped/suppressed.
Only visible if signal = Current, Voltage, Resistance thermometer or Thermocouple

User entry

0 to 999.9 s

Factory setting

Current, voltage: 0.0 s
Resistance thermometer, thermocouple: 0.2 s

Comparison point

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Comparison point
Direct access code: 220013-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220013-000; Universal input 12: 220013-011

Description

Intern: Compensation of the voltage error by measuring the terminal temperature.
Extern: Compensation of the voltage error by using an external controlled comparison
measurement point.
Only visible if signal = Thermocouple

Selection

Internal, External

Factory setting

Internal

Comparison temp.

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Comparison temp.
Direct access code: 220014-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220014-000; Universal input 12: 220014-011

Description

Settings for the external comparison temperature (only when connecting thermocouples).
Only visible if comparison point = External

User entry

0 to 9999999 (Depends on the temperature unit selected)

Factory setting

0 (Depends on the temperature unit selected)

Endress+Hauser

163

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Totalizer(Online configuration)

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Totalizer
Direct access code: 220015-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220015-000; Universal input 12: 220015-011

Description

Initial setting for the totalizer. Useful when continuing measurements recorded to datewith an (electro)-mechanical counter.
Only visible if signal = Pulse counter or counter for Modbus Master

User entry

Number (max. 15 digits)

Factory setting0"Linearization" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Linearization
Contains settings for linearization.
Only current and voltage inputs can be linearized.

Linearization
Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Linearization →Linearization
Direct access code: 230000-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 230000-000; Universal input 12: 230000-011

Description

Specify whether this analog input should be linearized.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory settingNo

Number of points
Navigation

164

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Linearization → Numberof points
Direct access code: 230001-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 230001-000; Universal input 12: 230001-011

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Description

Appendix

Specify how many support points your linearization table has.
Note: The first and last point must always correspond to the start and end of themeasuring range respectively.

User entry

2 to 32

Factory setting

2

Dim. linearized value
Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Linearization → Dim.
linearized value
Direct access code: 230002-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 230002-000; Universal input 12: 230002-011

Description

Unit/dimension for the linearized value.

User entry

Text (max. 6 characters)

Zoom start
Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Linearization → Zoom
start
Direct access code: 230003-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 230003-000; Universal input 12: 230003-011

Description

If the total transmitter range is not used, you can enter the lower value of the required
section here (higher resolution).
Example: Transmitter 0-14 pH, required section: 5-9 pH. Set "5" here. The zoom has noinfluence on the storage.

User entry

0 to 9999999

Factory setting0

Zoom end
Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Linearization → Zoom
end
Direct access code: 230004-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 230004-000; Universal input 12: 230004-011

Description

Like "Zoom start". Enter the upper value of the required range here.
Example: Transmitter 0-14 pH, required section: 5-9 pH. Here: "9".

User entry

0 to 9999999

Factory setting

100

Endress+Hauser

165

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

PointsNavigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Linearization → Points

Description

Enter the support points of the linearization table here.
Note: The first and last point must always correspond to the start and end of themeasuring range respectively. The support points can only be viewed in the PC software
here. To change the support points use the "Edit table" switch.

Sort table
Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Linearization → Points →Sort table
Direct access code: 230020-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 230020-000; Universal input 12: 230020-011

Description

You can sort the linearization table here.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No

Check table
Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Linearization → Points →Check table
Direct access code: 230008-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 230008-000; Universal input 12: 230008-011

Description

Here you can check whether the linearization table has been entered correctly.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory settingNo

x-value (1 to 32)
Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Linearization → Points →x-value (1 to 32)
Direct access code, x-value 1: 230100-0xx
Direct access code, x-value 2: 230102-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1, x-value 1: 230100-000; Universal input 12, x-value 1:
230100-011

Description

x-value for the linearization (value from the device input). e.g. 10 cm corresponds to 20
liters --> enter 10.

User entry

0 to 9999999

166

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Factory setting

Appendix0y-value (1 to 32)
Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Linearization → Points →y-value (1 to 32)
Direct access code, y-value 1: 230101-0xx
Direct access code, y-value 2: 230103-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1, y-value 1: 230101-000; Universal input 12, y-value 1:
230101-011

Description

Enter the y-value that the measured x-value corresponds to e.g. 10 cm corresponds to 20
liters --> enter 20.

User entry

0 to 9999999

Factory setting0"Meas.val. corrct." submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Meas.val. corrct.
Determining the correction values to balance measurement tolerances.
Proceed as follows:• Measure the current value at the lower measurement range.
• Measure the current value at the upper measurement range.
• Enter the lower and upper target and actual value.

OffsetNavigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Meas.val. corrct. → Offset
Direct access code: 220050-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220050-000; Universal input 12: 220050-011

Description

This offset is only effective on the analog input signal (no maths/bus channels).
Only visible if signal = Resistance thermometer or Thermocouple

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting0

Correction RPT

Endress+Hauser

167

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Description

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Meas.val. corrct. →Correction RPT
Direct access code: 220057-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220057-000; Universal input 12: 220057-011
Rear panel temperature correction value for this analog input (only required forthermocouples).
Only visible/editable if the service code has been entered.

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting-3.0 for slot 1+2-3.2 for slot 3-3.5 for slot 4+5

Range start

Target value

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Meas.val. corrct. → Target
value
Direct access code: 220052-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220052-000; Universal input 12: 220052-011

Description

Enter the lower set point here (e.g. measuring range 0°C to 100°C: 0°C).
Only visible if signal = Current or Voltage

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting0

Actual value

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Meas.val. corrct. → Actual
value
Direct access code: 220053-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220053-000; Universal input 12: 220053-011

Description

Enter the lower value actually measured here (e.g. measuring range 0°C to 100°C:
measured value 0.5°C).
Only visible if signal = Current or Voltage

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting0

168

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Meas. range end

Target value

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Meas.val. corrct. → Target
value
Direct access code: 220055-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220055-000; Universal input 12: 220055-011

Description

Enter the upper set point here (e.g. measuring range 0°C to 100°C: 100°C).
Only visible if signal = Current or Voltage

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting

100

Actual value

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Meas.val. corrct. → Actual
value
Direct access code: 220056-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220056-000; Universal input 12: 220056-011

Description

Enter the upper value actually measured here (e.g. measuring range 0°C to 100°C:
measured value 100.5°C).
Only visible if signal = Current or Voltage

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting

100"Totalization" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Totalization
Set up only required for totalization of flow or power consumption.

Totalization

Navigation

Endress+Hauser

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Totalization →Totalization
Direct access code: 220030-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220030-000; Universal input 12: 220030-011
169Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Description

By totalizing the analog signal (e.g. flow rate in m³/h) quantities (in m³) can be calculated.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No

Totalization base

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Totalization →Totalization baseDirect access code: 220031-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220031-000; Universal input 12: 220031-011

Description

Select the required time base. Example: ml/s -> time base seconds (s); m³/h -> time base
hours (h).
Only visible if totalization = Yes

Selection

Second (s), Minute (min), Hour (h), Day (d)Factory setting

Second (s)Unit

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Totalization → Unit
Direct access code: 220032-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220032-000; Universal input 12: 220032-011

Description

Enter the unit for the calculated quantity (e.g. "m³").
Only visible if totalization = Yes

User entry

Text (max. 6 characters)

Low flow cut off

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Totalization → Low flow
cut off
Direct access code: 220033-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220033-000; Universal input 12: 220033-011

Description

If the volume flow recorded is below the set value, these quantities are not added to thecounter.
If the input is scaled from 0 to y, or if the pulse input is used, all values that are smaller
than the set value are not recorded.
If the input is scaled from -x to +y, all values around the zero point (e.g. also negativevalues) are not recorded.
Only visible if totalization = Yes

170

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting0

Calc. factor

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Totalization → Calc.
factorDirect access code: 220034-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220034-000; Universal input 12: 220034-011

Description

Factor for calculating the integrated value (e.g. the transmitter delivers l/s -> totalizationbase = second -> engineering unit required is m³ --> enter factor 0.001)
Only visible if totalization = Yes

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting

1.0

Totalizer(Online configuration)

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Totalization → Totalizer
Direct access code: 220035-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220035-000; Universal input 12: 220035-011

Description

Initial setting for the totalizer. Useful when continuing measurements recorded to datewith an (electro)-mechanical counter.
Only visible if totalization = Yes

User entry

Number (max. 15 digits)

Factory setting0"Fault mode" submenu
In the event of an error the alarm relay is switched if so configured →  131
Navigation
Description

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Fault mode
Contains settings that define how this channel is to react under fault conditions (e.g. cable
open circuit, over range).

NAMUR NE 43

Endress+Hauser

171

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Fault mode → NAMUR
NE 43
Direct access code: 220060-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220060-000; Universal input 12: 220060-011

Description

Activate/deactivate the 4-20mA loop monitoring as per NAMUR recommendation NE 43.
The following error ranges apply when NAMUR NE43 is switched on:≤ 3.8 mA: under range≥ 20.5 mA: over range≤ 3.6 mA or ≥ 21.0 mA: sensor error≤ 2 mA: cable open circuit
Only visible if signal = "Current" and range = "4-20 mA" or "4-20 mA squared".

Selection

Off, On

Factory setting

On

Cable open circuit

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Fault mode → Cable open
circuitDirect access code: 220060-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220060-000; Universal input 12: 220060-011

Description

Cable open circuit detection
Only visible if signal = "Voltage" and range = "1-5 V" or "1-5 V squared".

Selection

Off, On

Factory setting

On

Lower error value

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Fault mode → Lower error
value
Direct access code: 220065-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220065-000; Universal input 12: 220065-011

Description

When NE43 is switched off, defines the value that must be undershot for the device tooutput an error.
Only visible if signal = "Current", range = "4-20 mA" and NAMUR NE 43 = "Off"User entry

Number (max. 8 digits); 0 to 4 mA

Factory setting

3.9mA

Upper error value

172

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Fault mode → Upper error
value
Direct access code: 220066-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220066-000; Universal input 12: 220066-011

Description

When NE43 is switched off, defines the value that must be exceeded for the device tooutput an error.
Only visible if signal = "Current", range = "4-20 mA" and NAMUR NE 43 = "Off"User entry

Number (max. 8 digits); 20 to 22mA

Factory setting

20.8mATime delay

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Fault mode → Time delay
Direct access code: 220064-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220064-000; Universal input 12: 220064-011

Description

The device only reacts (e.g. relay switch) when this condition, open circuit/under range/over range, has been operational for the preset time.
Only visible if NAMUR NE 43 = On

User entry

0 to 99 s

Factory setting

0s

On error

Navigation

Description

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Fault mode → On error
Direct access code: 220061-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220061-000; Universal input 12: 220061-011
Configure what value the device should continue working with (for calculations) if themeasured value is not valid (e.g. cable open circuit).
In the event of an error value, all the dependent calculations are flagged accordingly
as "error value". Counters are not flagged, however!

Selection

Invalid calculation, Error value

Factory setting

Invalid calculation

Error value

Endress+Hauser

173

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Fault mode → Error value
Direct access code: 220062-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220062-000; Universal input 12: 220062-011

Description

The device continues calculating with this value in the event of an error.
Only visible if on error = Error value

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting0

Save event

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Fault mode → Save event
Direct access code: 220063-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220063-000; Universal input 12: 220063-011

Description

Stores a message in the event log when a fault occurs.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory settingNo

Copy settings

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Universal inputs → Universal input x → Copy settings
Direct access code: 220200-0xx
Examples: Universal input 1: 220200-000; Universal input 12: 220200-011

Description

Copies settings from actual channel to selected channel.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x
Users can choose from all the available universal inputs.

Factory setting

Switched off"Digital inputs -> Digital input x" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x
Setting up only required if the digital inputs (e.g. events) are to be used.
x = place holder for selected digital input

Add input
174

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Navigation

Expert → System → Digital inputs → Add input
Direct access code: 252000/000

Description

Addition of a digital input that must be configured according to the function.

Selection

No, Digital input x

Factory setting

No

Delete input

Navigation

Expert → System → Digital inputs → Delete input
Direct access code: 252001/000

Description

Delete an input configuration.

Selection

No, Digital input x

Factory setting

No

Function

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Function
Direct access code: 250000-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250000-000; Digital input 6: 250000-005

Description

Select the required function. Digital inputs are High active; this means the described effectis achieved by a high input.
Low = -3 to +5 V
High = +12 to +30 V

Selection

Switched off, Control input, On/off event, Pulse counter, Operational time, Event +operation time, Quantity from time, Profibus DP (option), Modbus slave (option),
EtherNet/IP (option), PROFINET (option)

Factory setting

Switched off

Function

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Function
Direct access code: 250014-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250014-000; Digital input 6: 250014-005

Description

Specifies how the data from the fieldbus is interpreted/processed.
Visible only if function = Profibus DP, Modbus slave, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET

Endress+Hauser

175

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Selection

Switched off, Control input, On/off event, Pulse counter, Operational time, Event +operation time, Quantity from time

Factory setting

Switched off

Channel ident.

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Channel ident.
Direct access code: 250001-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250001-000; Digital input 6: 250001-005

Description

Measurement point name (e.g. "Pump") or description of the function of this input (e.g.
"Fault message").
Only visible if function ≠ Switched off

User entry

Text (max. 16 characters)

Factory setting

Digital x

Engineering unit

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Engineering unit
Direct access code: 250002-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250002-000; Digital input 6: 250002-005

Description

Technical unit of the count input, e.g. gal, cf, ... .
Only visible if function = Pulse counter or Quantity from time

User entry

Text (max. 6 characters)

Decimal point

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Decimal point
Direct access code: 250004-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250004-000; Digital input 6: 250004-005

Description

Number of places after decimal point for the display.
Only visible if function = Pulse counter or Quantity from time

Selection

None, One (X.Y), Two (X.YY), Three (X.YYY), Four (X.YYYY), Five (X.YYYYY)

Factory setting

One (X.Y)

176

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Input factor in

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Input factor in
Direct access code: 250019-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250019-000; Digital input 6: 250019-005

Description

Defines if the set up factor is respective to 1 second or 1 hour.
Only visible if function = Quantity from time

Selection

Seconds, Hours

Factory setting

Seconds

Pulse value

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Pulse value
Direct access code: 250005-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250005-000; Digital input 6: 250005-005

Description

Factor, that when multiplied by the input signal results in the required physical value.
Examples:1 pulse equals 5 m3-> enter "5" here.
Only visible if function = Pulse counter

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting

1

1 second=/1 hour= (depends on the setting in "Input factor in")Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → 1 second= / 1 hour=
Direct access code: 250005-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250005-000; Digital input 6: 250005-005

Description

Factor, that when multiplied by the operating time results in the required physical value.
Examples:1 second equals 8 l -> enter "8" here.
Only visible if function = Quantity from time

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting

1

Time delay

Endress+Hauser

177

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Time delay
Direct access code: 250017-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250017-000; Digital input 6: 250017-005

Description

The high signal must be active for at least the preset time before the device changes thechannel from low to high.
The change from high to low is always immediate.
Only visible if function = Control input, On/off event, Event+operation time

User entry

0 to 99 999 s

Factory setting0

ActionNavigation

Description

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Action
Direct access code: 250003-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250003-000; Digital input 6: 250003-005
Set up the function of the control input.
Only visible if function = Control input
ActionDescription

Start/stop recording

The device only saves data as long as a high signal is present

Screensaver on

Switches backlighting/display off, low = off, high = on This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Lock setup

The user can only change the setup if a low signal is present

Time synchronization

If a high signal is applied, the device rounds the system time up or down (only for
Low→ High change): 0 to 29 → round down; 30 to 59 → round up

Change group (panelmounted device only)

The display switches to the next active group in the event of a Low→High change.

Set point monitoring
on/off

The entire set point monitoring function of the device can be switched on (for"High") or switched off (for "Low").

Individual LV on/off

Monitoring for a selected limit value can be switched on (for "High") or switched off(for "Low").

Block keyboard/navigator

The device can only be operated if a low signal is present. Otherwise all key
activation and navigator actions are discarded.

 This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Start/stop analysis 1-4

Starts/ends one of the max. 4 external analyses (the analysis runs only as long as
the signal is high). Measured value acquisition for the graphic display continues.
Batches are also started/ended with this function.
Note: This function is not available in the case of batch and control input via amaths channel.

Reset batch number x(option)Resets the automatically generated batch number (1..x) to 0 (in the event of a
LowHigh change).

Batch x limit values on/off Switches the limits of batch x on/off.
(option)The limits relating to the batch are determined based on the group settings (via thechannels assigned to the batch).
If a channel is assigned to several batches, the limits for this channel are notdisabled.

178

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Selection

Switched off, Start/stop recording, Screensaver on, Lock setup, Time synchronization,
Change group, Set point monitoring on/off, Individual LV on/off, Block keyboard/navigator, Start/stop analysis x, Reset batch no. x, Batch x limits on/off

Factory setting

Switched off

Group

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Group
Direct access code: 250015-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250015-000; Digital input 6: 250015-005

Description

Choose the group which should be displayed in the event of a change from Low->High.
Alternatively the next active group can be displayed.
Only visible if function = Control input and action = Change group

Selection

Change automatically, Group x

Factory setting

Change automaticallySet point

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Set point
Direct access code: 250016-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250016-000; Digital input 6: 250016-005

Description

Select the set point which should be switched on or off by means of this control input.
Only visible if function = Control input and action = Individual LV on/off

Selection

Switched off, Universal input xx, Digital input xx, Math xx, Limit xx, Relay xx

Factory setting

Change automatically

Switches relay

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Switches relay
Direct access code: 250006-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250006-000; Digital input 6: 250006-005

Description

Switches the respective relay when the digital input is low or high. Please take note of theconnection hints in the operating manual!
Only visible if function = Control input, On/off event, Event+operation time

Selection

Not used, Relay x
All the available relays are displayed.

Endress+Hauser

179

Appendix

Factory setting

Memograph M, RSG45

Not used

Description 'H'

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Description 'H'
Direct access code: 250007-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250007-000; Digital input 6: 250007-005

Description

Condition description when the digital input is active. This text is both shown on thedisplay and saved to memory.
Only visible if function = Control input, On/off event, Event+operation time

User entry

Text (max. 6 characters)

Factory settingOn

Description 'L'

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Description 'L'
Direct access code: 250008-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250008-000; Digital input 6: 250008-005

Description

Condition description when the digital input is not active. This text is both shown on thedisplay and saved to memory.
Only visible if function = Control input, On/off event, Event+operation time

User entry

Text (max. 6 characters)

Factory setting

Off

Save event

Navigation

Description

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Save event
Direct access code: 250009-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250009-000; Digital input 6: 250009-005
Determines whether the condition change from low to high or high to low is stored in theevent log.
Requires higher memory capacity.
Only visible if function = Control input, On/off event, Event+operation time

Selection

No, Yes, only "On" message

Factory setting

Yes

180

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Event message

Navigation

Description

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Event message
Direct access code: 250018-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250018-000; Digital input 6: 250018-005"Do not acknowledge": No message is shown if the digital input switches.
"Acknowledge": A message window is shown on the screen which has to be acknowledgedby operating a push button.
Only visible if function = Control input, On/off event, Event+operation time
In the case of the DIN rail version, the message can only be acknowledged via the
Web server!

Selection

Do not acknowledge, Acknowledge

Factory setting

Do not acknowledge

Event text L->H

Navigation

Description

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Event text L->H
Direct access code: 250010-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250010-000; Digital input 6: 250010-005
Description of condition change from low to high. Event text is stored (e.g. Start filling).
If no event text is set, the device generates an automatic event text (factory setting),
e.g. digital 1 L->H.
Only visible if function = Control input, On/off event, Event+operation time

User entry

Text (max. 22 characters)

Event text H->L

Navigation

Description

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Event text H->L
Direct access code: 250011-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250011-000; Digital input 6: 250011-005
Description of condition change from high to low. Event text is stored (e.g. Stop filling).
If no event text is set, the device generates an automatic event text (factory setting),
e.g. digital 1 H->L.
Only visible if function = Control input, On/off event, Event+operation time

User entry

Endress+Hauser

Text (max. 22 characters)

181

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Record duration

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Record duration
Direct access code: 250012-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250012-000; Digital input 6: 250012-005

Description

The duration between "On" and "Off" can be recorded. The duration is appended to the "Off"event text (<hhhh>h<mm>:<ss>).
Power failure times do not affect the duration. If the digital channel was "on" before thepower failure and is still "on" after the power failure, the duration continues.
Only visible if function = Control input, On/off event, Event+operation time

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No

Totalizer(Online configuration)

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Totalizer
Direct access code: 250013-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250013-000; Digital input 6: 250013-005

Description

Initial setting for the totalizer. Useful when continuing measurements recorded to datewith an (electro)-mechanical counter.
Only visible if function = Pulse counter, Operational time, Event+operation time or
Quantity from time

User entry

Number (max. 15 digits)

Factory setting0

Copy settings

Navigation

Expert → Inputs → Digital inputs → Digital input x → Copy settings
Direct access code: 250200-00x
Examples: Digital input 1: 250200-000; Digital input 6: 250200-005

Description

Copies settings from actual channel to selected channel.

Selection

No, Digital input x
Users can choose from all the available digital inputs.

Factory setting

No

182

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

17.1.3"Outputs" submenu

Setting up only required if outputs (e.g. relays) are to be used.

"Universal output x" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x
Settings for the universal output selected (current or pulse output).

SignalNavigation

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Signal
Direct access code: 340000-00x
Examples: Universal output 1: 340000-000; Universal output 2: 340000-001

Description

Select the output signal for this channel.

Selection

Switched off, 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA, Pulse output

Factory setting

Switched off

Reference channel

Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Reference channel
Direct access code: 340001-00x
Examples: Universal output 1: 340001-000; Universal output 2: 340001-001

Description

Select the input to which the analog output refers.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Digital input x, Maths x, Limit x, Relay x
All active inputs are available for selection.

Factory setting

Switched off

Start value

Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Start value
Direct access code: 340003-00x
Examples: Universal output 1: 340003-000; Universal output 2: 340003-001

Description

Configure what value corresponds to 0/4 mA.
Only visible if signal = 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA.

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Endress+Hauser

183

Appendix

Factory setting

Memograph M, RSG450Full scale value

Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Full scale value
Direct access code: 340004-00x
Examples: Universal output 1: 340004-000; Universal output 2: 340004-001

Description

Configure what value corresponds to 20 mA.
Only visible if signal = 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA.

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting

100

Damping/filter

Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Damping/filter
Direct access code: 340005-00x
Examples: Universal output 1: 340005-000; Universal output 2: 340005-001

Description

Time constant of the first order low pass for the output signal. This is used to preventstrong fluctuations of the output signal.
Only visible if signal = 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA.

User entry

0 to 999.9 s

Factory setting

0.0 s

Pulse value

Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Pulse value
Direct access code: 340006-00x
Examples: Universal output 1: 340006-000; Universal output 2: 340006-001

Description

The pulse value specifies what quantity an output pulse corresponds to (e.g. 1 pulse = 5
liters).
Only visible if signal = Pulse output

User entry

Number (min. 0.000001; max. 8 characters)

Factory setting

1

184

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

AppendixPulse width

Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Pulse width
Direct access code: 340007-00x
Examples: Universal output 1: 340007-000; Universal output 2: 340007-001

Description

The pulse width limits the maximum possible output frequency of the pulse output. Define
a fixed or dynamic pulse width.
Only visible if signal = Pulse output

SelectionUser-defined, Dynamic (max. 1000ms)

Factory settingUser-defined

Pulse width

Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Pulse width
Direct access code: 340008-00x
Examples: Universal output 1: 340008-000; Universal output 2: 340008-001

Description

You can set the pulse width in the range from 0.5 to 1000 ms here.
Only visible if signal = Pulse output

Value

0.5 to 1000 ms

Factory setting

100 ms"Meas.val. corrct." submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Meas.val. corrct.
Here, you can correct the output current value (necessary only if the device that carries out
the further processing cannot compensate for any measurement section tolerances).
Proceed as follows:
1. On the connected device, read out the displayed value in both the upper and lower
measuring range.
2. Enter the lower and upper target and actual value.
Only visible if signal = 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA.

Lower correction value

Target value

Endress+Hauser

185

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Meas.val. corrct. → Lower correction value→ Target value
Direct access code: 340021-00x
Examples: Universal output 1: 340021-000; Universal output 2: 340021-001

Description

Enter the lower set point here.
Only visible if signal = 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA.

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting0

Actual value
Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Meas.val. corrct. → Lower correction value→ Actual value
Direct access code: 340022-00x
Examples: Universal output 1: 340022-000; Universal output 2: 340022-001

Description

Here, enter the lower actual value which is displayed at the connected device.
Only visible if signal = 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA.

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting0Upper correction value

Target value
Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Meas.val. corrct. → Upper correction value→ Target value
Direct access code: 340024-00x
Examples: Universal output 1: 340024-000; Universal output 2: 340024-001

Description

Enter the upper set point here.
Only visible if signal = 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA.

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting

100

Actual value
Navigation

186

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Meas.val. corrct. → Upper correction value→ Actual value
Direct access code: 340025-00x
Examples: Universal output 1: 340025-000; Universal output 2: 340025-001

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Description

Here, enter the upper actual value which is displayed at the connected device.
Only visible if signal = 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA.

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting

100"Fault mode" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Fault mode
Configure how the analog output should behave in the event of an error (e.g. if the input
channel has a cable open circuit).
Only visible if signal = 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA.

NAMUR NE 43
Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Fault mode → NAMUR NE 43
Direct access code: 340015-00x
Examples: Universal output 1: 340015-000; Universal output 2: 340015-001

Description

Activate/deactivate the 4-20 mA loop output as per NAMUR recommendation NE 43. The
following error ranges apply when NAMUR NE43 is switched on:≤3.8 mA: underrange≥20.5 mA: overrange≤ 3.6 mA or ≥ 21.0 mA: cable open circuit
Only visible if signal = 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA.

Selection

Off, On

Factory settingOn

On error
Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Fault mode → On error
Direct access code: 340016-00x
Examples: Universal output 1: 340016-000; Universal output 2: 340016-001

Description

What value should the output adopt in the event of an error (e.g. cable break or calculated
value invalid)?
Only visible if signal = 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA.

Selection

Invalid calculation, Error value

Factory setting

Invalid calculation

Error value

Endress+Hauser

187

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Universal output x → Fault mode → Error value
Direct access code: 340017-00x
Examples: Universal output 1: 340017-000; Universal output 2: 340017-001

Description

This value is output in the event of an error. Note: Must be between 0 and 22 mA.
Only visible if signal = 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA.

User entry

0 to 22 mA

Factory setting

0 mA"Relay x" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Outputs → Relay x
Contains setup for the selected relay
x = place holder for selected relay

Operating mode

Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Relay x → Operating mode
Direct access code: 330000-00x
Examples: Relay 1:330000-000; Relay 6: 330000-005

Description

Relay function:
NC contact: The relay is closed in its quiescent state (maximum safety).
NO contact: The relay is open in its quiescent state.

Selection

NO contact, NC contact

Factory setting

NO contact

Identifier

Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Relay x → Identifier
Direct access code: 330001-00x
Examples: Relay 1:330001-000; Relay 6: 330001-005

Description

Presettable relay identifier.

User entry

Text (max. 16 characters)

Factory setting

Relay xRemote controlled

188

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Navigation

Expert → Outputs → Relay x → Remote controlled
Direct access code: 330002-00x
Examples: Relay 1:330002-000; Relay 6: 330002-005

Description

Configure whether the relay may be controlled remotely (e.g. PC or SMS).
Only visible with the "Telealarm" option.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory settingNo

17.1.4"Communication" submenu

Set-up required if you are using the USB, RS232, RS485 or Ethernet interface of the unit
(PC operation, serial data read-out, modem operation, etc.).
The various interfaces can be operated in parallel.

Timeout cycl. readout

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Timeout
Direct access code: 150200-000

Description

Monitors whether measured values are read out cyclically via OPC or Fieldbus. Timeout is
modifiable between 1 and 99 seconds. 0 seconds means that the functionality isinactivated.

User entry

0 to 99 s

Factory setting

0s

Switches

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Switches
Direct access code: 150201-000

Description

After the given timeout the dedicated relay/OC is active while no readout of actual
measured values are in process.

Selection

Not used, Relay x
All the available relays are displayed.

Factory setting

Not used

Timeout fieldbus

Endress+Hauser

189

Appendix

Navigation

Memograph M, RSG45

Expert → Communication → Timeout fieldbus
Direct access code: 150210-000

Description

Time within which measured values must be received via fieldbus (otherwise an error will
be set). Not relevant if only measured values are read out.

User entry

1 to 99s

Factory setting

10 s

Function USB-B

 This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Navigation

Expert → Communication → Function USB-B
Direct access code: 012001-000

Description

Determines the operating mode of the USB interface if a cable is connected to the device.

Selection

Always USB
Always Ethernet over USB
By user input

Factory setting

Always USB"Ethernet" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Communication → Ethernet
Contains the set-up required if you are using the Ethernet interface of the unit.

MAC address(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → MAC address
Direct access code: 150000-000
Displays the MAC address

DHCP

Navigation

190

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → DHCP
Direct access code: 150002-000

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Description

Appendix

The device can get its Ethernet settings through DHCP.
Caution: The settings determined are not displayed until after setup acceptance!
Note: The unit always gets the same IP address if the leasing time is set long enoughon the DHCP server. The PC software needs the IP address determined to establish aconnection!

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

Yes

IP address

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → IP address
Direct access code: 150003-000

Description

Please enter the IP address. (given from your network administrator).
Can only be edited if DHCP = No

User entry

IP address

Factory setting

000.000.000.000

Subnetmask

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Subnetmask
Direct access code: 150004-000

Description

Please enter the subnetmask (given from your network administrator).
Can only be edited if DHCP = No

User entry

IP address

Factory setting

255.255.255.000

Gateway

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Gateway
Direct access code: 150005-000

Description

Please enter the gateway (given from your network administrator).
Can only be edited if DHCP = No

User entry

IP address

Factory setting

000.000.000.000

Endress+Hauser

191

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Domain Name System (DNS)

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Domain Name System (DNS)
Direct access code: 150009-000

Description

Please enter the IP-address of the DNS server (you can get this from your network
administrator).
Is needed if you wish to send e-mails and want to use the e-mail server name instead of
the IP address (e.g. smtp.example.org).
Can only be edited if DHCP = No

User entry

IP address

Factory setting

000.000.000.000

Disable port

Navigation

Description

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Disable port
Direct access code: 150020-000
You can disable unused ports for security reasons.
CDI is the protocol that the configuration software or reporting software uses tocommunicate with the device.
All other ports (e.g. SNTP, SMTP, Web server) are automatically disabled if thefunction is switched off.

Selection

CDI, OPC, Modbus Slave, HART IP

Factory setting---- (no port disabled)

Port

Navigation

Description

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Port
Direct access code: 150001-000
The system communicates with the PC software through this communication port.
If your network is protected by a firewall, this port may have to be enabled. Pleasecontact your network administrator if this is the case.

User entry

Number (max. 5 digits)

Factory setting

8000

192

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

OPC port

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → OPC port
Direct access code: 150010-000

Description

Values van be read via OPC server using this communication port.
If your network is protected by a firewall, this port may have to be enabled. Pleasecontact your network administrator if this is the case.

User entry

Number (max. 5 digits)

Factory setting

8002

HART IP port

Navigation

Description

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → HART IP port
Direct access code: 150030-000
Connected HART devices can be accessed via this communication port using thecommunication device type manager (DTM).
Only visible if a HART card is present.
Note: If your network is protected by a firewall, this port will have to be enabled.
Please contact your network administrator if this is the case.
The "RSG45 HART CommDTM" is required in order to access connected HART devices via
the RSG45. This establishes the connection between an FDT Frame application and a
HART device. The DTM for the connected device must also be installed in the FDT Frame
application. The "RSG45 HART CommDTM" is available via www.endress.com/rsg45.
Additional information →  42

User entry

Number (max. 5 digits)

Factory setting

5094

Web server

Navigation

Description

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Web server
Direct access code: 470000-000
Switch the Web server function on or off. The instantaneous values can only be displayedusing an Internet browser when the web browser is activated.
It is only possible to connect to the Web server via the Ethernet interface!

Selection

No (Web server is off), Yes (Web server is active)

Factory setting

Yes

Endress+Hauser

193

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45"Configuration Web server" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server
Configure the Web server or specify which functionality should be possible via Web server.
Only visible if Web server = Yes.
Instantaneous value display is always possible once the Web server is switched on.

Port

Navigation

Description

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Port
Direct access code: 470003-000
The Web server communicates through this communication port.
If your network is protected by a firewall, this port may have to be enabled.
Please contact your network administrator if this is the case.

User entry

Number (max. 5 digits)

Factory setting

80

Setup

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Setup
Direct access code: 470001-000

Description

The device can be configured via Web server.
For security reasons it is advisable to switch off configuration via the Web server aftercommissioning.
With regard to IT security please contact your network administrator if necessary.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

Yes

Firmware update

Navigation

Description

194

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Firmware
updateDirect access code: 470002-000
Firmware can be updated via Web server.

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Selection

No, Yes

Factory settingNo

Remote control This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Remotecontrol
Direct access code: 470004-000

Description

The device can be remote-controlled via the Web server.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No

WebDAV server

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → WebDAV
serverDirect access code: 470006-000

Description

The SD card can be read out via the WebDAV client.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No

Batch (option)

Navigation

Description

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Batch
Direct access code: 470007-000
Batches can be controlled via the Web server.
Detailed descriptions of this device option can be found in the associateddocumentation.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No

Endress+Hauser

195

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Control relays (option)

Navigation

Description

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Control relays
Direct access code: 470008-000
Relays can be remote-controlled via the Web server.
Detailed descriptions of this device option can be found in the associateddocumentation.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory settingNo

Meas. val. without login

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Meas. val.
without login
Direct access code: 470009-000

Description

Allow access to current measured values without logging in.
URL: http:\\<ip>\iv

Selection

Yes, No

Factory setting

Yes"Authentication" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Authentication
Set the passwords for the various users with which the device can be accessed via Web
server.
Only relevant if the device is not protected by user administration.
Operator

Admin

Service

Measured value display

Yes

Yes

Yes

Display instrument health status

Yes

Yes

Yes

Configuration

No

Yes

Yes

Configuration incl. service parameter

No

No

Yes

Update firmware

No

Yes

Yes

WebDAV

Yes

Yes

Yes

Note: The following passwords should be changed during commissioning.

196

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Operator

ID

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Authentication→ ID
Direct access code: 470104-000

Description

ID required in order to access the device. Pay attention to case-sensitivity.
Cannot be edited.

Factory setting

operator

Password

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Authentication→ Password
Direct access code: 470105-000

Description

Enter a password for this user account.
Pay attention to case-sensitivity.

User entry

Text (max. 12 characters)

Factory setting

operator

Administrator

ID

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Authentication→ ID
Direct access code: 470101-000

Description

ID required in order to access the device. Pay attention to case-sensitivity.
Cannot be edited.

Factory setting

admin

Endress+Hauser

197

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Password

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Authentication→ Password
Direct access code: 470102-000

Description

Enter a password for this user account.
Pay attention to case-sensitivity.

User entry

Text (max. 12 characters)

Factory setting

adminServiceID

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Authentication→ ID
Direct access code: 470107-000

Description

ID required in order to access the device. Pay attention to case-sensitivity.
Cannot be edited.

Factory setting

servicePassword

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Authentication→ Password
Direct access code: 470108-000

Description

Enter a password for this user account.
Pay attention to case-sensitivity.

User entry

Text (max. 12 characters)

Factory setting

service"Timeouts" submenu
Navigation
198

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Timeouts
Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Description

Appendix

Timeouts for the Web server. Settings should only be modified if slow network connections
are causing transmission problems.
The settings are only adopted if the browser has been restarted or a new tab opened.
Caution: Settings should only be changed by experts.

Connection quality

Navigation

Description

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Timeouts →Connection quality
Direct access code: 470200-000
Configuration of typical timeout values for the Web server connection.
The default values can be changed if necessary.

Selection

Please select, Local network (LAN/WLAN), Wireless/mobile (fast connect.), Wireless/mobile (slow connect)

Factory setting

Please selectGet timeout

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Timeouts →Get timeout
Direct access code: 470201-000

Description

Maximum time to load a new page before the browser ends the connection.

User entry

5 to 999 s

Factory setting

25

Set timeout

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Timeouts →Set timeout
Direct access code: 470202-000

Description

Maximum time to write a value or execute an action before the browser ends theconnection.

User entry

5 to 999 s

Factory setting

5

Endress+Hauser

199

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Put timeout

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Timeouts →Put timeout
Direct access code: 470203-000

Description

Maximum time to transmit files to or from the device before the browser ends theconnection.

User entry

5 to 9999 s

Factory setting

240

Ping interval

Navigation

Description

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Timeouts →Ping interval
Direct access code: 470204-000
Interval in which the browser checks device reachability.
The check is switched off if 0s is set. This is for diagnostic purposes only and should
not be set!

User entry

0 to 999 s

Factory setting

10

Ping timeout

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Timeouts →Ping timeout
Direct access code: 470205-000

Description

Time in which the device must respond before the browser ends the connection.

User entry

5 to 999 s

Factory setting

15

Ping retry

200

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Timeouts →Ping retry
Direct access code: 470206-000

Description

Number of retries if the device does not respond.

User entry

0 to 5

Factory setting0Poll timeout

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Ethernet → Configuration Web server → Timeouts →Poll timeout
Direct access code: 470207-000

Description

Maximum permitted time to refresh the website.

User entry

5 to 999 s

Factory setting

5"HART" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Communication → HART
Specify the values that should be read out via HART.

Master type

Navigation

Expert → Communication → HART → Master type
Direct access code: 550010-000

Description

Select the HART master type – usually "Primary". Select "Secondary" if another device (e.g. aPLC) is already operating as the primary master.

Selection

Primary, Secondary

Factory setting

Primary

Attempts on error

Navigation

Endress+Hauser

Expert → Communication → HART → Attempts on error
Direct access code: 550011-000
201

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Description

Number of attempts to establish HART communication before a communication error isissued.

User entry

0 to 99

Factory setting

3

Fault mode

Navigation

Description

Expert → Communication → HART → Fault mode
Direct access code: 550013-000
If HART communication is disrupted, the primary process variable (PV) can be calculated if
a valid current is present.
This function is not possible in Multidrop mode.
Start/end of measuring range must be correctly configured.

Selection

PV rendered invalid, Calculate PV based on current

Factory setting

PV rendered invalid

Add value

Navigation

Expert → Communication → HART → Add value
Direct access code: 550300-000

Description

A value read from a connected HART device is added.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No

Delete value

Navigation

Expert → Communication → HART → Delete value
Direct access code: 550301-000

Description

Deletes a process value from the list.

Selection

No, Value x

Factory setting

No

202

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix"Value x" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Communication → HART → Value x
Specify the value that should be read out via HART.
Note: This value must then be assigned to a channel for universal inputs.

Connection
Navigation

Expert → Communication → HART → Value x → Connection
Direct access code: 550000-0xx

Description

Select the physical channel to which the HART device is connected and from which you
wish to query the value.

Selection

Switched off, Channel x

Factory setting

Switched off

Device address
Navigation

Description

Expert → Communication → HART → Value x → Device address
Direct access code: 550001-0xx
Enter the device address of the HART device.
Note: The entered device address must match the address set in the HART device(polling address; HART address).

User entry

0 to 62

Factory setting0

Process variable
Navigation

Expert → Communication → HART → Value x → Process variable
Direct access code: 550002-0xx

Description

Select the process variable that should be requested.

Selection

Primary process variable (PV), Secondary process variable (SV), Third process variable(TV), Fourth process variable (QV)

Factory setting

Primary process variable (PV)Endress+Hauser

203

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Channel ident
Navigation

Expert → Communication → HART → Value x → Channel ident.
Direct access code: 550003-0xx

Description

Designation of the measuring point connected to this input.

User entry

Text (max. 16 characters)

Factory setting

Value x"Serial interface" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Communication → Serial interface
Contains the set-up required if you are using the RS232 or RS485 unit interface.

Type

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Serial interface → Type
Direct access code: 150100-000

Description

Configure how the serial interface is used. Pay attention to the connections.

Selection

RS232, RS485, Debug (only for service purposes)

Factory setting

RS232

ProtocolNavigation

Expert → Communication → Serial interface → Protocol
Direct access code: 150105-000

Description

Define the serial interface protocol.
Note: The device automatically disables incompatible settings.

Selection

PC software, Printer, Modbus Slave (only if type = RS485), Modbus Master (only if type =RS485)

Factory setting

PC software

Baud rate

204

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Serial interface → Baud rate
Direct access code: 150101-000

Description

Transmission speed ("Baud rate") - must be the same as the settings for the PC software.

Selection

9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200

Factory setting

19200

ParityNavigation

Expert → Communication → Serial interface → Parity
Direct access code: 150103-000

Description

ParityOnly visible if protocol ≠ PC software

Selection

None, Even, Odd

Factory setting

None

Stop bits

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Serial interface → Stop bits
Direct access code: 150104-000

Description

Stop bits
Only visible if protocol ≠ PC software

Selection

1, 2Factory setting

1

Device address

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Serial interface → Device address
Direct access code: 150102-000

Description

Every device operating using RS232 / RS485 must have an individual address (00-30).
Only visible if type = RS485

User entry

0 to 30

Factory setting0

Endress+Hauser

205

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45"Modbus Slave" submenu (option)
Navigation
Description

Expert → Communication → Modbus Slave
Configure the Modbus settings for the device.
Detailed descriptions of this device option can be found in the associateddocumentation.

ModbusNavigation

Expert → Communication → Modbus Slave → Modbus
Direct access code: 480000-000

Description

Specify the physical interface you wish to use.

Selection

Not used, RS485, Ethernet

Factory setting

Not used

Device address

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Modbus Slave → Device address
Direct access code: 480001-000

Description

Enter the device address where it should be possible to reach this device in the bus.
Only visible if Modbus = RS485

User entry

1 to 247

Factory setting

1

Port

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Modbus Slave → Port
Direct access code: 480004-000

Description

Port via which the Modbus protocol can be activated.
Only visible if Modbus = Ethernet

User entry

Number (max. 5 digits)

Factory setting

502

206

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix"Serial interface" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Communication → Modbus Slave → Serial interface
Contains settings for the serial interface.
Only visible if Modbus = RS485

Baud rate

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Modbus Slave → Serial interface → Baud rate
Direct access code: 150101-000

Description

Transmission speed ("Baud rate") - must be the same as the settings for the PC software.
Only visible if Modbus = RS485

Selection

9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200

Factory setting

19200

ParityNavigation

Expert → Communication → Modbus Slave → Serial interface → Parity
Direct access code: 150103-000

Description

ParityOnly visible if Modbus = RS485

Selection

None, Even, Odd

Factory setting

None

Stop bits

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Modbus Slave → Serial interface → Stop bits
Direct access code: 150104-000

Description

ParityOnly visible if Modbus = RS485 and parity = None

Selection

1, 2Factory setting1

Endress+Hauser

207

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45"Modbus Master" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Communication → Modbus Master
Configure the Modbus settings for the device.
Detailed descriptions of this device option can be found in the associateddocumentation.

ModbusNavigation

Expert → Communication → Modbus Master → Modbus
Direct access code: 480050-000

Description

Specify the physical interface you wish to use.

Selection

Not used, RS485, Ethernet

Factory setting

Not used

Scan cycle

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Modbus Master → Scan cycle
Direct access code: 480053-000

Description

Cycle time for scanning the end devices.
Only visible if Modbus = RS485

Selection

Off, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 30 s, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min

Factory setting

1s

Response timeout

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Modbus Master → Response timeout
Direct access code: 480054-000

Description

Time within which the system must receive a response from the end device.
Only visible if Modbus = RS485

Selection

Off, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 30 s, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min

Factory setting

1s

208

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Register per command

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Modbus Master → Register per command
Direct access code: 480055-000

Description

Maximum number of registers that can be read out per command.

User entry

3 to 125

Factory setting

20

Connection attempts

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Modbus Master → Connection attempts
Direct access code: 480056-000

Description

Number of repeated connection attempts until a slave signals a timeout.
Only visible if Modbus = RS485

User entry

1 to 10

Factory setting

1

Command distribution

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Modbus Master → Command distribution
Direct access code: 480057-000

Description

Distributed over the scan cycle: The commands are uniformly distributed over the scancycle.
At the start of the scan cycle: The commands are sent at the start of the scan cycle with apause between commands. A new scan commences when the scan cycle ends.
Continuously: The commands are sent continuously with only a pause between commands.
The scan cycle is not taken into account.
Only visible if Modbus = RS485

Selection

Distributed over the scan cycle, At the start of the scan cycle, Continuously

Factory settingDistributed over the scan cycle

Pause between commands

Navigation

Endress+Hauser

Expert → Communication → Modbus Master → Pause between commands
Direct access code: 480058-000
209Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Description

Time system waits between a response and a new command to be sent.
Only visible if Modbus = RS485

User entry

5 to 600000 ms

Factory setting

10 ms"Serial interface" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Communication → Modbus Master → Serial interface
Contains the settings required if you are using the RS485 interface of the device.

Baud rate

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Modbus Master → Serial interface → Baud rate
Direct access code: 150101-000

Description

Transmission speed ("Baud rate") - must be the same as the settings for the PC software.
Only visible if Modbus = RS485

Selection

9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200

Factory setting

19200

ParityNavigation

Expert → Communication → Modbus Master → Serial interface → Parity
Direct access code: 150103-000

Description

ParityOnly visible if Modbus = RS485

Selection

None, Even, Odd

Factory setting

None

Stop bits

Navigation

Description

210

Expert → Communication → Modbus Master → Serial interface → Stop bits
Direct access code: 150104-000
ParityOnly visible if Modbus = RS485 and parity = None
Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Selection

1, 2Factory setting

1"Profibus DP" submenu (option)
Navigation
Description

Expert → Communication → Profibus DP
Configure the Profibus DP settings for the device.
Detailed descriptions of this device option can be found in the associateddocumentation.

Slave address

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Profibus DP → Slave address
Direct access code: 480100-000

Description

Enter the device address where it should be possible to reach this device in the bus.

User entry

1 to 125

Factory setting

1

Show status

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Profibus DP → Show status
Direct access code: 480101-000

Description

The status is shown on the display in addition to the measured value. Status changes are
saved in the event log.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No"Slot x" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Communication → Profibus DP → Slot x
Slot assignment of the channels.
Settings only required if you wish to connect the device to a PLC via Profibus DP.

Master In/Out

Endress+Hauser

211

Appendix

Navigation

Memograph M, RSG45

Expert → Communication → Profibus DP → Slot x → Master In/Out
Direct access code: 480110-0xx
Examples: Slot 1: 480110-000; Slot 16: 480110-015

Description

Selection of the modules that can be selected in the PLC.
AI/AO: Transmission of a floating point number + status.
DI/DO: Transmission of digital statuses.
AI/DI: To the PLC.
AO/DO: From the PLC.

Selection

Not used, 1 AI-PA: 5 Byte, 2 AI-PA: 10 Byte, 3 AI-PA: 15 Byte, 4 AI-PA: 10 Word, 8 DI: 2
Byte, 1 AO-PA: 5 Byte, 2 AO-PA: 10 Byte, 3 AO-PA: 15 Byte, 4 AO-PA: 10 Word, 8 DO: 2
Byte

Factory setting

Not used

Byte x...yNavigation

Expert → Communication → Profibus DP → Slot x → Byte x...y
Direct access code, byte 0..4: 480111-0xx
Direct access code, byte 5..9: 480113-0xx
Direct access code, byte 10..14: 480115-0xx
Direct access code, byte 15..19: 480117-0xx
Examples: Slot 1, byte 0..4: 480111-000; Slot 16: 480111-015

Description

Please select the value that should be used within the module from this address offset.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Digital input x, Maths x, Limit x, Relay x
Note: All active inputs are available for selection.

Factory setting

Switched off-->

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Profibus DP → Slot x → -->Direct access code, byte 0..4 -->: 480112-0xx
Direct access code, byte 5..9 -->: 480114-0xx
Direct access code, byte 10..14 -->: 480116-0xx
Direct access code, byte 15..19 -->: 480118-0xx
Examples: Slot 1, byte 0..4 -->: 480112-000; Slot 16 -->: 480112-015

Description

Data type of the value to be transmitted.
Note: Item only visible if a digital input with the function Operational time, Event+operation time or Quantity from time has been selected under "Byte x..y".

Selection

Not used, Instantaneous value, State, Totalizer, Total operational time

Factory setting

Not used

212

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Bit 0.0 to 0.7

Navigation

Expert → Communication → Profibus DP → Slot x → Bit 0.0 ... 0.7
Direct access code, bit 0.0: 480111-0xx
Direct access code, bit 0.1: 480113-0xx
Direct access code, bit 0.2: 480115-0xx
Direct access code, bit 0.3: 480117-0xx
Direct access code, bit 0.4: 480119-0xx
Direct access code, bit 0.5: 480120-0xx
Direct access code, bit 0.6: 480121-0xx
Direct access code, bit 0.7: 480122-0xx
Examples: Slot 1, bit 0.0: 480111-000; Slot 16: 480111-015

Description

Please select the value that should be used within the module from this address offset.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Digital input x, Maths x, Limit x, Relay x
All active inputs are available for selection.

Factory setting

Switched off

17.1.5"Application" submenu

Configure various application-specific settings (e.g. group settings, limit values, etc.).

"Maths - Maths x" submenu(Online configuration)
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x
Configuration of the mathematics channels.
x = place holder for selected mathematics channel

Function

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Function
Direct access code: 400000-000
Examples: Maths 1: 400000-000; Maths 4: 400000-003

Description

Switch the mathematics channel on or off.

Selection

Switched off, Formula editor
Included with energy package (option): Energy calculation, mass calculation, density
calculation, calculation of enthalpy, mass calculation DP-Flow

Factory setting

Switched off

Endress+Hauser

213

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Channel ident.

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Channel ident.
Direct access code: 400001-000
Examples: Maths 1: 400001-000; Maths 4: 400001-003

Description

Measurement point name (e.g. "Pump") or description of the function of this input (e.g.
"Fault message").

User entry

Text (max. 16 characters)

Factory setting

Maths xFormulaNavigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Formula
Direct access code: 400002-000
Examples: Maths 1: 400002-000; Maths 4: 400002-003

Description

Enter the desired calculation formula.
The formula can be any combination of arithmetic calculations and logical operations.
Analog, digital or already active mathematics channels can be used.
Description of formula editor →  224
Only visible if function = Formula editor

User entry

FormulaApplication

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Application
Direct access code: 400100-0xx
Examples: Maths 1: 400100-000; Maths 4: 400100-003

Description

Please select application.
Only visible with energy package (option) and selected energy function.

Selection

Water heat quantity, Water heat difference, Steam heat quantity, Steam heat difference,
Water/glycol heat difference, Water DP flow, Steam DP flow, Liquids DP flow, Gas DP flow

Factory setting

Water heat quantity or Water DP flow (depends on selected function)

Device type214

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Appendix

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Device type
Direct access code: 400122-0xx
Examples: Maths 1: 400122-000; Maths 4: 400122-003

Description

Configure the transmitter type used.
Only visible with energy package (option) and function = Mass calculation DP-Flow.

Selection

Orifice (corner), Orifice (D/D2), Orifice (flange), Nozzle (ISA1932), Nozzle (l.radius),
Venturi nozzle, Venturi tbe, cast, Venturi tbe, bear., Venturi tbe, steel, V-cone, Pitot tube,
GilfloFactory setting

Orifice (corner)

Flow

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Flow
Direct access code: 400101-0xx
Examples: Maths 1: 400101-000; Maths 4: 400101-003

Description

Please select a flow input.
Only visible with energy package (option) and function = Energy or Mass calculation.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Maths x
All active inputs are available for selection.

Factory setting

Switched off

Engineering unit

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Engineering unit
Direct access code: 400102-0xx
Examples: Maths 1: 400102-000; Maths 4: 400102-003

Description

Please select the unit you would like to use for scaling the selected flow input.
Only visible with energy package (option) and selected flow input.

Selection

m³/h, l/h, ft³/m, ft³/h, gpm, gal/h, kg/h, t/h, ton/h, lb/h

Factory setting

m³/hFlow installation point

Navigation

Endress+Hauser

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Flow installation point
Direct access code: 400103-0xx
Examples: Maths 1: 400103-000; Maths 4: 400103-003

215

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Description

Please specify where the flow sensor is installed. This is important so that the correcttemperature is used for density calculation.
Only visible with energy package (option) and active flow input.

Selection

Steam, Water, Warm, Cold (depending on the selected application)

Factory setting

Steam or warm (depending on the selected application)

Pressure

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Pressure
Direct access code: 400104-0xx
Examples: Maths 1: 400104-000; Maths 4: 400104-003

Description

Please select a pressure input. If you select "deactivated" the temperature input is used to
calculate the saturated steam conditions.
Only visible with energy package (option) and selected steam application.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Maths x
All active inputs are available for selection.

Factory setting

Switched off

Engineering unit

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Engineering unit
Direct access code: 400105-0xx
Examples: Maths 1: 400105-000; Maths 4: 400105-003

Description

Please select the unit used for scaling the selected pressure input.
Only visible with energy package (option) and selected steam application.
Only visible with energy packet (option) and active pressure input.

Selectionbar (a), psi (a), MPa (a), inH20 (a), bar (g), psi (g), MPa (g), inH20 (g)Factory settingbar (a)Temperature (water/steam/warm)

Navigation

216

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Temperature (water/steam/warm)
Direct access code: 400106-0xx
Examples: Maths 1: 400106-000; Maths 4: 400106-003

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Description

Please select the temperature input used to measure the warm side (or steam line). If"Switched off" is selected the pressure input is used to calculate the saturated steam
conditions (only for steam applications).
Only visible with energy package (option) and selected energy function.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Maths x
All active inputs are available for selection.

Factory setting

Switched off

Temperature (steam/cold)

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Temperature (steam/cold)
Direct access code: 400107-0xx
Examples: Maths 1: 400107-000; Maths 4: 400107-003

Description

Please select the temperature input used to measure the cold side (or condensate line).
Only visible with energy package (option) and selected heat difference measurement.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Maths x
All active inputs are available for selection.

Factory setting

Switched off

Engineering unit

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Engineering unit
Direct access code: 400108-0xx
Examples: Maths 1: 400108-000; Maths 4: 400108-003

Description

Please select the unit used for scaling the selected temperature sensors.
Only visible with energy package (option) and selected energy function.

Selection°C, °F, K

Factory setting°C

MediumNavigation

Description

Endress+Hauser

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Medium
Direct access code: 400110-0xx
Examples: Maths 1: 400110-000; Maths 4: 400110-003
Select a cooling medium. If the medium used is not in list, select ethylene glycol or
propylene glycol.
Only visible with energy package (option) and application = Water/glycol heat difference.
217

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Selection

Ethylene-glycol, Antifrogen N, Glykosol N, Propylene-glycol

Factory setting

Ethylene-glycol

Water/glycol concentration

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Water/glycol concentration
Direct access code: 400109-0xx
Examples: Maths 1: 400109-000; Maths 4: 400109-003

Description

Concentration of the water/glycol mixture in vol % (0-60 %).
Only visible with energy package (option) and application = Water/glycol heat difference.

User entry

0 to 60 %Factory setting

20 %The result is

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → The result is
Direct access code: 400003-000
Examples: Maths 1: 400003-000; Maths 4: 400003-003

Description

Configure which data type the calculation returns. This setting affects how the channel
saves and is displayed.
If you add 2 analog channels, for example, the result is an "instantaneous value".
If you logically link 2 channels, for example, (digital 1 AND digital 2), the result is a "state"(on/off).
Instantaneous value: If, for example, 2 analog channels are added (AI(1;1)+AI(1;2)), theresult is an instantaneous value.
State: The state/status of an individual analog input can be output as the result. A relay
can also be actuated as a result.
Counter: If, for example, 2 counters from digital inputs are added (DI(3;1)+DI(3;5)), theresult is a counter.
Operating time from status: The status (logical "1" or "0") of one or more digital inputs thatare connected by addition can be analyzed. If the result of the calculation is not equal to 0,
the counter for the operating time starts. The time is increased by 0.1 s every 100 ms.
Operating time from total: If several digital inputs that are configured as "operational time"
are added together, the result is the total of all the individual operating times.
Control input: The function corresponds to a digital input that has been configured as acontrol input.

Selection

Instantaneous value, State, Counter, Operating time from status, Operating time fromtotal, Control input, Efficiency

Factory setting

Instantaneous value

218

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Plot type

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Plot type
Direct access code: 400015-000
Examples: Maths 1: 400015-000; Maths 4: 400015-003

Description

The mathematics channels are recalculated every 100 ms.
Depending on the save cycle, the selected data are determined/saved from the calculated
values.

Selection

Instantaneous value, Average, Minimum value, Maximum value, Minimum + Maximum,
Counter, Current value + Counter

Factory setting

AverageEngineering unit

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Engineering unit
Direct access code: 400004-000
Examples: Maths 1: 400004-000; Maths 4: 400004-003

Description

Unit of the calculated value.
Only visible if the result is = Instantaneous value, Counter or Efficiency

User entry

Text (max. 6 characters)

Engineering unit

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Engineering unit
Direct access code: 400111-000
Examples: Maths 1: 400111-000; Maths 4: 400111-003

Description

Unit of the calculated value.
Only visible with energy package (option) and selected energy function.

Selection

kW, MW, GJ/h, kBtu/m, kBtu/h, MBtu/h, ther/m, ther/h, ton, RT, kg/h, t/h, lbs/h, ton/h,kg/m³, lb/ft³, kJ/kg, Btu/lb

Factory setting(Depends on the selected function)

Decimal point

Endress+Hauser

219

Appendix

Navigation

Memograph M, RSG45

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Decimal point
Direct access code: 400005-000
Examples: Maths 1: 400005-000; Maths 4: 400005-003

Description

Number of places after decimal point for the display.
Only visible if function = Formula editor, Energy calculation, Mass calculation, Density
calculation, Calculation of enthalpy and the result is = Instantaneous value, Counter orEfficiency.

Selection

None, One (X.Y), Two (X.YY), Three (X.YYY), Four (X.YYYY), Five (X.YYYYY)

Factory setting

One (X.Y)

ActionNavigation

Description

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Action
Direct access code: 400006-000
Examples: Maths 1: 400006-000; Maths 4: 400006-003
Set up the function of the control input.
Only visible if the result is = Control input
ActionDescription

Start/stop recording

The device only saves data as long as a high signal is present

Screensaver on

Switches backlighting/display off, low = off, high = on

Lock setup

The user can only change the setup if a low signal is present

Time synchronization

If a high signal is applied, the device rounds the system time up or down (only for
Low→ High change): 0 to 29 → round down; 30 to 59 → round up

Change the group

The display switches to the next active group in the event of a Low→High change.

Set point monitoring
on/off

The entire set point monitoring function of the device can be switched on (for"High") or switched off (for "Low").

Individual LV on/off

Monitoring for a selected limit value can be switched on (for "High") or switched off(for "Low").

Block keyboard/navigator

The device can only be operated if a low signal is present. Otherwise all key
activation and navigator actions are discarded.

Start/stop analysis 1-4

Starts/ends one of the max. 4 external analyses (the analysis runs only as long as
the signal is high). Measured value acquisition for the graphic display continues.
Batches are also started/ended with this function.
Note: This function is not available in the case of batch and control input via amaths channel.

Reset batch number x(option)Resets the automatically generated batch number (1..x) to 0 (in the event of a
LowHigh change).

Batch x limit values on/off Switches the limits of batch x on/off.
(option)The limits relating to the batch are determined based on the group settings (via thechannels assigned to the batch).
If a channel is assigned to several batches, the limits for this channel are notdisabled.

Selection

220

Switched off, Start/stop recording, Screensaver on, Lock setup, Time synchronization,
Change group, Set point monitoring on/off, Individual LV on/off, Block keyboard/navigator, Start/stop analysis x, Reset batch no. x, Batch x limits on/off

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Factory setting

Appendix

Switched off

Set point

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Set point
Direct access code: 400019-000
Examples: Maths 1: 400019-000; Maths 4: 400019-003

Description

Select the set point which should be switched on or off by means of this control input.
Only visible if action = Individual LV on/off

Selection

Switched off, Limit x

Factory setting

Switched off

Switches relay

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Switches relay
Direct access code: 400007-000
Examples: Maths 1: 400007-000; Maths 4: 400007-003

Description

Switches the respective relay when the digital input is low or high.
Only visible if the result is = Control input or State

Selection

Not used, Relay x
All the available relays are displayed.

Factory setting

Not used

Description 'H'

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Description 'H'
Direct access code: 400008-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400008-000; Maths 4: 400008-003

Description

Condition description when the digital input is active. This text is both shown on thedisplay and saved to memory.
Only visible if the result is = Control input or State

User entry

Text (max. 6 characters)

Factory setting

On

Endress+Hauser

221

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Description 'L'

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Description 'L'
Direct access code: 400009-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400009-000; Maths 4: 400009-003

Description

Condition description when the digital input is not active. This text is both shown on thedisplay and saved to memory.
Only visible if the result is = Control input or State

User entry

Text (max. 6 characters)

Factory setting

Off

Save event

Navigation

Description

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Save event
Direct access code: 400010-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400010-000; Maths 4: 400010-003
Determines whether the condition change from low to high or high to low is stored in theevent log.
Requires higher memory capacity.
Only visible if the result is = Control input or State

Selection

No, Yes, only "On" message

Factory setting

Yes

Event message

Navigation

Description

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Event message
Direct access code: 400018-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400018-000; Maths 4: 400018-003"Do not acknowledge": No message is shown if the state of the mathematics channelchanges.
"Acknowledge": A message window is shown on the screen which has to be acknowledgedby operating a push button.
Only visible if the result is = Control input or State
Note: In the case of the DIN rail version, the message can only be acknowledged via
the Web server!

Selection

222

Do not acknowledge, Acknowledge

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Factory setting

Appendix

Do not acknowledge

Event text L->H

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Event text L->H
Direct access code: 400011-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400011-000; Maths 4: 400011-003

Description

Description of condition change from low to high. Event text is stored (e.g. Start filling).
Only visible if the result is = Control input or State

User entry

Text (max. 22 characters)

Event text H->L

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Event text H->L
Direct access code: 400012-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400012-000; Maths 4: 400012-003

Description

Description of condition change from high to low. Event text is stored (e.g. Stop filling).
Only visible if the result is = Control input or State

User entry

Text (max. 22 characters)

Record duration

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Record duration
Direct access code: 400013-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400013-000; Maths 4: 400013-003

Description

The duration between "On" and "Off" can be recorded. The duration is appended to the "Off"event text (<hhhh>h<mm>:<ss>).
Power failure times do not affect the duration. If the digital channel was "on" before thepower failure and is still "on" after the power failure, the duration continues.
Only visible if the result is = Control input or State

Selection

No, Yes

Factory settingNo

Zoom start

Endress+Hauser

223

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Zoom start
Direct access code: 400016-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400016-000; Maths 4: 400016-003

Description

If the whole value range is not used, you can configure the lower value of the required
section here. The zoom has no influence on the storage.
Only visible if the result is = Instantaneous value

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting0

Zoom end

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Zoom end
Direct access code: 400017-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400017-000; Maths 4: 400017-003

Description

Like "Zoom start". Enter the upper value of the required range here.
Only visible if the result is = Instantaneous value

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting

100

Totalizer(Online configuration)

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Totalizer
Direct access code: 400014-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400014-000; Maths 4: 400014-003

Description

Initial setting for the totalizer. Useful when continuing measurements recorded to datewith an (electro)-mechanical counter.
Only visible if the result is = Counter, Operating time from status or Operating time from
total

User entry

Number (max. 15 digits)

Factory setting0

Formula editorEnter the desired calculation formula.
The formula can be any combination of arithmetic calculations and logical operations.

224

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Analog, digital or already active mathematics channels can be used.

Formula editor

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Formula
Direct access code: 400002-000
x = place holder for selected mathematics channel
A text field with the formula currently used appears. If the field is empty a formula
has not yet been defined for the mathematics channel.

Description

Individual channels can be mathematically linked and calculated with functions. The
mathematics channels calculated in this way are treated as "real" channels, regardless ofwhether they are connected conventionally or via fieldbus. Enter the desired calculation
formula.
The formula can be any combination of arithmetic calculations and logical operations.
Analog and digital channels can be used, as can mathematics channels that are alreadyactive.
A formula with up to 200 characters can be created using this editor. If the formula isfinished, click OK to close the editor and accept the formula entered. The common entry
and arithmetic operators and inputs are described in detail in the following sections.
Inputs
Inputs are described in the formula using the following syntax:
Input type (signal type;channel number)Type of input

Description

AI

Analog inputs

DI

Digital inputs

MI

Mathematics inputs

Signal type

Description

1

Instantaneous value (measured value)

2

State

3

Counter/operational time5

Validity:
The validity of an analog channel or a mathematics channel is relayed.
The relayed value of the function is 0 in the event of:• Open circuit• Invalid measured value• Sensor error• Input signal too high/low• Error value
The relayed value of the function is 1 in the event of:
Measured value OK, even if the limit value is breached

Endress+Hauser

6

Delta count7 to 10Analysis 1 to 4

225

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Signal type

Description

11

Totalizer

12

Duration

Not all signal types are available for each input type. These depend on the respective
device options.
Channel number:
Analog channel 1 = 1, analog channel 2 = 2, digital channel 1 = 1, …
Examples:DI(2;4)

State of digital channel 4AI(1;1)

Instantaneous value of analog channel 1

Status of a limit value:
LMT (type, limit number)Type

Description

1"Instantaneous value": Currently set limit value

2"State": The function returns the status of a limit value
The result is 1 if the limit value is violated.
The result is 0 if
• The limit value is not violated• The limit value is not switched on• Limits monitoring is switched off (e.g. per control input)

Examples:LMT (1;1)

Instantaneous value of limit value 1

LMT (2;3)State of limit value 3

Priority of operators / functions
The formula is processed based on universally applicable mathematics rules:• Parentheses first• Exponents before multiplication or division• Multiplication or division before addition or subtraction• Calculate from left to rightOperators
Arithmetic operators:

226

Operator

Function+

Addition-

Subtraction / negative sign*

Multiplication/

Division%

Modulo (remainder of division x/y), see function "mod"^x to the power of yEndress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Relational operators:
Operator

Function>

Greater than>=Greater than or equal to<Less than<=Less than or equal to=Equals<>Not equal to

Logical operators:
Functi Syntax
onDescription

Example||Value1 ||Value2

Logical "or" (see also function "or")DI(2;1) || DI(2;2)&&

Value1 &&Value2

Logical "and" (see also function "and")DI(2;1) && DI(2;2)

Functi Syntax
onDescription

ExampleInln(number)

Returns the natural logarithm of a number. Natural
logarithms are based on a constant e(2.71828182845904). For values ≤ 0 the result isundefined. The device continues with 0ln(86) = 4.454347

log

log(number)

Calculates the logarithm of the argument for base 10. For
values ≤ 0 the result is undefined. The device continues
with 0.

log(10) = 1

exp

exp(number)Exponentiates the base e with the number defined as theargument. The constant e is the basis of the natural
logarithm and has the value 2.71828182845904.

exp(2.00) =7.389056

abs

abs(number)

Returns the absolute value of a number. The absolute valueof a number is the number without its algebraic sign.

abs(-1.23) = 1.23

pi

pi()

Returns the value of the number PI(3.14159265358979323846264)

sqrt

sqrt(number)

sqrt calculates the positive square root of the argument"Number". The result is undefined for negative values. The
device continues with 0.

FunctionsStandard functions:

Endress+Hausersqrt(4) = 2

227

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Functi Syntax
onDescription

Examplemod

mod(number;divisor)Returns the remainder of a division. The result has thesame algebraic sign as the divisor. If the divisor has thevalue 0, the result is undefined. The device continues with0.

mod(5;2) = 1

rnd

rnd(number;number_digits)

Rounds a number to a certain number of decimal places.
"Number" is the number to which you wish to round up/
down.
"Number_digits" indicates to how many decimal places you
wish to round the number up/down.

rnd(2.15;1) = 2.2
rnd(2.149;1) = 2.1
rnd(-1.475;2) = -1.48
rnd(-1.473;2) = -1.47
rnd(21.5;-1) = 20
rnd(5.5;-2) = 10
rnd(5.5;-3) = 0

 Notes:• If "Number_digits" is greater than 0 (zero), thenumber is rounded to the specified number ofdecimal places.
• If "Number_digits" is equal to 0, the number isrounded to the next whole number.
• If "Number_digits" is less than 0, the part of thenumber to the left of the decimal separator isrounded.

Trigonometric functions:
Functi Syntax
onDescription

ExampleradConversion from degrees to radianrad(270) = 4.712389

Conversion from radian to degrees

grad(pi()) = 180

rad(number)degree degreess(number)

The following functions expect an angle in the radian as the argument. If the angle lies inthe degree, it must be converted to the radian by multiplying it with pi()/180.
Alternatively the function "rad" can be used:

228

Functi Syntax
onDescription

Examplesinsin(number)

Returns the sine of a number

sin(pi()) -> sine of pi
radiansin(30*pi()/180) ->sine of 30 degrees
(0.5)

cos

cos(number)

Conversion from radian to degrees

grad(pi()) = 180tantan(number)

Returns the tangent of the argumenttan(0.785) = 0.99920

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

With the following functions the returned angle is specified in radian with a value
between –pi/2 and +pi/2. If the result is to be expressed in degrees, the respective resultmust be multiplied by 180/pi() or the "Degrees" function used:
Functi Syntax
onDescription

Exampleasin

asin(number)

Returns the arc sine or inverse sine of a number (inverse
function). The arc sine expects a real argument in the range
from -1 to +1. In the event of values outside this range, thedevice continues with 0.

arcsin(-0.5) = 0.5236
arcsin(-0.5)*180/
pi() = -30°

acos

acos(number)

Returns the arc cosine or inverse cosine of a number(inverse function). The arc cosine expects a real argumentin the range from -1 to +1. In the event of values outside
this range, the device continues with 0.

arccos(-0.5) =2.094395

atan

atan(number)

Returns the arc tangent or inverse tangent of a number(inverse function).

atan(1) = 0.785398

Functi Syntax
onDescription

Exampleif

if(check;
then_value;otherwise_value)"Check" is any value or expression; the result can be TRUE or
FALSE. This argument can adopt any comparison
calculation operator. "Then_value" is the value returned if"Check" is TRUE. "Otherwise_value" is the value returned if"Check" is FALSE.

if(x>10;1;0)If value x is greaterthan 10 the function
returns 1, otherwise 0oror(true1;true2)

Returns TRUE if an argument is TRUE. Returns FALSE if allarguments are FALSE.
Note: See also operator "||"

or(2>1;3>2) = trueor(2<1;3>2) = trueor(2<1;3<2) = falseandand(true1;true2)

Returns TRUE if both arguments are TRUE. If one of thearguments is FALSE, this function returns the value FALSE
Note: See also operator "&&"

and(2>1;3>2) = true
and(2<1;3<2) = falsenotnot(truth value)

Inverts the value of an argument. NOT can be used to
specify that a value does not match a specific value.

not(false) = true

Logical functions:

XX in the following functions stands for one of the inputs described under →  225.
Range functions can only ever be executed via one input type.
Range functions:
Functi Syntax
on
sumX
X

sumXX(Type;Fro Totals the values for the specified range of input signals.
m;To)"Type": Signal type (see →  225))"From": Channel number from which the values should be
totaled (1 = channel 1)"To": Channel number to which the values should be totaled(1 = channel 1)

ExamplesumXX (1;2;5) = sumof all instantaneous
values from channel 2
to 5

avgXX avgXX(Type;From;To)

Calculates the average for the specified range of input
signals.

avgXX(1;1;6)

minXX minXX(Type;From;To)

Returns the minimum value for the specified range of input
signals.

minXX(1;1;6)

maxXX(Type;Fro Returns the maximum value for the specified range of inputm;To)signals.

maxXX (1;1;6)

maxX
X

Endress+Hauser

Description

229

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Date/time functions:
Functi Syntax
onDescription

Example

dow

dow()

Returns the current day of the week as a number between 1 Sunday = 1
and 7.
Monday = 2
Tuesday = 3
Wednesday = 4
Thursday = 5
Friday = 6
Saturday = 7

timetime()

Returns the current time in seconds.

00:00 = 0 s
12:00 = 43,200 s
23:59:59 = 86,399 s

Decimal separator
Both the decimal point and the decimal comma can be used in the formula editor.
Thousand separators are not supported.
Check whether formula is valid or malfunctions
A formula is invalid if:• The channels used are not switched on or are in the wrong operating mode (is notverified during formula entry as the channel could be switched on subsequently)• It contains invalid characters/formulas/functions/operators• Syntax errors (e.g. wrong number of parameters) occur in the formulas• There are incorrect parentheses in the formula (number of open parentheses unequal tonumber of closed parentheses)• Division is by zero
• A channel refers to itself (infinite recursion)
Invalid formulas are deactivated when the setup is accepted or the device is started.
Undetectable errors: wherever possible, errors in the formula are reported immediately
during input. However, given the possible complexity of the formula entered (e.g. nested
formulas) it is not possible to detect every error.

"DP flow" submenu (option "Energy package")
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow
Configuration of a flow measurement following the differential pressure process.
Only visible if function = Mass calculation DP-Flow

Differential pressure

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → Differential pressure
Direct access code: 400115-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400115-000; Maths 4: 400115-003

Description

Please select differential pressure input.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Digital input x, Maths x
All active inputs are available for selection.

230

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Factory setting

Appendix

Switched off

DP unit

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → DP unit
Direct access code: 400116-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400116-000; Maths 4: 400116-003

Description

Unit of the differential pressure.

Selectionmbar, inH2O

Factory setting

mbar

Diameter unit

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → Diameter unit
Direct access code: 400118-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400118-000; Maths 4: 400118-003

Description

Unit of the internal diameter of the pipe.

Selection

mm, Inch

Factory settingmm

D at 20 °C

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → D at 20°C
Direct access code: 400119-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400119-000; Maths 4: 400119-003

Description

Internal pipe diameter (D) under design conditions at 20 °C/68 °F.

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting

100 (mm or inches)d at 20 °C

Endress+Hauser

231

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → d at 20°C
Direct access code: 400120-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400120-000; Maths 4: 400120-003

Description

Internal pipe diameter of the throttle (d) under design conditions at 20 °C/68 °F.

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting

70 (mm or inches)

K-factor

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → K-factor
Direct access code: 400121-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400121-000; Maths 4: 400121-003

Description

Set the K-factor (blockage factor) for the pitot tube (see nameplate on the probe).
Only visible if type = Pitot tube

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting

0.6

Pipe material

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → Pipe material
Direct access code: 400127-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400127-000; Maths 4: 400127-003

Description

Material of the pipe.

Selection

C-steel, stainless steel, 1.5415 / A182F1, 1.7335 / A182F12, 1.7380 / A182F22,
1.4922, 1.4401 / 316, 1.4404 / 316L, 1.4571 / 316Ti

Factory setting

C-steelDensity

Navigation

Description

232

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → Density
Direct access code: 400123-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400123-000; Maths 4: 400123-003
Please select density input or mathematics channel, in which the density is calculated.
Only visible if application = DP-Flow liquids or DP-Flow gas

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Digital input x, Maths x
All active inputs are available for selection.

Factory setting

Switched off

Density unit

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → Density unit
Direct access code: 400124-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400124-000; Maths 4: 400124-003

Description

Please select the density unit.
Only visible if application = DP-Flow liquids or DP-Flow gas

Selection

kg/m³, lb/ft³

Factory setting

kg/m³

Design density

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → Design density
Direct access code: 400125-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400125-000; Maths 4: 400125-003

Description

Density under design conditions (at design pressure/temperature).
Only visible if type = V-Cone or Gilflo

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting

1000 (kg/m³ or lb/ft³)

Isentropic exponent

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → Isentropic exponent
Direct access code: 400128-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400128-000; Maths 4: 400128-003

Description

Input of the kappa isentropic exponent. (Required in order to calculate the expansion
number).
Only visible if application = DP-Flow gas

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting

1,2

Endress+Hauser

233

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45"Viscosity" submenu

Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → Viscosity
Input of the viscosity at two support points. (Needed to calculate the Reynolds number andflow coefficient).
Only visible if application = DP-Flow liquids or DP-Flow gas

Point 1

Temperature

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → Viscosity → Temperature
Direct access code: 400130-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400130-000; Maths 4: 400130-003

Description

Temperature

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting0

Viscosity

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → Viscosity → Viscosity
Direct access code: 400131-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400131-000; Maths 4: 400131-003

Description

Viscosity at the specified temperature.

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting

1 cp

Point 2Temperature

234

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → Viscosity → Temperature
Direct access code: 400135-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400135-000; Maths 4: 400135-003

Description

Temperature

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting

100

Viscosity

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → DP-Flow → Viscosity → Viscosity
Direct access code: 400136-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400136-000; Maths 4: 400136-003

Description

Viscosity at the specified temperature.

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting

0.3 cp"Totalization" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Totalization
Settings only needed if the calculated value - e.g. for quantity calculation - should be
integrated. Analysis time frames, see "Signal analysis".

Totalization

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Totalization → Totalization
Direct access code: 400050-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400050-000; Maths 4: 400050-003

Description

By totalizing the analog signal (e.g. flow rate in m³/h) quantities (in m³) can be calculated.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No

Totalization base

Endress+Hauser

235

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Totalization → Totalization baseDirect access code: 400051-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400051-000; Maths 4: 400051-003

Description

Select the required time base. Example: ml/s -> time base seconds (s); m³/h -> time base
hours (h).
Only visible if totalization = Yes

Selection

Second (s), Minute (min), Hour (h), Day (d)Factory setting

Second (s)Unit

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Totalization → Unit
Direct access code: 400052-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400052-000; Maths 4: 400052-003

Description

Enter the unit for the calculated quantity (e.g. "m³").
Only visible if totalization = Yes

User entry

Text (max. 6 characters)

Total. eng. unit (option "Energy package")

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Totalization → Total. eng. unit
Direct access code: 400112-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400112-000; Maths 4: 400112-003

Description

Select the unit of the quantity determined by means of totalization here.
Only visible if function = Energy or Mass calculation and totalization = Yes

Selection

kWh, MWh, MJ, GJ, kBtu, MBtu, tonh, therm, kg, t, lbs, ton

Low flow cut off

Navigation

236

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Totalization → Low flow cut off
Direct access code: 400053-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400053-000; Maths 4: 400053-003

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Description

If the volume flow recorded is below the set value, these quantities are not added to thecounter.
If the input is scaled from 0 to y, or if the pulse input is used, all values that are smaller
than the set value are not recorded.
If the input is scaled from -x to +y, all values around the zero point (e.g. also negativevalues) are not recorded.
Only visible if totalization = Yes

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting0

Calc. factor

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Totalization → Calc. factor
Direct access code: 400054-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400054-000; Maths 4: 400054-003

Description

Factor for calculating the integrated value(e.g. the transmitter delivers l/s -> totalizationbase = second -> engineering unit required is m³ --> enter factor 0.001)
Only visible if totalization = Yes

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting

1.0

Totalizer(Online configuration)

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Totalization → Totalizer
Direct access code: 400055-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400055-000; Maths 4: 400055-003

Description

Initial setting for the totalizer. Useful when continuing measurements recorded to datewith an (electro)-mechanical counter.
Only visible if totalization = Yes

User entry

Number (max. 15 digits)

Factory setting0"Linearization" submenu
Navigation
Description

Endress+Hauser

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Linearization
Linearization settings.
Only visible if function = Formula editor
237

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Linearization

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Linearization → Linearization
Direct access code: 400301-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400301-000; Maths 4: 400301-003

Description

Specify whether this input should be linearized.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory settingNo

Number of points

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Linearization → Number of points
Direct access code: 400302-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400302-000; Maths 4: 400302-003

Description

Specify how many support points your linearization table has.
Note: The first and last point must always correspond to the start and end of themeasuring range respectively.

User entry

2 to 32

Factory setting

2

Dim. linearized value

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Linearization → Dim. linearized value
Direct access code: 400303-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400303-000; Maths 4: 400303-003

Description

Unit/dimension for the linearized value.
Note: The first and last point must always correspond to the start and end of themeasuring range respectively.

User entry

Text (max. 6 characters)

Zoom start

Navigation

238

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Linearization → Zoom start
Direct access code: 400304-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400304-000; Maths 4: 400304-003

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Description

If the total transmitter range is not used, you can enter the lower value of the required
section here (higher resolution).
Example: Transmitter 0-14 pH, required section: 5-9 pH. Set "5" here. The zoom has noinfluence on the storage.

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting0

Zoom end

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Linearization → Zoom end
Direct access code: 400305-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400305-000; Maths 4: 400305-003

Description

Like "Zoom start". Enter the upper value of the required range here.
Example: Transmitter 0-14 pH, required section: 5-9 pH. Here: "9".

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting

100"Points" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Linearization → Points
Enter the support points of the linearization table here.
Note: The first and last point must always correspond to the start and end of themeasuring range respectively. The support points can only be viewed in the PC software
here. To change the support points use the "Edit table" switch.

Check table

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Linearization → Points → Check table
Direct access code: 400306-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400306-000; Maths 4: 400306-003

Description

Here you can check whether the linearization table has been entered correctly.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory settingNo

Sort table

Endress+Hauser

239

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Linearization → Points → Sort table
Direct access code: 400307-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400307-000; Maths 4: 400307-003

Description

You can sort the linearization table here.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory settingNo

x-value (1 to 32)

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Linearization → Points → x-value (1 to32)
Direct access code, x-value 1: 400310-00x
Direct access code, x-value 2: 400312-00x
Examples: Maths 1, x-value 1: 400310-000; Maths 4: 400310-003

Description

x-value for the linearization (value from the device input). e.g. 10 cm corresponds to 20
liters --> enter 10.

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting

0y-value (1 to 32)

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Linearization → Points → y-value (1 to32)
Direct access code, y-value 1: 400311-00x
Direct access code, y-value 2: 400313-00x
Examples: Maths 1, y-value 1: 400311-000; Maths 4: 400311-003

Description

Enter the y-value that the measured x-value corresponds to e.g. 10 cm corresponds to 20
liters --> enter 20.

User entry

Number (max. 8 characters)

Factory setting0"Fault mode" submenu
Navigation
Description

240

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Fault mode
Contains settings that define how this channel is to react under fault conditions (e.g. if an
input channel has a cable open circuit or there is division by 0).

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Wet steam alarm

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Fault mode → Wet steam alarm
Direct access code: 400113-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400113-000; Maths 4: 400113-003

Description

Condensation of steam! Process temperature = saturated steam temperature = condensate
temperature.
Only visible if application = Steam heat quantity or Steam heat difference

Selection

Counter stop, Saturated steam calculation

Factory setting

Counter stopOn error

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Fault mode → On error
Direct access code: 400060-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400060-000; Maths 4: 400060-003

Description

Configure what value the device should continue working with (for calculations) if themeasured value is not valid (e.g. cable open circuit).

Selection

Invalid calculation, Error value

Factory setting

Invalid calculation

Error value

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Fault mode → Error value
Direct access code: 400061-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400061-000; Maths 4: 400061-003

Description

The device continues calculating with this value in the event of an error.
Only visible if on error = Error value

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting0

Copy settings

Endress+Hauser

241

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Application → Maths → Maths x → Copy settings
Direct access code: 400200-00x
Examples: Maths 1: 400200-000; Maths 4: 400200-003

Description

Copies settings from actual channel to selected channel.

Selection

No, In maths. channel x
Users can choose from all the available maths channels.

Factory settingNo"Signal analysis" submenu
Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal analysis

Description

Contains settings for signal analysis (saving).

Analysis x

Navigation

Description

Expert → Application → Signal analysis → Analysis x
Direct access code: 44000x-000
Examples: Analysis 1: 440000-000; Analysis 4: 440003-000
For the set time frame, determines the minimum, maximum and average value orquantities and operating times.
If the "Controlled externally" option is to be used, a digital input or a maths channelmust be set to "Function = Control input" and "Action = Start/stop analysis x".

Selection

Switched off, Controlled externally, 1min, 2min, 3min, 4min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 30min,
1h, 2h, 3h, 4h, 6h, 8h, 12h
Daily analysis, Weekly analysis, Monthly analysis, Annual analysis

Factory setting

Switched off

Synchron. time

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal analysis → Synchron. time
Direct access code: 440004-000

Description

Time for completing the signal analysis.
If, for example, 07:00 is set up, then the daily analysis will run from 07:00 of the actual
day until 07:00 of the following day.

User entry

Time

Factory setting

00:00

242

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Week starting on

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal analysis → Week starting on
Direct access code: 440005-000

Description

Configure what day the weekly analysis should start.
Only visible if at least one analysis = Weekly analysis

Selection

Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday

Factory setting

MondayAlarm statistics ("Telealarm" option)

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal analysis → Alarm statistics
Direct access code: 440006-000

Description

The following data can be determined via the signal analysis cycles (e.g. daily analysis):• How often was the set point violated• How long was the set point violated

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No

Group days ("Telealarm" option)

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal analysis → Group days
Direct access code: 440008-000

Description

Set up how often the weekly- monthly- or yearly analysis are to be calculated.
"No": Each individual alarm is counted.
"Yes": The number of days within the analysis cycle in which at least one alarm took place(e.g. required for the number of overflows in a storm overflow tank).

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No

Reset to zero
(Online configuration)

Navigation

Endress+Hauser

Expert → Application → Signal analysis → Reset to zero
Direct access code: 440007-000
243Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Description

Reset analysis.
Note: Should only be executed after the device has taken over the setup.

Selection

Please select, Analysis x, Totalizer, All

Factory setting

Please selectReset channel(Online configuration)

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal analysis → Reset channel
Direct access code: 440010-000

Description

Reset analysis of a single channel.
Note: Should only be executed after the device has taken over the setup.

Selection

Please select, Universal input x, Digital input x, Maths x, Limit x, Relay x
All active inputs are available for selection.

Factory setting

Please select"Automatic printout" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → Signal analysis → Automatic printout
Specify whether an automatic print-out should follow at the end of an evaluation.
The printout is only made if a USB printer is connected to the device or a network
printer is available.
For supported printers please refer to the Operating Instructions.
If the Batch option is selected, the printout is configured in the Batch mode/Print
menu.

Analysis x

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal analysis → Automatic printout → Analysis x
Direct access code, analysis 1: 440020-000
Direct access code, analysis 2: 440021-000
Direct access code, analysis 3: 440022-000
Direct access code, analysis 4: 440023-000

Description

Specify whether an automatic print-out should follow at the end of an evaluation.
The print-out is only made if a USB printer is connected to the device!
For supported printers please refer to the Operating Instructions.
If the Batch option is selected, the printout is configured in the Batch mode/Print
menu.

Selection

244

No, YesEndress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Factory setting

Appendix

No"Limits" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → Limits
Limit values can monitor the measured values. A relay, for example, can be switched if alimit value is violated.

Add limit value

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Add limit value
Direct access code: 450300-000

Description

Adding a new limit value.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No

Delete limit value

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Delete limit value
Direct access code: 450301-000

Description

Deleting a limit value from the list.

Selection

No, Limit value x

Factory setting

No

Change limits This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Change limits
Direct access code: 450100-000

Description

Specify where the limit values can be changed. If you select "Outside of setup also", you canchange limit values in the "Operation" menu as well as in "Setup". This allows you to adjust
your limit values to the process even if setup is locked.
Note: This function can/should be protected by the limit value code.

Selection

Only in setup, Outside of setup also

Endress+Hauser

245

Appendix

Factory setting

Memograph M, RSG45

Only in setup"Limit x" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x
View or change the setup for the selected alarm set point.
x = place holder for selected limit value

Channel/value

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Channel/value
Direct access code: 450000-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450000-000; Limit 30: 450000-029

Description

Select which input/calculated value the limit value refers to.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Digital input x, Maths x, Limit x

Factory setting

Switched off

Type

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Type
Direct access code: 450001-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450001-000; Limit 30: 450001-029

Description

Type of limit value (depends on the input variable).

Selection

Switched off, Upper set point, Lower set point, Analysis x, Gradient dy/dt, Analysis x
frequency, Analysis x duration, Inband, Outband

246

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Description of the individual set point types
Set point type/function

Description

Hysteresis

For every set point, the switch point can be controlled via a hysteresis.
The hysteresis is set as an absolute value (only positive values) in the unit of the respective channel (e.g. upper
set point = 100 m, hysteresis = 1 m: set point on = 100 m, set point off = 99 m)

Upper set point

The limit value is active if the value exceeds the configured value. The limit value is switched off if the limit
value, including hysteresis, is undershot.

Measured value

Setpoint
Hysteresis

Threshold“off”

tSetpoint “on”
Setpoint “off”

A0010187-EN

Lower set point

The limit is active if the value drops below the configured value. The limit value is switched off if the limit value,
including hysteresis, is exceeded.

Measured value

Threshold“off”

Hysteresis

Setpointt
Setpoint “on”
Setpoint “off”

A0010186-EN

Endress+Hauser

247

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Set point type/function

Description

Gradient dy/dt

The "Gradient" operating mode is used to monitor the temporal change of the input signal. The alarm istriggered if the measured value reaches or exceeds the preset value.
If a positive value is set, the limit value is monitored from increasing gradients. In the case of negative values
the decreasing gradient is monitored.
The alarm is canceled when the gradient drops below the preset value. A hysteresis is not possible in theGradient operating mode. The alarm can be suppressed for the set time delay (unit: seconds s) in order todecrease the sensitivity.

Measured value

M0! Set point
M0-m

Tm

Tm = Time for gradientevaluation (Timebase in seconds)

t
Tm
T0

Setpoint “on”
Setpoint“off”
A0010188-EN

InbandThe limit value is violated as soon as the measured value to be checked exceeds or drops below a preset
maximum or minimum respectively. The hysteresis must be monitored on the inside of the band. For the limit
value to no longer be violated, the value must lie within the hysteresis range.

Measured value

Setpoint
Hysteresis

Hysteresis
Setpointt
Setpoint
activeSetpoint
not active
A0010192-EN

248

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Set point type/function

Description

Outband

The limit value is violated as soon as the measured value to be checked lies within a preset band between
minimum and maximum. The hysteresis must be monitored on the outside of the band. For the limit value tono longer be violated, the value must lie outside of the hysteresis range.

Measured value
Hysteresis
Setpoint
Setpoint

Hysteresist
Setpoint
activeSetpoint
not active
A0010189-EN

Special case: Hysteresis and delay
for one limit value

In the special case in which the hysteresis and limit value delay are activated, a limit value is switched according
to the following principle. If the hysteresis and the limit value delay are activated, the delay becomes active
when a limit value is exceeded and measures the time from which the value is exceeded. If the measured value
falls below the limit value, the delay is reset. This also occurs if the measured value falls below the limit value,
but continues to be higher than the set hysteresis value. When the limit value is exceeded again, the delay time
becomes active again and starts measuring from 0.

Measured
value

Delay

Delay

Setpoint
Hysteresis
Delay timeis resett
Setpoint
activeSetpoint
not active
A0010193-EN

Factory setting

Switched off

Identifier

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Identifier
Direct access code: 450015-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450015-000; Limit 30: 450015-029

Description

Name of the limit for identification purposes.

User entry

Text (max. 16 characters)

Factory setting

Limit xEndress+Hauser

249

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Set point

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Set point
Direct access code: 450003-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450003-000; Limit 30: 450003-029

Description

Limit value in the set process unit, e.g. in °C, m³/h

User entry

Number (max. 10 digits)

Factory setting0

Set point 2

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Set point 2
Direct access code: 450017-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450017-000; Limit 30: 450017-029

Description

Enter the upper limit value for the band.
Only visible if type = Inband or Outband

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting0Time span dt

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Time span dt
Direct access code: 450014-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450014-000; Limit 30: 450014-029

Description

Time span within which the signal must change by the specified value before it isrecognized as a set point.
Note: max. 60 seconds.
Only visible if type = Gradient dy/dt

User entry

0 to 60 s

Factory setting

60 s

Hysteresis (abs.)

250

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Hysteresis (abs.)
Direct access code: 450004-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450004-000; Limit 30: 450004-029

Description

The alarm condition is only canceled when the signal has changed into the normal
operation range by the preset value.

User entry

Number (max. 8 digits)

Factory setting0Time delay

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Time delay
Direct access code: 450005-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450005-000; Limit 30: 450005-029

Description

In order to be interpreted as an alarm the signal must exceed or undercut the preset value
by at least the time set up.

User entry

0 to 99999 s

Factory setting

0s

Switches

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Switches
Direct access code: 450006-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450006-000; Limit 30: 450006-029

Description

Switches the appropriate output in the limit value state.

Selection

Not used, Relay x

Factory setting

Not used

LV messages

Navigation

Endress+Hauser

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → LV messages
Direct access code: 450007-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450007-000; Limit 30: 450007-029

251

Appendix

Description

Memograph M, RSG45"Do not acknowledge": Alarm condition is signaled by highlighting the tag name in red (nomessage is output).
"Acknowledge": In the event of an alarm, a message is also displayed. This message thenhas to be acknowledged.
Note: In the case of the DIN rail version, the message can only be acknowledged via
the Web server!

Selection

Do not acknowledge, Acknowledge

Factory setting

Do not acknowledge

Save event

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Save event
Direct access code: 450008-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450008-000; Limit 30: 450008-029

Description

Stores a message in the event log on limit value violation.

Selection

No, Yes, only "On" message

Factory setting

Yes

Event text LV on

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Event text LV on
Direct access code: 450009-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450009-000; Limit 30: 450009-029

Description

This text (including date and time) is shown on the display and/or stored in the event log.
Only available if "LV messages" is set to "Acknowledge" or "Save message" is set to "Yes".
If no text is entered, the device generates its own text (e.g. Analog 1 > 100%).

User entry

Text (max. 22 characters)

Event text LV off

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Event text LV off
Direct access code: 450010-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450010-000; Limit 30: 450010-029

Description

The same as "Event text LV on", but on return from alarm to normal condition.

User entry

Text (max. 22 characters)

252

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Record duration of LV on

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Record duration of LV on
Direct access code: 450011-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450011-000; Limit 30: 450011-029

Description

The duration of a set point violation can be recorded. The duration is appended to the"Limit value off" event text (format: <hhhh>h<mm>:<ss>).
Power failure times do not affect the duration. If the set point was violated before thepower failure and is still violated after the power failure, the duration continues.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory setting

No

Reset relay

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Reset relay
Direct access code: 450016-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450016-000; Limit 30: 450016-029

Description

If LV no longer violated: the relay is switched as long as the set point is violated.
After acknowledging message: even if the set point is no longer violated, the relay remains
switched until the message has been acknowledged. If the set point is still violated whenthe message is acknowledged, the relay stays switched until the set point is no longer
violated.
Up to message acknowledgment: the relay remains active until the message isacknowledged or the set point is no longer active.

Selection

If LV no longer violated, After acknowledging message, Up to message acknowledgment

Factory setting

If LV no longer violated

Save cycle

Navigation

Description

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Save cycle
Direct access code: 450012-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450012-000; Limit 30: 450012-029
Normal: Save in normal store cycle.
Alarm cycle: Fast storage during an alarm violation, e.g. every second. Caution: Requires
higher memory capacity!
• The save cycle is set under signal groups .
• In the event of an alarm violation, all the groups are saved in the alarm cycle.

Selection

Endress+Hauser

Normal, Alarm cycle

253Appendix

Factory setting

Memograph M, RSG45

NormalDraw help line This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Draw help line
Direct access code: 450013-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450013-000; Limit 30: 450013-029

Description

The user can configure whether this set point should be displayed in the graphic as a helpline (in the color of the channel).
Note: 4 lines can be shown per channel in a single group.

Selection

No, Yes

Factory settingNo

Copy settings

Navigation

Expert → Application → Limits → Limit x → Copy settings
Direct access code: 450200-0xx
Examples: Limit 1: 450200-000; Limit 30: 450200-029

Description

Copies settings from actual channel to selected channel.

Selection

No, In limit x (all the limit values are displayed)

Factory setting

No"Batch mode" submenu (option)

Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → Batch mode
Contains settings for the batch mode.
Detailed descriptions of this device option can be found in the associateddocumentation.

"Signal groups" submenu
Navigation

254

Expert → Application → Signal groups

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Description

Appendix

Group the analog, digital and/or mathematics channels such that you can call up
important information during operation (e.g. temperatures, signals in plant unit 1).
• Maximum 8 channels per group!
• High speed storage (100ms) is only available in group 1.

"Group x" submenu
Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x

Description

x = place holder for selected group
General settings for displaying the measured value and saving data.

Identifier

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Identifier
Direct access code: 460000-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460000-000; Group 4: 460000-003

Description

Enter a name for these groups.

User entry

Text (max. 20 characters)

Factory settingGroup x

Save cycle

Navigation

Description

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Save cycle
Direct access code: 460001-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460001-000; Group 4: 460001-003
Configure the save cycle with which this group should be saved in normal conditions (seealso set point/save cycle).
The save cycle is independent of the measured value display (see Operating
Instructions).

Selection

Off, 100ms (only for group 1), 1s, 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s, 10s, 15s, 20s, 30s, 1min, 2min, 3min,
4min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 30min, 1h

Factory setting

1min

Alarm cycle

Endress+Hauser

255

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Alarm cycle
Direct access code: 460002-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460002-000; Group 4: 460002-003

Description

Configure the save cycle with which this group should be saved in an alarm condition (limit
value violation).
Caution: Requires higher memory capacity.

Selection

Off, 100ms (only for group 1), 1s, 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s, 10s, 15s, 20s, 30s, 1min, 2min, 3min,
4min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 30min, 1h

Factory setting

1min

Display blue

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display blue
Direct access code: 460003-00x
Examples: Group 1: 460003-000; Group 4: 460003-003

Description

Choose which input/calculated variable should be displayed in this group.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Digital input x, Maths x

Factory setting

Switched off

Display

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display
Direct access code: 460004-00x
Examples: Group 1: 460004-000; Group 4: 460004-003

Description

Please select which data from the selected channel should be displayed.
If the "Everything" option is selected, the device switches cyclically between thevarious values of the channel (instantaneous value, analysis 1 etc.)

Selection

Instantaneous value/state, Analysis x, Totalizer, Everything

Factory setting

Instantaneous value/state

Display black

Navigation

Description
256

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display black
Direct access code: 460005-00x
Examples: Group 1: 460005-000; Group 4: 460005-003
Choose which input/calculated variable should be displayed in this group.
Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Digital input x, Maths x

Factory setting

Switched off

Display

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display
Direct access code: 460006-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460006-000; Group 4: 460006-003

Description

Please select which data from the selected channel should be displayed.

Selection

Instantaneous value/state, Analysis x, Totalizer, Everything

Factory setting

Instantaneous value/state

Display red

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display red
Direct access code: 460007-00x
Examples: Group 1: 460007-000; Group 4: 460007-003

Description

Choose which input/calculated variable should be displayed in this group.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Digital input x, Maths x

Factory setting

Switched off

Display

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display
Direct access code: 460008-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460008-000; Group 4: 460008-003

Description

Please select which data from the selected channel should be displayed.

Selection

Instantaneous value/state, Analysis x, Totalizer, Everything

Factory setting

Instantaneous value/state

Display green

Endress+Hauser

257

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display green
Direct access code: 460009-00x
Examples: Group 1: 460009-000; Group 4: 460009-003

Description

Choose which input/calculated variable should be displayed in this group.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Digital input x, Maths x

Factory setting

Switched off

Display

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display
Direct access code: 460010-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460010-000; Group 4: 460010-003

Description

Please select which data from the selected channel should be displayed.

Selection

Instantaneous value/state, Analysis x, Totalizer, Everything

Factory setting

Instantaneous value/state

Display violet

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display violet
Direct access code: 460011-00x
Examples: Group 1: 460011-000; Group 4: 460011-003

Description

Choose which input/calculated variable should be displayed in this group.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Digital input x, Maths x

Factory setting

Switched off

Display

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display
Direct access code: 460012-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460012-000; Group 4: 460012-003

Description

Please select which data from the selected channel should be displayed.

Selection

Instantaneous value/state, Analysis x, Totalizer, Everything

Factory setting

Instantaneous value/state

258

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Display orange

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display orange
Direct access code: 460013-00x
Examples: Group 1: 460013-000; Group 4: 460013-003

Description

Choose which input/calculated variable should be displayed in this group.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Digital input x, Maths x

Factory setting

Switched off

Display

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display
Direct access code: 460014-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460014-000; Group 4: 460014-003

Description

Please select which data from the selected channel should be displayed.

Selection

Instantaneous value/state, Analysis x, Totalizer, Everything

Factory setting

Instantaneous value/state

Display cyan

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display cyan
Direct access code: 460015-00x
Examples: Group 1: 460015-000; Group 4: 460015-003

Description

Choose which input/calculated variable should be displayed in this group.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Digital input x, Maths x

Factory setting

Switched off

Display

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display
Direct access code: 460016-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460016-000; Group 4: 460016-003

Description

Please select which data from the selected channel should be displayed.

Endress+Hauser

259

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Selection

Instantaneous value/state, Analysis x, Totalizer, Everything

Factory setting

Instantaneous value/state

Display brown

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display brown
Direct access code: 460017-00x
Examples: Group 1: 460017-000; Group 4: 460017-003

Description

Choose which input/calculated variable should be displayed in this group.

Selection

Switched off, Universal input x, Digital input x, Maths x

Factory setting

Switched off

Display

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Display
Direct access code: 460018-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460018-000; Group 4: 460018-003

Description

Please select which data from the selected channel should be displayed.

Selection

Instantaneous value/state, Analysis x, Totalizer, Everything

Factory setting

Instantaneous value/state

Grid divisions

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Grid divisions
Direct access code: 460019-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460019-000; Group 4: 460019-003

Description

Indicates the number of lines ("amplitude grid") that should be displayed. Example: displayof 0 to 100%: select 10 divisions, display 0 to 14pH: select 14 divisions.

Selection

Logarithmic, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20

Factory setting

10

Min. decade

260

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Min. decade
Direct access code: 460020-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460020-000; Group 4: 460020-003

Description

Set the decade from which the display should be split.

Selection

1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000, 1000000, 10000000

Factory setting

1

Max. decade

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Max. decade
Direct access code: 460021-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460021-000; Group 4: 460021-003

Description

Set the decade up to which the display should be split.

Selection

1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000, 1000000, 10000000

Factory setting

10000

Curve display

 This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x v Curve display
Direct access code: 460022-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460022-000; Group 4: 460022-003

Description

The instantaneous values are displayed as standard for the measured value curves.
Alternatively, this current value display can also be disabled which means that more data
can be shown on the display as a result.

Selection

No instantaneous values, With instantaneous values

Factory settingWith instantaneous values

Curve display

 This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Navigation

Endress+Hauser

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Curve display
Direct access code: 460023-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460023-000; Group 4: 460023-003

261

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Description

Configure the background color for the curve display.

Selection

White background, Black background

Factory setting

White backgroundZoom

 This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Zoom
Direct access code: 460028-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460028-000; Group 4: 460028-003

Description

Defines the zoom that is shown in "Curves" or "Waterfall" display mode. This setting does
not affect other display modes (e.g. Curves in range, Bar graph etc.).

Selection

Do not display, Scroll display, Display blue, Display black, Display red, Display green,
Display violet, Display orange, Display cyan, Display brown

Factory setting

Do not display

Bargraph This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Bargraph
Direct access code: 460024-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460024-000; Group 4: 460024-003

Description

Configure the direction in which the bar graphs should be drawn.

Selection

Vertical (bottom->top), Vertical (top->bottom), Horizontal (left->right), Horizontal (right>left), Centered/vertical, Centered/horizontal

Factory setting

Vertical (bottom->top)

Batch assignment (option)

Navigation

262

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Batch assignment
Direct access code: 460025-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460025-000; Group 4: 460025-003

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Description

Appendix

Configure what batch this group belongs to.
• Channels can be assigned to multiple batches/groups.
• Only relevant for batch printout.

Selection

Do not assign any batch, Assign all batches, Batch x

Factory setting

Assign all batches

Save group (Batch option)

Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Save group
Direct access code: 460026-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460026-000; Group 4: 460026-003

Description

The group will always be saved or only when the allocated batch is active.

Selection

Only when batch is active, Always

Factory setting

Always"Circular chart" submenu
This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Circular chart
Contains settings for the circular chart.

1 revolution =Navigation

Expert → Application → Signal groups → Group x → Circular chart → 1 revolution =Direct access code: 460027-0xx
Examples: Group 1: 460027-000; Group 4: 460027-003

Description

Configure how long it takes for the circular chart to be written to once completely (onecomplete revolution).
Note: The device only ever shows 1/4 of the circular chart.

Selection

1 hour , x hours , 1 day, x days

Factory setting

1 hour"E-mail" submenu

Endress+Hauser

263

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Expert → Application → E-mailIn the case of the "Telealarm" option under
Expert → Application → Telealarm → General → Setup e-mailDescription

Contains settings required if alarms are to be transmitted by e-mail.
Test the e-mail settings under Diagnostics → Simulation → E-mail.

SMTP hostNavigation

Expert → Application → E-mail → SMTP host
Direct access code: 510062-000

Description

Enter your SMTP host here. If necessary, contact your network administrator or e-mailprovider.

User entry

Text (max. 40 characters)

Server requires SSL

Navigation

Expert → Application → E-mail → Server requires SSL
Direct access code: 510061-000

Description

Specify whether the e-mail server requires a secure connection (SSL).
STARTTLS: Runs on the same TCP port as unencrypted SMTP (port 25 or 587).
SMTPS: Completely encrypted with own TCP port (465).
If necessary, contact your network administrator or e-mail provider.

Selection

No, Yes (SMTPS), Yes (STARTTLS)

Factory setting

No

Port

Navigation

Expert → Application → E-mail → Port
Direct access code: 510063-000

Description

Enter your SMTP port here. If necessary, contact your network administrator or e-mailprovider.

User entry

Number (max. 4 digits)

Factory setting

25

264

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

SenderNavigation

Description

Expert → Application → E-mail → Sender
Direct access code: 510064-000
Enter the e-mail address of the device here (this text appears as the sender of the e-mail).
If necessary, contact your network administrator or e-mail provider.
If a valid e-mail address is not configured this might cause e-mail transmission
problems, depending on the particular provider.

User entry

Text (max. 60 characters)

User name

Navigation

Expert → Application → E-mail → User name
Direct access code: 510066-000

Description

Configure the user name of the e-mail account here. If necessary, contact your network
administrator or e-mail provider.

User entry

Text (max. 60 characters)

Password

Navigation

Expert → Application → E-mail → Password
Direct access code: 510067-000

Description

Enter the password for authentication here. If necessary, contact your network
administrator or e-mail provider.

User entry

Text (max. 22 characters)"E-mail addresses" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → E-mail → E-mail addresses
Here, enter all the e-mail addresses messages should be sent to in the event of an alarm.
Assignment to the alarms is performed later on.

E-mail address x

Endress+Hauser

265Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation

Description

Expert → Application → E-mail → E-mail addresses → E-mail address x
Direct access code:
E-mail address 1: 510080-000...
E-mail address 5: 510084-000
Here, enter an e-mail address a message should be sent to.
Assignment to the alarms is performed later on.

User entry

Text (max. 60 characters)"Limit value violations" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → E-mail → Limit value violations
Specify who should receive e-mails when limit value violations occur (both on and off
messages).
Only for limit values where "Save message" is set to "Yes".

Recipient x

Navigation

Expert → Application → E-mail → Limit value violations → Recipient x
Direct access code:
Recipient 1: 510110-000; Recipient 2: 510111-000

Description

Select who should receive the e-mail.

Selection

Not used, E-mail address x

Factory setting

Not used"On/off messages" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → E-mail → On/off messages
Specify who should receive e-mails when "on"/"off" messages occur (for digital inputs ormaths channels).
Only for inputs where "Save event" is set to "Yes".

Recipient x

Navigation

266

Expert → Application → E-mail → On/off messages → Recipient x
Direct access code:
Recipient 1: 510115-000; Recipient 2: 510116-000
Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Description

Select who should receive the e-mail.

Selection

Not used, E-mail address x

Factory setting

Not used"Errors (Fxxx/Sxxx)" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → E-mail → Errors (Fxxx/Sxxx)
Specify who should receive e-mails when errors occur (Fxxx and Sxxx messages).

Recipient x

Navigation

Expert → Application → E-mail → Errors → Recipient x
Direct access code:
Recipient 1: 510120-000; Recipient 2: 510121-000

Description

Select who should receive the e-mail.

Selection

Not used, E-mail address x

Factory setting

Not used"Maintenance required" (submenu)
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → E-mail → Maintenance required
Specify who should receive e-mails when maintenance is required (Mxxx messages).

Recipient x

Navigation

Expert → Application → E-mail → Maintenance required → Recipient x
Direct access code:
Recipient 1: 510130-000; Recipient 2: 510131-000

Description

Select who should receive the e-mail.

Selection

Not used, E-mail address x

Factory setting

Not used"Printer" submenu

Endress+Hauser

267

Appendix

Memograph M, RSG45

Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → PrinterContains printer settings.
Only relevant if a printer is directly connected to the device.
Parameter

Description

Direct access code

Printer

Please select the printer you wish to use. For supported printers pleaserefer to the Operating Instructions.

540000-000

IP addressEnter the IP address of the network printer here. If you do not know theIP address, contact your network administrator.
Note: A DNS name may also be used.

540001-000

Port

Please enter the port of your network printer (available from yournetwork administrator). Note: Port 9100 is usually used.

540002-000

Color printerPlease specify whether you are using a black and white or color printer.

540003-000

Paper size

Please select the paper size of your printer.

540004-000

Print
direction

Select the print direction as per the properties of the printer used.

540006-000

Characters/lineEnter the maximum number of characters per line here.

540007-000

Blank rows
at the end

Enter the number of blank lines required at the end of the printout tomake it easier to tear off.

540008-000

Fault
switches

You can switch a relay if an error occurs during the printout. The relay
remains switched until the printer is ready again or the device isrestarted.

540005-000"Serialinterface"submenu

Settings required if you are using the RS232 or RS485 interface of thedevice.

150101-000
150103-000"Softkeys" submenu
This function is not supported by the DIN rail version.
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → Softkeys
You can configure the functions that are assigned to the softkeys of the device.

Softkey 1-3
Navigation

Expert → Application → Softkeys → Softkey x
Direct access code, softkey 1: 520000-000
Direct access code, softkey 2: 520001-000
Direct access code, softkey 3: 520002-000

Description

Specify the function to be assigned to this softkey.

Selection

Not used, Safe SD card removal, Remove USB stick safely, Printout, Enter batch info, Event
log / audit trail, Historic measured values, Log onto device, Log out from device,
Screenshot, Search in trace, Show analyses, Change set point, Next group, Operation

268

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Factory setting

Appendix

Softkey 1: Event log/audit trail
Softkey 2: Historic measured values
Softkey 3: Search in trace"Texts" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → Texts
Settings only needed if you want to save text for subsequent reporting. Here, configure thetext that can be saved in the event log during operation.

Text 1-30
Navigation

Expert → Application → Texts → Text x
Direct access code, text 1: 530000-000...
Direct access code, text 30: 530029-000

Description

Generate or change the text.

User entry

Text (max. 22 characters)"Wastewater" submenu (option)
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → WastewaterContains settings for using the device in the wastewater sector.
Detailed descriptions of this device option can be found in the associateddocumentation.

"Telealarm" submenu (option)
Navigation
Description

Expert → Application → Telealarm
Contains settings for alerts via a modem connected to the device or by e-mail.
Detailed descriptions of this device option can be found in the associateddocumentation.

"WebDAV Client" submenu

Navigation

Endress+Hauser

Expert → Application → WebDAV Client269

Appendix

Description

Memograph M, RSG45

All recorded data are transmitted to an external WebDAV server (e.g. NAS). The format
can be specified or selected via "Setup → Advanced setup → System → External memory-> Save as".
Parameter

Description

Direct access code

EnableSwitch the WebDAV client functionality on/off. When active, the device
copies the saved measured values automatically to the configured server.

472000-000 Only possible using the Ethernet interface!
Options: No, Yes, Yes (SSL)
Factory setting: No
IP addressEnter the IP address of the WebDAV server here.



472001-000

A DNS name can also be used.

User entry: IP address
Factory setting: 0.0.0.0
PortThis communication port is used to communicate with the WebDAV
Server.

472002-000

your network is protected by a firewall, this port may have to be Ifenabled.
Please contact your network administrator if this is thecase.
User entry: Numbers (max. 5 digits)
Factory setting: 80
User name

Input of the user name that can access the WebDAV server.
User entry: Text (max. 20 characters)

472004-000

Password

Password for accessing the WebDAV server.
User entry: Text (max. 20 characters)

472007-000

Directory

Enter the directory in which the data should be saved.
User entry: Text (max. 120 characters)

472005-000

Save as"Protected format": All data is stored in a manipulation protectedencrypted format. This data can only be visualized by the PC analysis
software supplied.
"Open format": Data is stored in a CSV format, this can be opened by anumber of different programs (for e.g. MS Excel) (Attention: no
manipulation security).
Options: Protected format, Open format (*.csv)
Factory setting: Protected format

472010-000

Test the WebDAV client settings under "Diagnostics → Simulation → WebDAV
client".

17.1.6"Diagnostics" submenu

Device information and service functions for a quick device check.
Only some of the diagnostic functions are available under Expert → Diagnostics! Forother functions, see the Main menu → Diagnostics

Actual diagnostics(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

270

Expert → Diagnostics → Actual diagnostics
Direct access code: 050000-000
Displays the current diagnosis message.

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Appendix

Last diagnostics(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → Diagnostics → Last diagnostics
Direct access code: 050005-000
Displays the last diagnosis message.

Last restart(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → Diagnostics → Last restart
Direct access code: 050010-000
Information as to when the device was last restarted (e.g. due to a power failure).

"Event log" submenu
Navigation
Description

Expert → Diagnostics → Event log
Events such as alarm set point infringement and power failure are listed in the correcttime sequence.

"Device information" submenu(Online configuration)
Navigation
Description

Expert → Diagnostics → Device information
Displays important device information.

Device tag

Navigation

Expert → Diagnostics → Device information → Device tag
Direct access code: 000031-000

Description

Individual device tag name/unit identifier (max. 32 characters).

Serial number(Online configuration)

Endress+Hauser

271

Appendix

Navigation

Description

Memograph M, RSG45

Expert → Diagnostics → Device information → Serial number
Direct access code: 000027-000
Individual serial number of the device. Please provide these details when ordering spareparts or asking any questions about the unit.

Order code
(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → Diagnostics → Device information → Order code
Direct access code: 000029-000
Displays the order code.
The order code indicates the attribute of all the features of the product structure for thedevice and thus uniquely identifies the device. It can also be found on the nameplate.
Uses of the order code
• To order an identical replacement device.
• To check the ordered device features using the delivery note.

Firmware version(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → Diagnostics → Device information → Firmware version
Direct access code: 000026-000
Displays the installed firmware version of the device. Please send these details with anyquestions about the unit.

ENP version(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → Diagnostics → Device information → ENP version
Direct access code: 000032-000
Displays the version of the electronic nameplate. Please send these details with anyquestions about the unit.

ENP device name
(Online configuration)

Navigation

272

Expert → Diagnostics → Device information → ENP device name
Direct access code: 000020-000

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Description

Appendix

Displays the ENP device name (electronic name plate). Please send these details with anyquestions about the unit.

Device name
(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → Diagnostics → Device information → Device name
Direct access code: 000021-000
Displays the device name. Please send these details with any questions about the unit.

Manufacturer ID(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → Diagnostics → Device information → Manufacturer ID
Direct access code: 000022-000
Displays the manufacturer ID. Please send these details with any questions about the unit.

Manufacturer name
(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → Diagnostics → Device information → Manufacturer name
Direct access code: 000023-000
Displays the manufacturer name. Please send these details with any questions about theunit.

Firmware(Online configuration)

Navigation

Description

Expert → Diagnostics → Device information → Firmware
Direct access code: 009998-000
Displays the installed firmware of the device. Please send these details with any questions
about the unit.

"Simulation" submenu
Navigation
Endress+Hauser

Expert → Diagnostics → Simulation
273

Appendix

Description

Memograph M, RSG45

Settings for simulation mode.

Operating mode

Navigation

Expert → Diagnostics → Simulation → Operating mode
Direct access code: 010010-000

Description

Normal operation: Unit plots the signals from the connected measurement points.
Simulation: Instead of operating with the real measurement points the signals are
simulated (using the actual settings).

Selection

Normal operation, Simulation

Factory setting

Normal operation

274

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Index

Index
Symbols--> Profibus DP (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

0…9

1 hour= (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
1 revolution = (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
1 second= (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

A

Access code (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Acknowledging messages (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Action (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Activation code (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Actual diagnostics (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Actual value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168, 169, 186
Add HART value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Add input (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 174
Add limit value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Admin ID (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Admin password (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Administrator (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Administrator, ID, password (parameter) . . . . . . . . . 142
Alarm cycle (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Alarm response (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Alarm statistics (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Analysis x (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Analysis x for automatic printout (parameter) . . . . . 244
Application (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 214
Application (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Authentication (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Automatic printout (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

B

Barcode reader (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Bargraph (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Batch (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Batch assignment (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Batch mode (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Baud rate (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Begin summer time (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

C

Cable open circuit (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Calc. factor (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 171, 237
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
CE mark (declaration of conformity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Change date/time (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Change limits (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Channel ident. (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157, 176
Channel/value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Character set (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Check table (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Check table for linearization (parameter) . . . . . . . . . 239
Circular chart (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Clear memory (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Communication
Ethernet TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Endress+Hauser

Communication (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Communication (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Comparison point (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Comparison temp. (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Configuration softwareFieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Configuration Web server (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Connection (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Connection quality (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Control relays (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Copy settings (parameter) . . . . . . . . 174, 182, 241, 254
Correction RPT (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
CSV settings (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Current date/time (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Curve display (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

D

d at 20 °C (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
D at 20 °C (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Damping (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Damping/filter (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Data type (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Date (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 139
Date format (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Date/time (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 145
Date/time (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Date/time setup (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Day (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 138
Decimal point (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160, 176
Decimal separator (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Delete HART value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Delete input (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 175
Delete limit value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Density (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Density unit (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Description 'H' (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 221
Description 'L' (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 222
Design density (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Device address (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 206
Device info (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Device name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Device options (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Device tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Device tag (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Device type (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
DHCP (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Diagnostics (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Diameter unit (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Differential pressure (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Digital inputs (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Dim. linearized value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . 165, 238
Direct access (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Disable port (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Display (parameter) . . . . . . . . . 256, 257, 258, 259, 260
Display black (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
275

Index

Display blue (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Display brown (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Display cyan (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Display green (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Display orange (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Display red (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Display violet (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Domain Name System (DNS) (parameter) . . . . . . . . 192
DP flow (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
DP unit (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Draw help line (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

E

E-mail (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
E-mail address x (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
E-mail addresses (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
End summer time (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
End value range (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Engineering unit (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 176
ENP device name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
ENP version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Error (Fxxx/Sxxx) (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Error value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 187, 241
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Ethernet configuration (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Event log (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Event message (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 222
Event text H->L (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 223
Event text L->H (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 223
Event text LV off (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Event text LV on (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Expert (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
External memory (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

F

Fault mode (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Fault mode (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 187, 240
Fault switching (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
FDA 21 CFR Part 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Field Data Manager (FDM) analysis software
Function scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fieldbus (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
FieldCare/DeviceCare configuration software
Function scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Firmware (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Firmware update (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Firmware version (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Flow (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Flow engineering unit (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Flow installation point (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Formula (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Formula editor (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Formula editor (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Front of housing (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Full scale value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Function (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Function USB-B (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

276

Memograph M, RSG45

G

Gateway (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Get timeout (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Grid divisions (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Group (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Group days (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Group x (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

H

HART (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
HART attempts on error (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
HART channel ident. (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
HART connection (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
HART device address (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
HART IP port (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
HART master type (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
HART process variable (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Hysteresis (abs.) (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

I

Identifier (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 249, 255
Input factor in (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Inputs (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
IP address (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 191
Isentropic exponent (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

K

K-factor (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Keyboard layout (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

L

Language (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Last diagnostics (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Last restart (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
LED mode (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Limit value violations (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Limit x (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Limits (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Linearization (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 238
Linearization (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 237
Linearization points (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Lock hardware (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Lock operation (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Low flow cut off (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 236
Lower correction value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Lower error value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Lower frequency (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
LV messages (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

M

MAC address (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Maintenance required (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Manufacturer ID (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Manufacturer name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Maths (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Maths x action (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Maths x channel ident. (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Maths x decimal point (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Maths x engineering unit (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Maths x function (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Maths x plot type (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Maths x set point (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Max. decade (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Meas. range end (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161, 169
Meas. val. without login (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Meas.val. corrct. (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 185
Measured value type (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Medium (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Memory build-up (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Messages (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Min. decade (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Modbus (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Modbus Master (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151, 208
Modbus Master (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Modbus Master baud rate (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Modbus Master command distribution (parameter) . 209
Modbus Master connection attempts (parameter) . . 209
Modbus Master parity (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Modbus Master pause between commands(parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Modbus Master Register per command (parameter) 209
Modbus Master response timeout (parameter) . . . . . 208
Modbus Master scan cycle (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . 208
Modbus Master serial interface (submenu) . . . . . . . . 210
Modbus Master stop bits (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Modbus RTU/(TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Modbus Slave (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Modbus Slave baud rate (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Modbus Slave parity (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Modbus Slave serial interface (submenu) . . . . . . . . . 207
Modbus Slave stop bits (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Month (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 139N

NAMUR NE 43 (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 187
NT/ST changeover (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
NT/ST changeover (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
NT/ST region (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Number of linearization points (parameter) . . . . . . . 238
Number of points (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

O

Occurrence (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 138
OFF daily from (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Offset (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
ON daily from (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
On error (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 187, 241
On/off messages (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
OPC port (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
OPC server
Function scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Operating mode (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 274
Operation options
Local operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Operating tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Operational time (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Endress+Hauser

Index

Operator (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Operator ID (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Operator password (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Operator, ID, password (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Order code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Other standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Output (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Overview of symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

P

Paper size (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Parity (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Password (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Ping interval (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Ping retry (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Ping timeout (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Pipe material (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Plot type (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Point 1 viscosity (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Point 2 viscosity (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Points (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Poll timeout (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Port (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 192, 194, 206, 264
PRESET (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Pressure (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Pressure engineering unit (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Printer (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Profibus DP (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Profibus DP bit 0.0 to 0.7 (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Profibus DP byte x...y (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Profibus DP Master in/out (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . 211
Profibus DP Slave address (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Profibus DP slot x (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Protected by (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Protocol (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Pulse counter (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Pulse value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 177, 184
Pulse width (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Put timeout (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

R

Range (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Range start (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161, 168
Readout function (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Recipient x (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 267
Record duration (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 223
Record duration of LV on (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Reference channel (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Register address (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Relay (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Remote control (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Remote controlled (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Reset channel (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Reset relay (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Reset to zero (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

277

IndexS

Save as (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Save as event (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Save cycle (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 255
Save event (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . 174, 180, 222, 252
Save group (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Screensaver (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Screensaver (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
SD card (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Security (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Sender (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Separator for CSV (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Serial interface (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Server requires SSL (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Service (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Service ID (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Service password (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Service, ID, password (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Set point (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 250
Set point 2 (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Set point code (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Set timeout (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Setup (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Setup via Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Show Profibus DP status (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Signal (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 183
Signal analysis (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Signal groups (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Simulation (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Slave address (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Slot 1 (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Slot 2 (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Slot 3 (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Slot 4 (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Slot 5 (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
SMTP host (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
SNTP (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
SNTP (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
SNTP server 1 (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
SNTP server 2 (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Softkey 1-3 (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Softkeys (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Sort table (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Sort table for linearization (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . 239
Staff
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Start value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Start value range (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Stop bits (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Structure of the operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 34
Subnetmask (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Swap mouse buttons (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Switches (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 251
Switches relay (parameter) . . . . . . . . 144, 146, 179, 221
Symbols
Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Operating menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Synchron. time (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
278

Memograph M, RSG45

System (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

T

Target value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . 168, 169, 185, 186
Telealarm (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Temp. unit (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Temperature (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Temperature (steam/cold) (heat difference)(parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Temperature (water/steam/warm) (parameter) . . . . 216
Temperature engineering unit, water/steam(parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Text 1-30 (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Text entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Texts (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
The result is (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Time (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 139
Time base (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Time delay (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 177, 251
Time format (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Time span dt (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Timeout (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Timeout fieldbus (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Timeout sequences (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Timeouts (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Total. eng. unit (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Totalization (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 235
Totalization (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 235
Totalization base (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 235
Totalizer (parameter) . . . . . . . . 164, 171, 182, 224, 237
Transmission protocol (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Troubleshooting
Alarm relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Type (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Type RS232/RS485 (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

U

Unit (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 236
Unit/dimension counter (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Universal input x (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Universal inputs (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Universal output (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Upper correction value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Upper error value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Upper frequency (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
User name (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
UTC time zone (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

V

Value (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Value x HART (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Viscosity (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234, 235
Viscosity (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

WWarning at (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Wastewater (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Water/glycol concentration (parameter) . . . . . . . . . 218
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Function scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Endress+Hauser

Memograph M, RSG45

Index

Web server (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Web server authentication (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . 196
WebDAV Client (submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
WebDAV server (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Week starting on (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Wet steam alarm (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Xx-value (1 to 32) (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
x-value (1 to 32) for linearization (parameter) . . . . . 240

Yy-value (1 to 32) (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
y-value (1 to 32) for linearization (parameter) . . . . . 240

Z

Zoom (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Zoom end (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 165, 224
Zoom end for linearization (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . 239
Zoom start (parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 165, 223
Zoom start for linearization (parameter) . . . . . . . . . 238

Endress+Hauser279

*71543130*
71543130www.addresses.endress.com